Home

Global Value

1. Must be on the same row as the _NUC_ code Value is right aligned SH See ACT_S format code If Decay Correction is enabled then this value is decay corrected unless the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded If the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded then this value is set to the Time of Count value Page A40 of A91 Report Code Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes Returned Data XML CSV A_NUC_ Indicates the start of the Nuclide table with the specified records 1 2 4 Must be the first parameter on the nuclide table line The A flag is optional If included all nuclides from the first and second analysis will be included in the table If omitted the last EFF CAL or LIB code found before the nuclide table determines which analysis nuclides to display based on the parameter suffix i e 1st or 2nd analysis nuclides This feature may be used to display the results from each analysis in separate nuclide tables The flag can be set to R M lt gt or omitted to define which nuclides are displayed in the table as follows e R Omits nuclides reported with the lt symbol e M Omits nuclides reported without the lt symbol e lt Shows nuclides with activity less than or equal to the MDA2 value e gt Shows nuclides with activity greater than or equal to the MDA2 value e Omitted Shows all nuclides Nuclide
2. GVSpectrumMux OutputEnergySlopel GVSpectrumMux OutputEnergyQuadratic GVSpectrumMux SpectrumTemplatePath GVSpectrumMux SpectrumOutputPath C User SPC OutputSpectrum spc GVSpectrumMux NumberOfSpectra 2 GVSpectrumMux SpectrumPath1 C User SPC InputSpectruml spce GVSpectrumMux SpectrumPath2 C User SPC InputSpectrum2 spc GVSpectrumMux SumAcquisitionTime F l GVSpectrumMux_SumMethod Multiplex Method Index 1 Raw Channel Data 2 Channel Count Rate 3 Energy Count Rate GVSpectrumMux_ADCConvGainOption ADC Conversion Gain Option Index O Use Template 1 128 2 256 3 512 4 1024 5 2048 6 4096 7 8192 8 16384 9 32768 GVSpectrumMux_OutputADCConvGain ADC Conversion Gain Value Must be blank if the previous parameter is set to zero Otherwise a valid value from the ADCConvGainOption list must be specified GVSpectrumMux_EnergyCalibrationOption Energy Calibration Option Index O Use Template 1 User Defined GVSpectrumMux_OutputEnergyIntercept Energy Calibration Intercept Value Blank to use Template value GVSpectrumMux_OutputEnergySlope Energy Calibration Slope Value Blank to use Template value GVSpectrumMux_OutputEnergyQuadratic Energy Calibration Quadratic Value Blank to use Template value GVSpectrumMux_SpectrumOutputPath File path for output spectrum GVSpectrumMux_SpectrumTemplateOption Spectrum Template Option Index O First Spectrum in List 1 User Defined GVSpectrumM
3. Additional Random Uncertainty RANDUNCERT RandomUncertainty Additional Systematic Uncertainty SYSUNCERT SystematicUncertainty Analysis Date Time SMP_ANAL ReportDate Analysis Engine Name ENG1 ENG2 Analysis Engine Version ENG1 Ver ENG2Ver Analyst Name Analyst Batch ID Batch Change Summary ChangeSummary Comments Comment Custom Parameter Data CUSTOM Where CUSTOM is a valid custom parameter name Detector Description DET Detector Edited Date Time EditDate Editor Name Editor Efficiency Calibration Date Time CAL1EFDate CAL2EFDate Efficiency Calibration Description Eff1 Calibration Eff2 Calibration2 Efficiency Calibration File Name Cal1 CalibrationFile1 Cal2 CalibrationFile2 Energy Calibration Date Time CAL1ENDate CAL2ENDate Gas Decay Tank Pressure GDT P GDTPressure Gross Spectrum Counts or first ROI GRCTS TotalCounts Half Lives Cutoff MAXHL HalfLivesCutoff Library Match Width LIBMW LibraryMatchWidth Library Name LIB1 LIB2 Library1 Library2 PBC File Date Time Modified PBC1Date PBC2Date PBC File Name PBC1Name PBC2Name PBC Match Width PBCMW PBCMatchWidth Peak Cutoff PKCUTOFF PeakCutoff Published Date Time PublishDate Publisher Name Publisher Uncertainty Confidence Interval Cl Confidencelnterval Sigma User Defined Uncertainty Name
4. GVSampleDataPlus_ReanalysisDataFilePath This parameter requires the full path to the reanalysis data file generated by the GVRecallSpectrum application See Section B 3 This parameter is only used when the Reanalysis Flag is set to T Example GVSampleDataPlus_ReanalysisDataFilePath GVRecallSpectrum_DataFilePath This example demonstrates how parameter variables from Quick Start configuration files can be used to define the file path The parameter variable shown is defined in the Global Configuration Files and it routinely used for any program requiring access to this file Page B24 of B77 B 7 2 30 GVSampleDataPlus_CustomDatalnputFilePath B 7 2 31 This parameter requires the full path to a custom data input file as described for GV_GetCustomData See Section B 22 This file is used as a template for creating the Custom Data Output File described below This file should normally contain the following text DisplayForm No ShowSavedData No Example GVSampleDataPlus_CustomDatalnputFilePath CONFIGDIR GVSampleDataPlus_CustomDatalnput txt GVSampleDataPlus_CustomDataOutputFilePath This parameter requires the full path to a custom data output file See Section B 22 This file is generated when the application closes and must be used as an input to the GV_GetCustomData application in the main automation Job file after the application closes and before using the GV_GetCustomData program to capture other cu
5. Reports Notebook QA Charts BA Limits 5 User G Administrat QA Options Detectors da a Database Backup Archive Close Step 1 Step 2 Purge Data All Results Before 1 7 2013 Step 3 Compact Database Load Archived Database Figure A 4 8 1 QA Database Management Archive Current Database A standard Save As dialog is displayed to save the current database to an archive file The default archive path is the current database name followed by the international date format YYYY MM DD This function copies an exact image of the current database to the new file path Purge Data This option is typically used to clear records out of a database when establishing a new database i e for initial installation or establishing a database for a new year if data is archived annually All QA data prior to the specified date will be removed from the database including any comments in the Lab Notebook Configuration parameters such as Detector file paths QA Limits and Reporting parameters are not changed Generally the database should be compacted after purging a significant number of records to reduce the database size Compact Database The QA database does not automatically reclaim unused space when records are deleted After purging data or deleting a large number of data points the database file size can be reduced by using the Compact function This operation is perf
6. 2 Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file contains the RECALL command and the spectrum path If the spectrum file does not exist then the spectrum stored in the database will be extracted to the specified location Note that samples stored in Global Value prior to Version 2 3 will not have spectra available in the database b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammaVision immediately Page B3 of B77 B 4 3 Full Path to Data File required The content of the Data File is created by the application to include data associated with the selected sample This file provides input to other Global Value programs that can run in the re analysis processes such as GVSampleData GVSampleDataPlus GVSampleDataSC and GVGetConfiguration Note that different file names should be specified for each detector to ensure that concurrent automation Jobs do not overwrite the file content before it has been loaded into all subsequent programs in the automation Job The file content is demonstrated with example data as follows SpectrumID 1_00001 Description Unit Vent SampleStart 2000 10 24 23 07 00 SampleStop
7. Call C User 1_SampleData job Start Wait Analyze Page B7 of B77 B 6 2 GVSampleData Excel Interface The Excel interface is implemented by specifying a valid Excel File Path for the respective command line parameter The Excel file is automatically opened when GVSampleData is run After entering sample data and calculating parameters if required the Excel file must be saved and closed When the Excel file is closed the GVSampleData program reads data from the file and updates the SDF and Job files specified on the command line If the Excel file was not saved after changes then inaccurate data will be used for the analysis In addition to the standard analysis parameters saved to the SDF file custom data parameters and additional analysis settings can be set using VBA code The example Excel Interface automation routine in the default installation which is configured to calculate air sample volume demonstrates how to pass custom data parameters to Global Value and populate the Excel interface with the original data during the re analysis process With the exception of the Live Time all other parameters used for the Basic Form Interface are ignored when the Excel interface is implemented If a default Live Time preset is specified on the command line then a prompt for the Live Time as shown in Figure B 6 2 1 will be displayed after the Excel file is closed Note that the Live Time can also be set dynamically using VBA code as described l
8. Example GVSampleDataSC_QABkgdConfigurationFilePath JobDir Det DETNO QA Daily Background cfg where each parameter is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files GVSampleDataSC_Reanalysis This flag is set to either T true or F false If set to T then a valid reanalysis data file path must be provided See B 7 2 29 The Live Time Preset field is also hidden and not used if this parameter is set to T Setting this parameter to anything other than T equates to F false Example GVSampleDataPlus_ReanalysisFlag T GVSampleDataSC_ReanalysisDataFilePath This parameter specifies the full path to the reanalysis data file generated by the GVRecallSpectrum program previously in the automation job See Section B 3 If the Reanalysis Flag is set to T then the contents of this file are read by the application to populate the program fields with data from the previous analysis Example GVSampleDataSC_ReanalysisDataFilePath GVRecallSpectrum_DataFilePath where GVRecallSpectrum_DataFilePath is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files Page B44 of B77 B 8 2 24 GVSampleDataSC_LIMSInputFilePath This parameter specifies the full path to the LIMS Input data file The LIMS term refers to a Laboratory I
9. Item 42 Print MDA in Nuclide Summary Flag should be set to T This parameter determines if the MDA value will be displayed in the Nuclide Summary in addition to nuclide activity Note that MDA values may be optionally suppressed based on nuclide flags set in the analysis library Item 58 Regional Decimal Settings must be set to T This parameter determines if the decimal separator from the Regional Settings in Control Panel will be used to report numbers on the report or if the decimal will be used for reporting numbers regardless of the Regional Settings As described in Section 3 Global Value parses some information directly from the analysis report in addition to loading data from the UFO file and spectrum so the values on the report have to be interpreted as numeric based on the operating system settings or an error will be generated Sample Definition Files SDF Configuration The SDF files contain sample specific analysis settings which are applied to the analysis With the exception of the Sample Description and a few parameters specified in the B30Winds ini file the SDF files can specify every analysis parameter required for an analysis in GammaVision These parameters may also be modified when automation Jobs are executed based on analyst input selection or parameters specified in the Job All of the SDF parameters are discussed in the GammaVision manual however further discussion is provided here to ensure
10. TODAY current date and NOW current date and time If the Collection Start Time field is hidden See B 7 2 4 then this parameter is ignored Examples GVSampleDataPlus_CollectionStartTime 2012 06 08 13 25 GVSampleDataPlus_CollectionStartTime April 1 2012 12 00 GVSampleDataPlus_CollectionStartTime NOW GVSampleDataPlus_CollectionStartTime TODAY Page B16 of B77 B 7 2 4 B 7 2 5 B 7 2 6 GVSampleDataPlus_ShowCollectionStartField This flag is set to either T true or F false to show or hide the Sample Collection Start Time field respectively If the Sample Collection Stop Time field is hidden then the Sample Collection Start Time field is hidden automatically and this parameter is ignored If this field is hidden then the Sample Collection Start time passed to the SDF file will be the same as the Sample Collection Stop Time The label for the Sample Collection Stop Time field is also changed to reflect a single sample date time entry This field must be displayed when using the Flowrate Quantity Calculation Method See B 7 2 11 Example GVSampleDataPlus_ShowCollectionStartField T GVSampleDataPlus_CollectionStopTime This parameter sets the default Date Time for the Collection Stop Time or Sample Date Time field The parameter can be set to a static date time or keywords can be used where TODAY current date and NOW current date and time If the Collection Stop Tim
11. 4 8 Quality Assurance Data Review QA data is reviewed from the QA Administration program which is accessed from the QA button or menus configured on the Quick Start program or directly from Window s shortcuts for remote access computers This program provides data trends electronic review and publishing of the QA reports capturing comments in the Lab Notebook adjusting the QA parameters and limits and database management functions See Section A 4 for additional information related to data review and Section A 5 for information related to the publishing options Add Edit Users and Permissions 1 Add Edit Users and Permissions as described in Section A 2 3 1 2 Synchronize all Global Value databases as described in Section A 2 3 9 Change User Password 1 Users can change their own password as described in Section A 2 1 2 If auser forgets their password then it can be reset as described in Section A 2 3 1 and then changed per Section A 2 1 Resetting the Job Running Flags If GammaVision is terminated abnormally after an automation Job is started by the Quick Start program then flags in the database that specify when Jobs are active may not get reset This condition will be evidenced by a message that indicates that a Job is currently in process for a detector that is not actually running a Job This condition can be corrected using the Database Utility as described in Section A 9 Repairing a Database Connection
12. All parameters in the Sample or Nuclide Data rows are returned exactly as listed in each row If quotes around parameters are desired to ensure that data with commas dates etc are interpreted correctly then the quotes must be included around the applicable parameters in the template The comma or other character delimiter must also be included to separate each parameter Additional text may be included outside of the Sample Data and Nuclide Data record For example a header row or other information may be desired for readability or to satisfy custom application processing requirements The following is an example of a valid CSV Template with a few parameters Note that parameters with the exclamation character SAMPID in this case are available only if configured as custom parameters in Sample Administration Configuration Detector Spectrum SamplelD Sample Date Time Acquisition Start Time CSVSampleData DET SPC SAMPID SMP_STOPT SMP_ACQUI Nuclide Name Activity TOC Activity Activity Units CSVNuclideData PUBNucName PUBNucAct PUBNucTOCAct PUBNucAU Page A55 of A91 OutputincludeSummary This parameter is used only for the PDF and TXT output types It is ignored for XML and CSV output types When set to T true the Summary Report stored for the sample is included after the coversheet in the PDF or TXT report that is generated OutputincludeDetails This parameter is used
13. B 7 2 31 GVSampleDataPlus_CustomDataOutputFilePath B 7 2 32 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationConversionT ablePath Page B15 of B77 B 7 2 1 B 7 2 2 B 7 2 3 GVSampleDataPlus_ReanalysisFlag This flag is set to either T true or F false If set to T then a valid reanalysis data file path must be provided See B 7 2 29 The Live Time Preset field is also hidden and not used if this parameter is set to T Setting this parameter to anything other than T equates to F false Example GVSampleDataPlus_ReanalysisFlag T GVSampleDataPlus_SampleDescription This parameter sets the default Sample Description or the Full Path to a text file with a list of Sample Descriptions To display a dropdown list of sample descriptions use the following syntax for the Sample Description field FILE FILEPATH where FILEPATH is the full path to a text file with a list of sample descriptions Example GVSampleDataPlus_SampleDescription FILE CONFIGDIR DescriptionList txt Where CONFIGDIR is defined in the Configuration Files and the contents of DescriptionList txt are configured as follows First Description Second Description Etc no limits on number of descriptions entered GVSampleDataPlus_CollectionStartTime This parameter sets the default Date Time for the Collection Start field when it is displayed The parameter can be set to a static date time or keywords can be used where
14. Sample Quantity Format 0 000E 00 VOLUNCERT Sample Quantity Uncertainty format 0 00 vu Sample Quantity Units ICUSTOMI Any custom parameters established on the Custom Fields tab in Sample Administration Configuration Editor can be displayed using the Report Code specified for each parameter These codes have an exclamation point at the end X X X X Xx X X X X Xx X X X X Xx X X X X Xx X X X X Xx Page A36 of A91 Report Code Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes Returned Data CVR TXT PDF XML CSV Nuclide Table Parameters ACT_S Primary Nuclide Activity Column normally decay corrected 1 Must be on the same row as the _NUC_ code 2 Value is right aligned 3 See GV_GetRptData Section B 22 for optional default values assigned to nuclides that exceed the Half life cutoff limit 4 Format is determined by the last one or two characters where e S Indicates scientific notation Fixed number format is used if omitted e Specifies the number of digits to follow the decimal place in either scientific or fixed number formats ACTCT_ S Time of Count Activity not decay corrected 1 Must be on the same row as the _NUC_ code 2 Value is right aligned 3 SH See _ACT_S format code _DC_S Decay Correction DC 1 Must be on the same row as the NUC_ code Value is ri
15. UDUN UserDefinedUncertaintyName where 1 through 9 User Defined Uncertainty Value UDUV UserDefinedUncertaintyValue where 1 through 9 Page F3 of F21 Random Summing Factor Correction RSFCORR Random Summing Factor Slope RSFSLOPE Record Type RType Report Details GammaVision output ReportDetail1 ReportDetail2 Report Summary Coversheet ReportSummary Reviewed Date Time ReviewDate Reviewer Name Reviewer Sample Collection Start Date Time SMP_STRT CollectionStart Sample Collection Stop Date Time SMP_STOP CollectionStop Sample Description DESC SampleDescription Sample Pump ID SMPLR SamplePump Sample Quantity VOL Quantity Sample Quantity Uncertainty VOLUNCERT QuantityUncertainty Sample Quantity Units VU QuantityUnits Sample Type STYPE SampleType Site Unit Unit Example Spreadsheet formula GVAnalysisparameter A1 A2 A3 A4 returns the Sample Description for spectrum 01_ 00324 Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains the text 01_00324 a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database Cell A4 contains the text SampleDescription or Desc F2 GVCustomDataParameterListCount GVCustomDataParameterListCount DatabasePath WorkGroupPath This function returns the total number
16. set the following items 1 2 Save File Format Integer SPC All items in the Ask on Save Options section should be unchecked Microsoft Word and Excel Configuration Note that these instructions are for 2007 2013 versions and may differ for other versions The default paragraph properties in Microsoft Word may need to be adjusted to ensure that the report displays properly as follows 1 2 3 Open Paragraph Properties from the Ribbon and set the following parameters a In Spacing section set Before and After to 0 pts b Line Spacing Single Select Save As Default at the bottom of the Paragraph Properties dialog Select the option All Documents based on the Normal dotm template then select OK Security may need to be adjusted in Microsoft Excel to allow the macros to run automatically This is most easily accomplished by adding a trusted location as follows Open the Trust Center File Options then Trust Center on the left panel Open Trust Center Settings from button on the lower right of the Trust Center dialog Select Trusted Locations on the left panel of the Trust Center Settings dialog Select the Add New Location button Browse to the root directory where Global Value Excel files are located typically C User Ensure that the Subfolders of this location are also trusted checkbox is checked Select OK at each of the Trust Center and Excel Options dialogs to back
17. B 7 2 23 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMultiplierValue This parameter sets the default value for the Quantity Calculation Multiplier field This field is only used when the Quantity Calculation Method is set to either Flowrate or UnitConversion See B 7 2 11 Example GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMultiplierValue 0 95 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMultiplierLabel This parameter sets the label for the Quantity Calculation Multiplier field This label is normally set to describe the expected units for this field such as Efficiency wet dry ratio etc When the Quantity Calculation Method dropdown list is displayed this label should be generic enough for all calculation methods so that it is meaningful regardless of the method selected See B 7 2 11 Examples GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMultiplierLabel Sampler Efficiency GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMultiplierLabel Wet Dry Ratio GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMultiplierShow This flag is set to either T true or F false to show or hide the Quantity Calculation Multiplier field When the field is displayed the content is editable by the analyst When it is hidden the default Quantity Calculation Multiplier value is used for any quantity calculations specified as long as the default value is greater than zero If the default is zero then the multiplier is not used in the quantity calculation This field
18. ICL or ICL Value is calculated as ISO NORM Critical Level Decision Threshold times or divided by Adjustment Factor Omitted Adjustment Factor value is displayed without calculations Column total is not calculated XXX is the name of a valid Nuclide Adjustment Factor Table as displayed in the Adjustment Factor Editor Must be on the same row as the _NUC_ code Value is right aligned SH See ACT_S format code XCVR TXT lt PDF Page A42 of A91 Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes Corus gt Report Code Returned Data Z Q A TOTAL Nuclide Activity and Nuclide Adjusted column totals XXX TOTALI 1 TOTAL Column Totals are displayed for all columns except for MDA MDA2 ISONORM MDA Detection Limit ISO NORM Critical Level Decision Threshold Uncertainty and Nuclide Adjustment Factors displayed without calculations i e no or applied for nuclides with activity greater than zero and not reported as lt MDA 2 TOTALI Calculates column totals similar to TOTAL except that the ISO NORM columns Activity TOC Activity Minimum Maximum and any calculations based on these parameters include all nuclide data in the total even if the standard activity is reported as lt MDA 3 Values in any column less than zero are not included in the totals i e wh
19. L Sample Any text can precede the asterisk line but the asterisk line must exist as it signals the start of the parameters to be read GVSampleDataSC_FlowUnitsFilePath This parameter specifies the full path to a text file that defines the valid sample flow and analysis quantity units that are used to populate the Flowrate and Analysis Quantity Units dropdown lists The file also includes conversion factors to convert from the flow units to the analysis units Example GVSampleDataSC_FlowUnitsFilePath CONFIGDIR GVSampleDataSC_FlowUnits txt The file contains comma delimited parameters as follows Flow Units Volume Units Conversion Factor Data starts after the asterisk line kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk SCFM cc 28316 84659 LPM cc 1000 Any text can precede the asterisk line but the asterisk line must exist as it signals the start of the parameters to be read Only acceptable combinations can be used for the Flow rate calculation See Section B 8 1 3 for the Flow rate calculation Page B41 of B77 B 8 2 17 GVSampleDataSC_DilutionFactorsFilePath B 8 2 18 Dilution Scheme 1 100 1 10 plus 1 10 This parameter specifies the full path to a text file that defines the valid dilution schemes that are used to populate the Dilution Schemes list This list is accessed by selecting the Lookup button next to the Dilution Factor field When
20. See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files Page B38 of B77 B 8 2 10 GVSampleDataSC_PBCLoadJobFilePath B 8 2 11 This parameter specifies the file path where the Job content described in Section B 8 2 9 will be saved Example GVSampleDataSC_PBCLoadJobFilePath GLOBALVALUEDIR Temp DETNO _LoadPBCReanalysis job where each parameter is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files GVSampleDataSC_JobTemplateFilePath This parameter specifies the full path to a Job Template file which is used to create the automation Jobs for each sample in the queue as described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 2 This template is not used for Peak or Background QA At a minimum this Job Template must include the following functions os Change Sample Multiple Samples mode only Changer type dictates the specific commands 2 Set Sample Description 3 Copy the Default SDF file to the sample specific SDF file path 4 Update the sample specific SDF file using data from the SDF Data file 5 Load the SDF file into GammaVision 6 Set the Sample Type R Type 7 Load the calibration and library files 8 Load the Custom Data from the Custom Data file 9 Load the PBC file used for the previous analysis for re analysis only 10 Save Analyze and load analysis data into Global Value 11 Create and Print if applicable report
21. Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database F29 GVRadMonitor GVRadMonitor DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID ListID This function returns the Radiation Monitor Reading associated with the specified SpectrumID and ListID Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumiD arguments The database is detector specific ListID is a number that identifies the position of an item within the list Example Spreadsheet formula GVRadMonitor A1 A2 A3 1 returns the first Radiation Monitor Reading for the specified Spectrum ID Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database Page F19 of F21 F30 GVPopulateDetectorList GVPopulateDetectorList DatabasePath WorkGroupPath cbo This procedure adds each Detector Description and associated database path to two columns in the specified combobox control It is only available in VBA Set the BoundColumnr property for the combobox to 2 to set the LinkedCell value to the detector database path when a detector description is selected in the combobox This can be useful when used in combination with the GVPopulateSpectrumList procedure a
22. e Interface Label This field is used for the field labels in the Analysis Editor See Section A 2 2 5 and the GVGetCustomData manual data input interface See Section B 21 e Report Code This field is used to display custom data parameters on Report Templates and are automatically added to the Report Template parameter list described in Section A 2 3 5 e Locked This Option is either set to X to lock the field in the Analysis Editor or left blank to allow editing Typing anything other than an empty space in the Locked field will set it to X This option locks fields that should only be set or modified through the applicable data entry interfaces implemented in automation Jobs where calculations dependencies or validation rules are imposed The following command buttons are available to manage Custom Field parameters e Add Adds a row to the bottom of the grid to allow a new field to be defined e Delete Removes the currently selected field row Any data associated with a deleted parameter will be removed from all databases so caution should be exercised such as archiving the databases before deleting custom fields Page A49 of A91 e Save All custom field data in the grid is saved if valid entries have been entered e Move Up Move Down Moves the currently selected row up or down within the grid Custom parameters are displayed in the Analysis Editor and in the GVGetCustomData data entry prompt in the order in
23. 123 Misc tab GV_GetGDTPressure has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 2 3 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required Figure B 17 1 GV_GetGDTPressure Prompt The database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector Re Analysis Flag optional f set to T true then the GDT pressure from the previous analysis is used as the default Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty so the automation process is unaffected b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close Gamma Vision immediately Page B59 of B77 B 18 GV_GetSamplePump This program sets the Sample Pump Identification for the sample A default entry can be specified in Sample Administration Configuration on the Misc tab Sample Pump ID SPID 6329 254 GV_GetSamplePump has the following comma delimited command line parameters B 19 r Global Value Sample Pump Entry OK 1 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required The database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Figure B 18 1 GV_Ge
24. A 2 3 Sample Administration Configuration Manager Global Value Configuration Management consists of the Security and Configuration Manager modules which are accessed from the Sample Administration toolbar and menus as described in Section A 2 After changes are applied to the default database connected to the application on startup all of the other detector databases must then be updated using the Synchronization Option See Section A 2 3 9 The Security module consists of User Names and Permissions as described in Section A 2 3 1 Security permission is required to access this module The Configuration Manager consists of Detector settings Sample Types Nuclide Adjustment Factor tables Report Templates Published PDF report properties Custom Field definitions and Miscellaneous operational settings as described in Sections A 2 3 2 through A 2 3 8 Configuration permission is required to access this module The Database Synchronization function is described in Section A 2 3 9 Configuration permission is required to synchronize databases Since Security changes also must be synchronized users with Security permission should also normally have Configuration permission However users with Configuration permission are not required to be granted Security permission A 2 3 1 User Accounts and Group Permissions The Security Editor is accessed as described in Section A 2 from the Sample Administration toolbar button or associa
25. Any combination of these parameters may be included as long as the maximum number of top level menus and menu items is not exceeded and each is listed sequentially by number MainMenu This parameter specifies the Index and Name of a top level menu Up to 5 top level menus may be specified Menultem This parameter specifies the Main Menu Index Menu Name and File path including any command line arguments for the application or file to be open when this menu item is selected Up to 20 menu items may be specified for each top level menu A single dash may be specified for the name of a menu item to insert a line separator in the list rather than a file or application name When the separator is used a parameter for the file path is still required In this case any text other than the space character is sufficient An example of a valid configuration is shown below This configuration would generate the menu shown in Figure A 1 4 with links to the specified programs MainMenu 1 Global Value Apps MenuItem 1 Analysis Log C User GVCR AnalysisLog xls Menultem 1 N A MenuItem 1 Database Utility C User GVCR GVDatabaseUtility exe Detector Monitor Spectrum Multiplexer Menultem 1 C User GVCR GVDetectorMonitor exe MenulItem 1 C User GVCR GVSpectrumMux exe Global Value Apps QA Analysis Log Database Utility Detector Monitor Spectrum Multiplexer Figure A 1 4 Global Value Me
26. Edit the Sampler ID text in this field as applicable GDT Pressure Edit the Gas Decay Tank Pressure in this field as applicable RWPs The RWP Radiation Work Permit consists of a prefix and suffix which are concatenated together with a hyphen in between The default prefix usually the 4 digit year is specified on the Misc tab in the Configuration Manager Both the prefix and suffix fields can be changed by editing directly in these fields After entering the prefix and suffix the RWP is added to the list by selecting the Add button in this section To remove an RWP select the item in the list and then select the Remove button in this section or press the Delete key Radiation Monitor Readings The Radiation Monitor may be selected from the list established on the Misc tab in the Configuration Manager Alternatively ad hoc text may be entered in this field as the data entry is not limited to those items in the list After selecting or entering a Radiation Monitor ID or description and an associated numeric reading the pair is added to the list by selecting the Add button in this section To remove a Radiation Monitor Reading select the item in the list and then select the Remove button in this section or press the Delete key Page A18 of A91 A 2 2 3 Nuclide Data The Nuclide Data tab contains nuclide data that can be modified if the Current User belongs to a group with permission to Edit Data and the results have not been locked i e
27. Example Spreadsheet formula GVSpectrumList A1 A2 1 1 03 returns a comma delimited list of all spectra in the specified database that were analyzed after January 1 2003 Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Page F8 of F21 F11 GVNuclideList GVNuclideList DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID Optional IncludeMDA This function returns a comma delimited list of all nuclides associated with the specified SpectrumID if IncludeMDA is set to TRUE If IncludeMDA is omitted or FALSE then only nuclides not flagged as lt MDA are included in the list Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumID arguments The database is detector specific IncludeMDA is a Boolean TRUE FALSE that determines if all nuclides associated with the SpectrumID are returned or only those not flagged as lt MDA Example Spreadsheet formula GVNuclideList A1 A2 A3 TRUE returns a comma delimited list of all nuclides associated with the specified Spectrum ID even those reported as lt MDA Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database F12 GVConsolidateNuclideList GVConsolidateNuclideList NuclideList This function consolidates several nuclid
28. Page F20 of F21 F32 GVGenerateSpectrumList GVGenerateSpectrumList DatabasePath WorkGroupPath _ StartCellRange _ Optional GreaterThanReportDate _ Optional LessThanReportDate _ Optional GreaterThanAcquisitionStartDate _ Optional LessThanAcquisitionStartDate _ Optional GreaterThanSampleStartDate _ Optional LessThanSampleStartDate _ Optional GreaterThanSampleStopDate _ Optional LessThanSampleStopDate This procedure adds each SpectrumID matching the date criteria to subsequent rows in a column starting from the specified cell It is only available in VBA code Argument Notes See Notes 1 amp 2 above for a description of the DatabasePath and WorkGroupPath arguments The database is detector specific StartCellRange is a string representing a cell reference in A1 reference style i e C3 where the first of all SpectrumIDs will be returned GreaterThan LessThan date arguments are valid dates used as query criteria All dates are optional The SampleStopDate is equivalent to the Decay Correction Date in Global Value Example The following code is used in a worksheet button s Click event This code clears cells A13 through A1000 then generates the Spectrum List starting from cell A13 The Database and WorkGroup paths are stored in cells B1 and B2 and the date query parameters are listed in cells C3 through C10 Private Sub Button1_Click Me Range A13 A1000 Clear GVGenerateSpectrumL
29. See Figure B 8 2 This flag is ignored in Reanalysis mode because the program is configured to edit only the sample being reanalyzed Example GVSampleDataSC_MultipleSamples T GVSampleDataSC_DETNO This parameter is the Detector Number as set in Global Value configuration on the Detectors tab This is the same number established for the respective detector in MCB Configuration during the hardware configuration Example GVSampleDataSC_DETNO DETNO where DETNO is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files GVSampleDataSC_DETSPECTRUMPREFIX This parameter is the Spectrum Prefix as set in Global Value configuration on the Detectors tab for the applicable detector Example GVSampleDataSC_DETSPECTRUMPREFIX DETSPECTRUMPREFIX where DETSPECTRUMPREFIX is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files Page B32 of B77 B 8 2 4 B 8 2 4 1 B 8 2 4 2 B 8 2 4 3 B 8 2 4 4 GVSampleDataSC_AnalysisMethodFilePath This parameter requires the full path to the Analysis Method File This file is a comma separated values CSV file format that contains all of the Analysis Methods and associated parameters except for those associated with QA Peaks and QA Background The first record row in this file is reserved as the parameter column
30. True False Half Life days Decay Correction Elapsed Half Lives ISO NORM Activity decayed if applicable ISO NORM Time of Count Activity ISO NORM Counting Uncertainty in Activity Units ISO NORM Counting Uncertainty in Percent ISO NORM Total Uncertainty in Activity Units ISO NORM Total Uncertainty in Percent ISO NORM Minimum Activity ISO NORM Maximum Activity ISO NORM Detection Limit ISO NORM Decision Threshold ndix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumID arguments The database is detector specific Nuclide is the exact nuclide name listed in the database Example Spreadsheet formula GVParseList GVNuclideData A1 A2 A3 A4 1 returns lt if the standard nuclide activity was reported as lt MDA Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database Cell A4 contains the nuclide name Page F13 of F21 F18 GVNuclideDataList GVNuclideDataList DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID This function returns the comma delimited nuclide data string described for GVNuclideData F17 for all nuclides associated with the specified SpectrumID with each nuclide data set delimited by the pipe character Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and S
31. and resolution text separated by the dash character for the associated Spectrum ID Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database Page F15 of F21 F22 GVUnidentifiedPeakData GVUnidentifiedPeakData DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID ListID This function returns a comma delimited string of all Unidentified Peak information stored in the database in the following order 1 Peak Energy 2 Peak Channel 3 Background Counts 4 Net Counts 5 Net Count Rate 6 Percent Uncertainty 7 FWHM 8 Suspect Nuclide 9 Peak Flags 10 Resolution Text as entered in the Analysis Editor Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumID arguments The database is detector specific ListID is a number that identifies the position of an item within the list Example Spreadsheet formula GVParseList GVUnidentifiedPeakData A1 A2 A3 1 1 returns the peak energy for the first unidentified peak associated with the specified Spectrum ID Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database F23 GVUnidentifiedPeakDataList GVUnidentifiedPeakDataList DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID
32. or PC Network Dependent Advantages Server Centric Configuration Remote data access PC failure does not affect entire system Disadvantages Network or server failure disables entire system More expensive Limited Network Dependency Advantages Remote data access Distributed File Configuration Core functionality is still operable with a network server or PC failure Less Expensive Disadvantages Multiple system backups Duplication of common files Network Independent Advantages Single System Backup Less Expensive Single PC Configuration Disadvantages PC failure disables entire system No remote data access Page E1 of E1 Appendix F Excel Add In Function Reference Table of Content Appendix F Notes iia id F2 Fi GVAnalysisP rameter a a O AS F3 F2 GVCustomDataParameterListCOUNT cooccocccoccccccoccccnnoncnconcncnnonnnnononnonnnonnnnnnnannnnonnnnaninnnnos F4 F3 GVCustomDataParameter occoccocccoccccccoccocnconcnconononnonnnnononnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnaninnonnnnnninninos F5 F4 GVINIParameter cccoocccccoccnccccnncocccnconcnnnonnnnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos F5 F5 GVMOStREGCEIIEF IG REITIE e dana F6 F6 GVDeteciorLiStCOUNT uo F6 ET SGV DEIR CIO aaa aa F7 F8 GVDetectorDatabasePalth ooccccoocccccocccccocnccconcncnonnnnononononnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnns F7 F
33. sample Some parameters cannot be modified without a complete reanalysis of the spectrum because changes could invalidate the nuclide results unidentified peaks etc which are determined by the GammaVision analysis engine These fields are shaded in grey below the Report Template field Analysis Report f 4 Nuclide Data Unidentified Peaks Custom Data Change Summary Description High Activity Demo Site Unit MAES Comments My custom comments here a Sample Type X R Type 3456 Sampler ID SPID 123456789 i GDT Pressure psig Report Template EEN Batch ID ooo Collection Start 5 19 2011 19 30 Acq Start 5 19 2011 19 43 00 Collection Stop 5719 2011 19 40 Report Date 1 30 2014 09 49 RWPs 2014 Quantity 566340 cc Live Time 1000 seconds Add 2014 12345 Dead Time 376 x Real Time 1039 seconds Pereza A Calibration Filet ff 47mmFite 0EB Calibration Desc1 ORTEC 1 4 7mmFilterShefO 8 Rad Monitor y Libraryt Fite Reading SOS Calibration File2 _CharcoalCartridge_0 Clb Calibration Desc2 ORTEC 1 Charcoal Cartridge Shelf 0 tod cis Library2 ArCharcoal lib Remove Figure A 2 2 2 1 Analysis Report All of the other parameters on this tab can be modified if the Current User belongs to a group with permission to Edit Data and the results have not been locked i e Reviewed or Published These fields will have a white background if the corresponding parameter code is included o
34. will be displayed in this view When reports are printed to any format other than text i e Printer PDF or MS Word an image of the full spectrum in Log scale will replace the text placeholder When printing to a text file the placeholder is simply removed 1 Summary Option The Custom Summary report generated by the specified template is displayed in the report viewer Note that 2 Details Option The standard GammaVision report for each analysis maximum of 2 is displayed in the report viewer If the Summary option is also checked then the details follow the summary Page A15 of A91 r Spectrum Viewer Y Bxis Properties Style Bar Ss Axis Zoom In Axis Zoom Out Y Axis Zoom In Y Axis Zoom Out Scale Log Y Auto Range Max Max 1 00 05 Min 1 00 01 Save Spectrum Bitmap 1 00E 01 Extract Spectrum H 1026 15 PEREA 1 06 507 37 1013 65 1519 89 2026 10 1_2014 01 30_001 ABC Storm Drain 1 00E 05 1 00E 05 1 00E 03 1 00E 03 1 00E 01 1 00E 01 1 00E 01 Energy Figure A 2 2 1 2 Spectrum Viewer View Spectrum This option displays the interactive spectrum viewer shown in Figure A 2 2 1 2 with data plotted as a Bar Chart Line Graph or Points The spectrum can be zoomed in and out using the buttons above the spectrum window or through keyboard shortcuts where F5 F6 and Up Down arrow keys zoom horizontally and the F7 F8 keys zoom vertically similar to GammaVision The vertic
35. 1 00E 01 Print Spectrum 1 00E 01 1 00E 01 1 10 507 14 1013 30 1519 58 2025 99 Energy Figure A 4 2 2 2 Spectrum Viewer View Spectrum This option displays the interactive spectrum viewer shown in Figure A 4 2 2 2 with data plotted as a Bar Chart Line Graph or Points The spectrum can be zoomed in and out using the buttons above the spectrum window or through keyboard shortcuts where F5 F6 and Up Down arrow keys zoom horizontally and the F7 F8 keys zoom vertically similar to GammaVision The vertical scale can also be viewed in Log or Linear scale with automatic or manual range settings After setting the desired view an image of the spectrum can be saved to a Bitmap file or printed The full spectrum file can also be extracted from the database and saved to a file for use directly in GammaVision Print Destination This section has several options for report output which are applied when the Print button is selected 1 Printer The report is printed on the default printer 2 MS Word The report is displayed in Microsoft Word MS Word is required 3 PDF File The report is saved to a PDF file A standard Save As dialog is displayed indicating the path and file name The default path is the Custom Report Path established for the selected detector in the Configuration Manager and the default file name is the Spectrum name Both the path and file name can be changed in the Save As dialog Also see Ope
36. 2000 10 24 23 07 00 Detector Countroom 4 CalFileName 1_47mmFilter_1 clb LibFileName General lib Quantity 28910000 QuantityUnits cc DatabasePath C User GVCR GlobalValue1 mdb GVDeadTimeCheck This program monitors the detector dead time Global Value Dead Time Monitor Seconds Remaining 8 during automation Jobs and displays a warning to the operator if the dead time limit is exceeded vanme pe Cancel Count If a geometry list is provided then the program pean 0 00 will prompt the user to place the sample in the High Voltage 353v Continue Count next geometry position when the dead time Real Time 218 check fails See Figure B 4 2 The appropriate Figure B 4 1 GVDeadTimeCheck Prompt efficiency calibration file is loaded into A GammaVision when the program closes to ensure SYDeadTimeCheck a that the analysis results are accurate for the sample position specified The Dead Time for Jig A has exceeded the limit of 0 1 Position the sample for Jig B and then select OK If no geometry sequence is provided or placing the sample in the last geometry specified still results in high dead time the user can either cancel the count or elect to continue counting under the existing condition Figure B 4 2 Dead Time Exceeded Message The Restart Acquisition button clears the spectrum and restarts the acquisition This option is useful when it is obvious that a sample was not pla
37. 8 2 5 GVSampleDataSC_JobFilePath B 8 2 6 GVSampleDataSC_CalibrationDirectory B 8 2 7 GVSampleDataSC_LibraryDirectory B 8 2 8 GVSampleDataSC_DETRPTDIR B 8 2 9 GVSampleDataSC_PBCDirectory B 8 2 10 GVSampleDataSC_PBCLoadJobFilePath B 8 2 11 GVSampleDataSC_JobTemplateFilePath B 8 2 12 GVSampleDataSC_DefaultSDFFilePath B 8 2 13 GVSampleDataSC_DefaultReportTemplate B 8 2 14 GVSampleDataSC_ActivityUnitsFilePath B 8 2 15 GVSampleDataSC_SampleSizeUnitsFilePath B 8 2 16 GVSampleDataSC_FlowUnitsFilePath B 8 2 17 GVSampleDataSC_DilutionFactorsFilePath B 8 2 18 GVSampleDataSC_QAPeakJobTemplateFilePath B 8 2 19 GVSampleDataSC_QABkgdJobTemplateFilePath B 8 2 20 GVSampleDataSC_QAPeakConfigurationFilePath B 8 2 21 GVSampleDataSC_QABkgdConfigurationFilePath B 8 2 22 GVSampleDataSC_Reanalysis B 8 2 23 GVSampleDataSC_ReanalysisDataFilePath B 8 2 24 GVSampleDataSC_LIMSInputFilePath B 8 2 25 GVSampleDataSC_EditableLIMSData B 8 2 26 GVSampleDataSC_EditableCollectionEfficiency B 8 2 27 GVSampleDataSC_HideLiveTimePreset B 8 2 28 GVSampleDataSC_ContinueCommand Page B31 of B77 B 8 2 1 B 8 2 2 B 8 2 3 GVSampleDataSC_MultipleSamples This flag is set to either T true or F false When set to T true the grid for adding samples to the automation queue is displayed See Figure B 8 1 If set to anything else the grid is not displayed so the application is effectively in the single sample analysis mode
38. 9 is set to T true this file is read to populate fields on the Basic Form interface The re analysis data file must be generated by the GVRecallSpectrum program section B 3 or a custom developed application capable of creating the same content Not applicable when using the Excel interface 11 Editable Quantity Units Flag optional If set to T true the Quantity Units field on the Basic Form interface is editable to allow changes by the analyst If not set to T the Quantity Units are not editable Not applicable when using the Excel interface B 6 1 GVSampleData Basic Form Interface The Basic Form interface shown in Figure B 6 1 1 is displayed when the in Spaa Excel file path command line parameter Description Cw Circulating Water is omitted Fields in this dialog are Decay Date Time 05 Sep 2012 E populated with default values specified Quantity 7000 m on the command line If the Re Analysis Live Time Preset Io Seconds Flag is set to T then these fields are populated from the Re Analysis Data file l and any default values set in command Figure B 6 1 1 GVSampleData Basic Form line parameters are ignored The following is an example Job excerpt using the Basic Data Entry form Set_Detector 1 Stop Clear Run C User GVCR GVSampleData exe C User 1_AirFilter sdf C User 1_SampleData job Waste Tank Now 55 ml 100 Wait C User GVCR GVSampleData exe
39. A few automation routines are configured to sum spectra from multiple detectors using the GVSpectrumMux program described in Section B 35 This operational array must be defined in terms of the number of detectors and an appropriate system prefix These parameters can be found in the applicable Job Configuration file such as GVSampleDataSC Examples Acquisition Array Acquisition Single Sample cfg as follows NumberOfDetectorsInArray 2 ArraySystemPrefix 1 The same parameters can be found in several QA Job Configuration files that use the Array prefix in the file name Changing the QA Source A When the new QA source uses the same nuclide mix and geometry as the current source then only the following parameters are required to be updated 1 Update the Source Identification Decay Date source assay date and live time in all QA Check Job Configuration Files including standard QA QA with Gain Adjustment and QA with Automatic Energy Calibration as applicable for the site configuration Note that the live time will only need to be adjusted if the count time has been extended over time to ensure that sufficient counts are included in the most limiting peak for the automatic energy calibration in GammaVision to be reliable The parameters in the Job Configuration File are QASOURCEID GVSetSDFParameter_DecayDateTimeValue GVSetSDFParameter_LiveTimeValue GVSetSDFParameter_ActivityUnitsValue 2 Update the Target
40. A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database F25 GVRWPList GVRWPList DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID This function returns a comma delimited string of all Radiation Work Permits associated with the specified SpectrumID The GVParseList function can be used to extract a specific item from the list Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumID arguments The database is detector specific Example Spreadsheet formula GVRWPList A1 A2 A3 returns a comma delimited list of all RWPs associated with the specified Spectrum ID Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database Page F17 of F21 F26 GVRWP GVRWP DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID ListID This function returns the Radiation Work Permit associated with the specified SpectrumID and ListID Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumID arguments The database is detector specific ListID is a number that identifies the position of an item within the list Example Spreadsheet formula GVRWP A1 A2 A3 1 returns the first RWP for the specified Spectrum ID Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cel
41. B 8 2 26 B 8 2 27 B 8 2 28 GVSampleDataSC_EditableLIMSData This flag is set to either T true or F false to enable or disable editing of LIMS Data When set to T the FIELD parameters can be edited after selections have been made in the LIST parameter dropdown boxes When set to F the FIELD parameters are disabled to ensure that the data stored in the LIMS Input File is used for the sample analysis See Section B 8 2 24 for LIMS File field types Example GVSampleDataSC_EditableLIMSData T GVSampleDataSC_EditableCollectionEfficiency This flag is set to either T true or F false to enable or disable editing of the Collection Efficiency field when it is displayed Example GVSampleDataSC_EditableCollectionEfficiency T GVSampleDataSC_HideLiveTimePreset This flag is set to either T true or F false to display or hide the Live Time preset field When displayed a valid number seconds greater than zero is required This flag has no affect in reanalysis mode In this condition the Live Time preset field is hidden because it is not used Example GVSampleDataSC_HideLiveTimePreset F GVSampleDataSC_ContinueCommand This parameter specifies the default functions to be run in the helper Job when the program is closed by selecting the Continue button This parameter is ignored if a Continue Command has been specified for the last sample
42. DatabasePath WorkGroupPath Parameter This function returns a string representing the specified Initialization Parameter from the target database Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath and WorkGroupPath arguments The database is detector specific Parameter is any one of the following items Detector Parameters DetectorlD Detector Description DetectorNumber FilePrefix RPT_PATH Analysis Report Path CRPT_PATH Custom Report Path NET_PATH Network Path Publish_Path Job Path Database Path QADatabase_Path DailySpectrumCounter MonthlySpectrumCounter AnnualSpectrumCounter Non Detector Specific Parameters GDT_Volume Gas Decay Tank Volume MONITORLIST RWP_PREFIX Example Spreadsheet formula GVINIParameter A1 A2 RPT_PATH returns the directory specified for this detector s analysis reports Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Page F5 of F21 F5 GVMostRecentFilename GVMostRecentFilename Directory This function returns a string representing the file name of the last analysis report no extension generated by GammavVision in the specified directory Argument Notes Directory is the full path to the GammaVision Analysis Report directory terminated by the VY character Example Spreadsheet formula GVMostRecentFilename GVINIParameter A1 A2 RPT_PATH returns the fil
43. E a Figure 3 3 1 Global Value Interface Overview Page 18 of 30 As shown in Figure 3 3 1 the Quick Start program is the main launch pad for Global Value automation jobs and support applications on measurement computers It provides links to the Sample and QA Administration programs configurable menu links to other programs or files and dynamically creates and runs automation Jobs for sample measurements for the selected detector Note that remote computers typically do not run the automation Jobs for sample measurements so the other support applications are normally run directly from Window s shortcuts The measurement process for samples and QA is very simple Simply select the detector from the drop down list open the applicable folder in the Automation Groups section and then click on the desired Automation Job The Quick Start program creates the automation Job and then runs it in GammaVision where the user is prompted for additional information or action as required The process of creating automation Jobs is based on merging Job Templates which define the process with Configuration Files which contain the value of parameters to use in the process as described in Sections A 1 and B 31 A typical sample measurement Job Template would follow a process similar to the following Set detetctor Stop clear etc Standard Gamma Vision commands Check Quality Assurance QA Status Optional Prompt for User Login Opti
44. Group that has permission to Review Data When selected the Reviewer and Publisher signatures are removed and the QA report is refreshed to remove the same signatures and dates Publish Button This button is only enabled if the Current User belongs to a Group that has permission to Publish Data When selected the QA report and detailed GammaVision report if this option is enabled in the QA Reporting Parameters are saved to a PDF file in the detector specific Publish Report Path directory as established on the Detectors tab in the Configuration Manager See Section A 2 3 2 The file name and any password protection are determined by settings on the PDF Security Settings dialog If the publisher name already exists then a prompt to publish the report again will be displayed After the PDF report has been saved a program called GVPublishQA exe in the Global Value directory is run to provide additional data processing requirements The QA Publisher described in Section A 5 offers several options for published report content and data integration including the ability to run additional programs for custom applications Publish All Button This button is only enabled if the Current User belongs to a Group that has permission to Publish Data When selected the publishing process described for the Publish Button is applied to every QA measurement in the grid Auto Publish Option When this option is selected the Publish and Publish All buttons
45. If Page B63 of B77 B 23 B 24 this parameter is not set to T true then the nuclide data is stored with the default decayed activity set to 9 999E 99 which is intended to flag the data is questionable 4 Zero Flag for Half Life Cutoff optional If set to T true then nuclides reported as gt X Halflives in the decayed activity column are transferred to the Global Value database with a decayed activity of zero instead of the default value of 9 999E 99 This flag is ignored if the Omit Flag for Half Life Cutoff is not set to T 5 Re Analysis Flag optional f set to T true then the spectrum ID for retrieving analysis results is based on the most recent selection in the GVRecallSpectrum program instead of searching for the most recent analysis as described previously As with all of the Job programs that use the reanalysis flag the GVRecallSpectrum program must be run at the beginning of the automation process to ensure that the correct spectrum ID is used for the reanalysis processes GVincrementCounter This program updates the Daily Monthly and Annual spectrum counters for the specified detector database Each time this program is run the counters are incremented by one The counter values are available as configuration parameters which are dynamically generated by GVQuickStart These parameters can be used in Job Templates and Configuration files to generate spectrum file names from parts of
46. MUN ca ide E oia B71 B 36 GVGanmaProducisChangeSample viscosa i B76 APPENDIX C SUMMARY OF GLOBAL VALUE PROGRAMS cococccccccoooccccconononcnonancnnnnannnnnnnnnannncncnnnns C1 APPENDIX D FIELD SIZE LIMITATIONS 0 0 ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeseeaeeeteeeees D1 APPENDIX E NETWORK CONFIGURATION CONSIDERATIONS cccooccccccoooncconononcncnnnnnnncnncnannncncnnnns El Page 4 of 30 APPENDIX F EXCEL ADD IN FUNCTION REFERENCE 000000 cece eee eee erent tenets enaeeeeeneeeeeneeeees F1 Appendix F NOIES a tte A aa A des DUE NA F2 ET GMA alysisParamele ta tna dios FS F2 GVCustomDataParameterListCOUNt ccooonccccnnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnnncnnnnnonannnononanonononancnononanonononaninonananinns F4 F3 GVCustomDataParameter occononcnnccnnnccncnnnncnncononcncnononcnnnononanonononannnononancno nena ncno no nana eA F5 El GVINIP ArAMele rs cet ee ee oa ee Soe O es TEA F5 F5 GVMostRecentFilenamMe ooocononccccnnnnccncnnnnccncnnoncnnnononcnnnononancnononannnnnonannnnnonanono nena na nono nanananananinns F6 F6 GV DetectOrlHiStGOunnt sita F6 FF lt 2 O A A tata Bole ans ita Neal cach RE esa AO F7 F8 GVDetectorDatabasePath oooncccccnincnccnnnnccncnnnncnnnnnnncnnnononannnononannnononannnononancno nena na nono A Ea R F7 F9 GVDetectorDatabasePathByDetectorNuMbDer ooocccccncccccnnnnnccccccnoncncncconnnncnncnnnnccnnnnnnnccncnnnnnccnn F8 F10 GMS PSCI IMIS Ti asdat tates ttc S atc dec ahc ba
47. NOW Not applicable when using the Excel interface 6 Default Quantity optional This parameter is used to populate the Quantity field on the Basic Form interface Not applicable when using the Excel interface 7 Default Quantity Units optional This parameter is used to populate the Quantity Units field on the Basic Form interface Not applicable when using the Excel interface 8 Default Live Time optional This parameter is used to populate the Live Time field If omitted the Live Time field is hidden such that this application has no control over live time settings This may be desirable in automation processes where different preset types are employed such as Real Time MDA Uncertainty etc or the Live Time preset is not intended to be adjustable by the analyst The Live Time preset field is applicable to both the basic data entry form and the Excel interface If the Re Analysis Flag parameter 9 is set to T true then the Live Time field behaves as if the default live time was omitted 9 Re Analysis Flag optional If set to T true the Sample Description Decay Date Quantity and Quantity Units fields on the Basic Form interface are populated with data from the previous analysis Any default parameters are ignored A valid Re Analysis Data File path parameter 10 must also be specified Not applicable when using he Excel interface 10 Re Analysis Data File optional f the Re Analysis Flag parameter
48. Retry button is displayed to allow the user to resend the command after correcting the condition Page B77 of B77 Appendix C Summary of Global Value Programs This appendix provides a quick reference to the application programs installed with Global Value and their respective command line parameters The list is organized by the high level application interfaces Utility Programs and automation Job programs used with routine QA and Sample measurements These programs are installed in the C User GVCR directory along with other support files and subfolders required for normal operation of Global Value Refer to the applicable section of this User Manual for additional detail related to each program The following parameters are used throughout the table below e DETNO The Detector Number specified in Sample Administration Configuration e DETDBPATH Full Path to the applicable Detector Database for Sample data e DETQADBPATH Full Path to the applicable Detector Database for QA data e JOBPATH Full Path to a Job file created by the program and subsequently called in the main Job Refer to the GammaVision User Manual for detail related to SDF Sample Defaults Files UFO Unformatted Output Files and PBC Peak Background Correction Files Main Application and Administration Programs Program Section Command Line Parameters GlobalValueQuickStart A 1 N A 1 DETDBPATH Gveamplengmin ee Detector Description DET
49. Reviewed or Published The Analysis and Nuclide Name are not editable except when adding a new Nuclide to the grid manually by selecting the last empty row in the grid In this condition the Analysis is determined by selecting the applicable analysis geometry from a displayed list and the Nuclide Name can be selected from a list or a typed manually The nuclide list is recommended to avoid spelling errors and ensure that the nuclide names in Nuclide Adjustment Factors match those used for analysis Once the nuclide name is specified the rest of the nuclide data fields must be entered Typically the nuclide data can be found in various locations of the standard GammaVision report or will be manually calculated When adding a new nuclide or modifying any of the other data fields the Edited status automatically updates to Yes This tab has two optional grid displays The Standard nuclide data display is shown in Figure A 2 2 3 1 and the ISO NORM nuclide data display is shown in Figure A 2 2 3 2 The Show ISO NORM checkbox under the Nuclide Data tab is used to toggle between the two views The Show ISO NORM option can be hidden with the applicable setting on the Misc tab in the Configuration Manager to prevent toggling between the Standard and ISO NORM Nuclide Data See Section A 2 3 7 This option is typically used when ISO NORM data is not used for a particular application however the checkbox may be checked before hiding it suc
50. Under rare circumstances a database connection may be abnormally terminated while data is being written to the database If this occurs the Global Value applications may not be able to restore a connection and a series of errors will be displayed when attempting to run the application This condition can be corrected by running the Database Utility program as described in Section A 9 Create Geometry Source Certificate from a Master Source Certificate When sources are prepared from a common master supply i e a liquid vial the source certificates for the individual geometries are easily generated after creating a source certificate for the master source in GammaVision This processes is accomplished using the GVEFTConvert program as described in Section A 13 Page 22 of 30 4 9 Add Detector to the Global Value Configuration Note If adding a new computer to the Global Value system to support installation of a new detector then install Global Value Program Files only then copy the content of the C User folder from an existing computer to the new one as a starting point After configuring the new detector as described below then folders and files associated with detectors controlled from other computers can be deleted from the new computer Once a gamma detector system is established in Global Value adding an additional detector is a relatively easy task as follows Ensure that the detector has been configured for use with GammaVisi
51. Value Quick Start on lab computers used for sample measurements or from a Windows Shortcut on remote access computers used for data review When started from a Windows shortcut the default view is normally as shown in Figure A 2 1 When started from Quick Start the program opens with the Analysis Editor displayed and the current Quick Start detector selected by default The program can accept two optional comma delimited command line arguments listed in any order 1 Full Path to a target detector database This path overrides the default database specified on the Misc tab in the Configuration Manager and is not typically necessary 2 Detector ID If the Detector ID is provided then the Analysis Editor is activated with the specified detector selected in the Detector dropdown list when the program opens This mode immediately displays the most recent analysis report for that detector This method is used by Quick Start when the Samples button is selected Note that the Detector ID is the description specified on the Detectors tab in Configuration Manager NOT the detector number 3 Global Value Sample Administration File View Login Change Password Ls Current User Admin x a User Group Administrator Figure A 2 1 Sample Administration Default View The Global Value structure requires that each detector is assigned a unique database to store analysis results for Samples in order to provide b
52. Yes Center MM DD YYYY hh ren 15 Unit Unit Yes Left Text 10 SampleType SampleType Yes Left Text 15 RType RType Yes Left Text 15 Batch Batch Yes Left Text 15 Samp lePump Samp lePump Yes Left Text 15 Analyst Analyst Yes Left Text 15 Reviever Reviever Yes Left Text 15 ReviewDate ReviewDate Yes Center YYYY MM DD hh 20 Publisher Publisher Yes Left Text 15 PublishDate PublishDate Yes Center YYYY MM DD hh rm 20 SpectrumPath SpectrumPath Yes Left Text 30 TotalCounts TotalCounts Yes Center 0 0000E 00 15 Quantity Quantity Yes Center 0 0000E 00 15 QuantityUnits QuantityUnits Yes Center Text 10 ActivityUnits ActivityUnits Yes Center Text 10 LiveTime LiveTime Yes Center D 10 RealTime RealTime Yes Center 0 10 DeadTime DeadTime Yes Center 0 00 10 Calibrationi Calibrationi Yes Left Text 30 CalibrationFilel CalibrationFilel Yes Left Text 30 Libraryl Libraryl Yes Left Text 20 Calibration2 Calibration2 Yes Left Text 30 CalibrationFile2 CalibrationFilez Yes Left Text 30 Library2 Library2 Yes Left Text 20 GDTPressure GDTPressure Yes Center 0 00 10 RType RType Yes Left Text 15 RWPList RWUPList Yes Left Text 30 RadMonitorList RadMonitorList Yes Left Text 30 Close Figure A 7 3 Analysis Log Field Properties Page A84 of A91 A 8 The Analysis Log can display over forty fields all of which can be used as filter criteria The order in which the fields are displayed is the same as displayed in this form The fields can be changed by selecting a row and t
53. additional reporting and data integration options automated using the QA Publisher program described in Section A 5 As shown in Figure A 4 2 1 the QA Sample Manager is comprised of a main header with selection Detector ID a yl ORTEC 11 Refresh Grid PDF Security List Criteria Lan PET Al Measurements v Review All Publish Publish all M Gnomes QADateTime Analyst Reviewer ReviewDate Publisher PublishD ate 10 5 2011 14 01 07 Admin Admin 10 5 2011 18 49 10 5 2011 14 01 06 Admin Admin 10 5 2011 18 49 10 6 2011 06 13 59 Admin Admin 10 6 2011 06 58 10 6 2011 15 31 03 10 6 2011 18 24 DAPeak 10 6 2011 15 31 04 Admin Admin 10 6 2011 18 24 Viewer Font Size g XYZ Nuclear Facility E Chemistry Department l Quality Assurance Spectrum Analysis M DA Report view V Analysis Spectrum Spectrum 11_2011 10 06_009_QA Document Type D 123456 Acquired 10 6 2011 3 31 03 PM Detector Count Room 11 Report Content Print Destination Cr a E E OOOAAAA lt gt gt gt y y A A A 5 Target L Ctrl L_ Tol Measured H_Tol H_Ctrl Results ISA f ERNE ESNE Ee AAA eter on C PDF File QA 122 C Text File Channel 488 00 484 00 485 00 487 60 491 00 492 00 PASS Energy 122 07 121 77 121 87 122 01 122 27 122 37 PASS Vv FWHM 0 390 0 75 0 80 0 92 1 00 1 15 PASS ActivityDiff 1078 000 7 500 5 000 2 319 5 000 7 500 PASS A A aa Qa 662 Energy 661 66 661 06 661 36 661 56 661 96 662 26 PASS FWHM 1 40 1 05 1 26 1 35 1 54 1 75 PASS Activ
54. an item in this list is selected and the dialog box is closed the associated dilution value is set in the Dilution Factor field This process can simplify the calculation of multiple dilutions when the typical dilution fractions are pre defined OK Cancel Example R E Figure B 8 2 17 Dilution Schemes GVSampleDataSC_DilutionFactorsFilePath CONFIGDIR GVSampleDataSC_DilutionFactors txt The file contains comma delimited parameters as follows Dilution Scheme Dilution Factor Data starts after the asterisk line 1 10 10 1 100 100 1 10 plus 1 10 100 Any text can precede the asterisk line but the asterisk line must exist as it signals the start of the parameters to be read GVSampleDataSC_QAPeakJobTemplateFilePath This parameter specifies the full path to a Job Template file which is used to create the automation Jobs for the QA Peaks Analysis Method as described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 2 At a minimum this Job Templates must include the following functions N were a Change Sample Multiple Samples mode only Changer type dictates the specific commands Set Sample Description 3 Copy the Default SDF file to the sample specific SDF file path 4 Update the sample specific SDF file using options set in the QA Peak Configuration File See Section B 8 2 20 5 Load the SDF file into GammaVision 6 Load the calibration and library files 7 Save Analyze and load QA data into Glo
55. analysis engine specified in the automation process matches the name used in the analysis options under all circumstances Note If the analysis engine must be changed globally then it may be desirable to copy the AnalysisEngine parameter to the file O_SiteSpecific cfg so that site specific changes to global configuration parameters are more easily identified Configuring Automation Jobs Several automation processes for sample and QA measurements are available in the Default Configuration Files to accommodate most standard processes These processes are grouped by the sample data interface program GVSampleData GVSampleDataPlus and GVSampleDataSC and QA As described in Section A 1 Job files are created and run from the Quick Start program by combining Job Configuration files with Job Templates The Job Templates define the automation process and are stored in the directory C User GVCR Job Templates Each of the default Job Templates use a prefix that defines the interface type followed by a description of the process For example GVSampleData_Acquisition jtp is used for measurements associated with data acquisition when using the GVSampleData program interface whereas GVSampleData_Reanalysis jtp is used for spectrum reanalysis processes Other Job Template files will use the GVSampleDataPlus GVSampleDataSC QABkgd or QAPeak prefixes Within the Job Templates various piped parameters are used as placeholders for the actual code
56. and second X X X X X CAL2ENDate Analysis Report Format Regional Short Date and Time format hh mm XML CSV Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss ICHANGESUMMARY Full content of Change Summary left aligned on report X X X X Cl Confidence Interval Sigma from analysis settings format 0 X X X X X COMMENT Comments field content left aligned on report X X X X ICSR Cs 134 137 Ratio Format 0 000 X X X Must be located on the report after the nuclide table DEAD Dead Time Format 0 00 X X X X X DESC Sample Description X X X X X DET Detector Description X X X X X EDITDATE Most recent date when changes were applied in the Analysis Editor X X X X X Report Format Regional Short Date and Time format hh mm XML CSV Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss EDITOR Most recent Editor Name X X X X X EFF1 Efficiency Calibration Description for first or only and second X X X X X EFF2 analysis ENG1 Analysis Engine used for first or only and second analysis X X X X X ENG2 Page A32 of A91 Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes Sees 5 Report Code Returned Data Z aS 6 ENG1VER Analysis Engine Version for first or only and second analysis XX X X X ENG2VER GDT P Gas Decay Tank Pressure Format 0 00 X X X X X GDT V Gas Decay Tank Volume Format 0 00 X X X IGRCTS Total Gross Counts in the first ROI or the entire spec
57. are hidden and reports are automatically published as described for the Publish or Publish All buttons when the Review or Review All button is selected 10 QA Measurement Grid This list is populated with QA results meeting the filter criteria The grid can be refreshed using the Refresh Grid button to reflect changes due to the addition of new records or data being reviewed or published When a row is selected in the grid the associated analysis report is displayed in report viewer Right click in the grid to display the Delete option if the user has DELETE permission When selected a prompt will be displayed indicating that the selected QA sample will be permanently deleted This includes ALL of the QA data associated with the selected report that is stored in the database Generally it is good practice to archive or backup the database prior to deleting QA data No files outside of the database are affected i e published reports spectra etc 11 Refresh Grid Button This button is used to refresh the QA Measurement grid based on the 12 PDF Security Button This button is used to POF Fie Nave Fomai List Criteria and QA Type filters after changes to the records in the grid have been applied such as review and publish signatures a PDF Security Settings Available File Name Fields Used File Name Fields SpectrumiD gt lt access the PDF Security Settings dialog shown in Figure A 4 2 1 2 which allows setting the
58. are published from the Global Value Sample Administration program the publisher program is automatically run with the full path to the published PDF report passed as a command line parameter The default publisher program requires this PDF report path to use only the Spectrum ID as the file name This file naming convention is used by default but it is possible to change the published PDF file name in the Sample Administration Configuration If the file name is changed to anything other than only the Spectrum ID then the publisher program will not behave as expected Additionally the Spectrum ID must start with the detector number followed by an underscore i e 1_ for Detector 1 This is normally accomplished by configuring the File Prefix as X_ where X is the detector number on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration and then using the DETSPECTRUMPREFIX parameter generated by Quick Start as the first parameter in generating the Spectrum ID The publisher program GVPublishSample resides in the installation directory with all of the other Global Value programs and has an INI file by the same name The settings in the INI file determine which files are generated when the publisher runs and which applications will be launched File types that can be generated include PDF Text XML and CSV In combination with the GVDataExport program it can also be used to push analysis results into a non secured Microsoft Acc
59. automatic width is sufficient However when very large monitors with high resolution are installed the spacing may not be optimal In these cases the manual settings may be desired to reduce the width of the list controls Note that the Sample QA and Close buttons also align to right side of the Active Jobs list so their position is also affected when changing the list width settings r Global Value Quick Start Global Value Apps QA Detector APGE ST y Ml Always On Top Samples Automation Jobs Active Jobs Show Remote Jobs Background Check BA Check Count Sample Reanalyze Sample Figure A 1 3 Global Value Quick Start Header Another situation where manual width settings are useful is when there are only a few automation Jobs in the main Job folder and no subfolders are necessary In this case the Automation Groups list can be hidden by setting the MaxAutomationGroupsWidth parameter to one 1 The other lists can either be left at the defaults or manually set to approximately half of the available twip width for a display similar to Figure A 1 3 Menus are configured using a series of Main Menu and Menu ltem parameters as shown below MainMenu 1 Global Value Apps MenuIltem 1 Analysis Log C User GVCR AnalysisLog xls Page A4 of A91 A 1 2 The menu structure contains two key parameters MainMenus and Menultems which must contain the required pipe separated inputs
60. be displayed If not already locked as a result of the Review process all of the fields on the tabbed sections are locked to prevent changes After the PDF report has been saved a program called GVPublishSample exe in the Global Value directory is run to provide additional data processing requirements The Sample Publisher described in Section A 3 offers several options for published report content and data integration including the ability to run additional programs for custom applications 10 Publish All Button This button is only enabled if the Current User belongs to a Group that has permission to Publish Data When selected the publishing process described for the Publish Button is applied to every spectrum report in the Spectrum List 11 Auto Publish Option When this option is selected the Publish and Publish All buttons are hidden and reports are automatically published as described for the Publish or Publish All buttons when the Review or Review All button is selected Page A14 of A91 A 2 2 1 Analysis Report The Analysis Report tab is the main interface for reviewing analysis results lt includes a text only representation of the analysis report along with a Spectrum Histogram viewer with various print and export options The content in the report viewer may appear to be editable but no changes from this interface are retained in the database or included with reports generated from the print options Sample Data Nuc
61. depending on the automation processes implemented Typically these automation processes use the WAIT ENG command after the spectrum analysis where ENG is the name of the analysis engine This WAIT command ensures that the analysis has completed before the automation process runs Global Value programs to read the analysis results Therefore the analysis engine specified in the analysis options must be the same as the engine name specified with the WAIT command in the automation Job This is accomplished by setting the Analysis Engine name in the Configuration Files Page 25 of 30 4 15 When using the default configuration files the analysis engine name is specified in the global configuration file 3_GammaVisionFunctions cfg which can be found in the directory CiusenG VCR Configuration Files The parameter name is AnalysisEngine and this parameter is used in conjunction with the Analyze parameter as follows Review Section A 1 for details related to Job Templates and Configuration parameters AnalysisEngine Env32 Analyze Analyze CrLF Wait AnalysisEngine This parameter is set globally because the same analysis engine is typically used for all measurements within a particular site configuration However if a different analysis engine is desired for specific measurements then the AnalysisEngine parameter can be set in the Job Configuration file to override the global setting It is critical to ensure that the
62. in the queue or the only sample when using Single sample mode See Section B 8 2 4 21 for details related to the use of the Continue Command Note that the Continue Command is not followed by the equal sign in this context but it is required when specified in the Analysis Methods Example GVSampleDataSC_ContinueCommand Run_GVAskConfirm where Run_GVAskConfirm is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files Page B48 of B77 B 8 3 GVSampleDataSC Output Configuration File As described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 2 an automation Job is created for each sample in the queue when the Continue button is selected This process is similar to that described for the GVTemplateMaster in Section B 32 which requires a Configuration File and a Job Template The Job Template was described in Sections B 8 2 11 B 8 2 18 and B 8 2 19 for Samples QA Peaks and QA Background respectively The Configuration File content is the subject of this section The Configuration File consists of a series of parameters generated by GVSampleDataSC followed by the entire content of the configuration file passed to this program on the command line Additionally when the Analysis Method is QA Peaks or QA Background the content of the QA Peak or QA Background Configuration file See Sections B 8 2 20 and B 8 2 21 respectively is added to the beginning of the file c
63. in use and which computer started the automation routine If the automation routine is shutdown abnormally i e GVQuickStart or GammaVision is closed from Windows Task Manager or a Run Time error occurred then this flag will remain set in the database Under this condition GVQuickStart will not be able to run an automation routine for the associated detector system until the associated flag is reset using the Database Utility program To reset the flag browse to the database by selecting the button next to the text field or type the path and select the Clear Acquisition Job Running Flag or Clear Reanalysis Job Running Flag button as applicable See Figure A 9 1 A message will be displayed indicating that the flag has been reset and GVQuickStart will be able to run automation routines Database Repair Although it is extremely rare it is possible to corrupt a database if it is abruptly disconnected during a write operation This is most likely to occur in a networked operation where the local computer is disconnected from the network or shutdown while a remote computer is writing data A corrupted database is apparent when the Global Value programs cannot access the database and a series of errors will generally be displayed when programs are run To repair the database browse to the database by selecting the button next to the text field or type the path and select the Repair Selected Database button See Figure A 9 1 An appropriat
64. information for samples from the Spectrum Analysis Report and UFO file and stores a copy of the analysis report in the analysis database The GVQABackground program retrieves analysis information for background QA measurements from the Spectrum Analysis Report and UFO file and stores a copy of the analysis report in the QA database This program also generates the Background QA report based on settings established in the QA Administration program and optionally renders it in various formats The GVQAPeaks program retrieves analysis information for QA source measurements from the Spectrum Analysis Report and UFO file and stores a copy of the analysis report in the QA database This program also generates the QA report based on settings established in the QA Administration program and optionally renders it in various formats Non Analysis QA programs are used to set the current user for QA measurements or check the detector QA status when measuring samples The UfoToPBC program dynamically creates a background correction file based on the analysis results This program is normally used in conjunction with the Background QA measurements but can also be used to create background correction files associated with Blank measurements Page 16 of 30 B The Sample Administration program contains the Configuration Editor where Detector parameters Adjustment Factors Report Templates and other configuration parameters are managed as we
65. is established only for the local computer It is not pushed to the other databases with the Synchronization described in Section A 2 3 9 e GammaVision Path This field requires the full path to the GammaVision program on the local computer The Quick Start program uses this path to launch GammaVision with automation Job files so a valid path is required The path may be entered directly or use the button next to this field to browse to GV32 exe which is normally installed in the directory C Program Files GammavVision for 32 bit Windows or C Program Files x86 GammavVision for 64 bit Windows NOTE This parameter is established only for the local computer It is not pushed to the other databases with the Synchronization described in Section A 2 3 9 Page A47 of A91 If Global Value is being installed on a remote computer that does not have GammaVision i e for remote data sharing only then a message will be displayed when the Configuration Manager is accessed from the Sample Administration indicating that the GammaVision path is invalid along with a prompt to set the GammaVision path To avoid this message when accessing the Configuration Manager establish a place holder file by creating a text file on the local computer renaming it to GV32 exe then setting the full path to that file in this field Gas Decay Tank Volume This is the Gas Decay Tank volume in Cubic feet that is used for the Total Equivalent Xenon TEXE
66. is the exact nuclide name listed in the database AdjustmentTable is the name of a valid Adjustment Table as displayed in the Configuration Editor Example Spreadsheet formula GVNuclideFactor A1 A2 A4 A5 returns the DAC Adjustment Factor for the specified nuclide Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A4 contains the nuclide name Cell A5 contains the name of the nuclide Adjustment Factor table i e DAC DEI etc Page F11 of F21 Page F12 of F21 F17 GVNuclideData GVNuclideData DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID Nuclide This funct ion returns a comma delimited string of all nuclide information stored in the database in the following order Argument Notes See Appe Less than flag lt or empty string if activity is not reported as lt MDA Standard Activity Value Decayed if applicable Analysis Number 1 or 2 2 is for the second result set of a dual analysis Nuclide ListID used for reporting order Edited Flag True False indicates if the nuclide data was modified in the Analysis Editor Standard Uncertainty as reported on the Gamma Vision report Standard MDA Standard Counting Uncertainty in Activity Units Standard Total Uncertainty in Activity units Standard MDA2 normally set to Critical Level method in B30Winds ini file Standard Time of Count Activity Nuclide Name Bad Shape Flag
67. o dP amp Hol Ins Pac For Dat Rev Vie Adc d 9 Q o r amp P7 E v B16 X Fe v A a E m 1 Description Portable Portable Sampler Air Filter Volume Calculation 2 Collection Start Date Time 10 17 2000 22 03 3 Collection Stop Date Time 10 24 2000 23 07 Peer ey peer Portae y 4 Decay Date Time 10 24 2000 23 07 P gig baba Z 5 Volume 2 891E 07 Sample Description HON SANAR peras 2 Collection Star MEMORIA AAN Collection Stop RWANAISO2Sor r Sample Fiowate MO vr C 2 Collection Efficiency 0 95 E Conversion Factor to cc s 1000 16 A 17 Collection Time 10144 minutes 18 19 20 P 21 Counting Volume cc s 2 8910E 07 22 ad 23 ad M 4 r GlobalValue Calc 2 IK ri M 4 gt gt GlobalValue Calc 2 4 Ready 5 0 1 100 E Ready ee 100 E l A A A A Figure B 6 2 2 Data Entry Worksheet Figure B 6 2 3 GlobalValue Worksheet B 6 2 2 Using Excel Forms and Macros Visual Basic for Applications VBA may be used to optimize data entry and populate the worksheet with the original data during a re analysis process VBA Forms may also be employed when a more standard interface is preferred over the spreadsheet view Forms may also simplify data validation and other processes during or after data entry for those familiar with VBA programming Workbooks that run Excel Forms or Macros on startup can fire these processes twice in succession when launched from GVSampleData The typical result is that two form
68. of Custom Data Parameters defined in the specified database Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumiD arguments The SpectrumID records must be stored in the specified database path Example Spreadsheet formula GVCustomDataParameterListCount A1 A2 returns the number of custom parameters defined in GV_Report1 mdb Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Page F4 of F21 F3 GVCustomDataParameter GVCustomDataParameter DatabasePath WorkGroupPath ListID This function returns the name of the Custom Data Parameter associated with the specified ListID with the exclamation point character appended as a suffix The string returned by this function may be used with the GVAnalysisParameter function to return the value associated with the custom parameter for a specified Spectrum ID Argument Notes See Notes 1 amp 2 above for a description of the DatabasePath and WorkGroupPath arguments The database is detector specific ListID is a number that identifies the position of an item within the list Example Spreadsheet formula GVCustomDataParameter A1 A2 2 returns the second custom parameter name followed by Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw F4 GVINIParameter GVINIParameter
69. only for the PDF and TXT output types It is ignored for XML and CSV output types When set to T true the Detailed Report stored for the sample is included as the last section of the PDF or TXT report that is generated OutputDirectory A valid directory file folder path must be specified to indicate where the rendered file will be stored The file name will be the same as the original PDF file name which is also the Spectrum ID OutputFileExtension This parameter defaults to the Output type PDF TXT XML or CSV if no extension is specified Other extensions may be assigned as necessary For example a text file may be saved with the DAT extension if desired RunAppPath This parameter requires the full path to an application to be run Command line parameters may also be assigned as described below RunAppEnabled This parameter is set to T true to enable the specified application Anything other than T will not allow the application to run This parameter allows configurations to be established for testing or other temporary conditions without removing the complete set of parameters RunAppCommandLineParameter Multiple Command Line parameters can be specified for the application If more than one is provided then they will be comma delimited in the order in which they are listed in the configuration file The following dynamic parameters may be specified in addition to any static parameters desired DE
70. or MS Word or saving the report to PDF or Text formats This placeholder is used because the number of pages will change depending on the print option Summary Details or both PBC1DATE Peak Background Correction DATE for the First or only and X X X X X PBC2DATE second Analysis Report Format Regional Short Date and Time format hh mm XML CSV Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss Page A33 of A91 Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes crus gt Report Code Returned Data SE PBC1NAME Peak Background Correction Filename for the First or only and X X X X X PBC2NAME second Analysis PBCMW PBC Match Width from analysis settings format 0 00 X X X X X PKCUTOFF Peak Cutoff from analysis settings format 0 00 X XX PUBLISHDATE Publish Date Time X X X X X Report Format Regional Short Date and Time format hh mm XML CSV Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss PUBLISHER Publisher Name X X X X X RADMON Radiation Monitors and values Each set separated by commas X X X X X RANDUNCERT Additional Random Uncertainty from analysis settings X X X X X format 0 00 REAL Real Time Format 0 X X X X X REVIEWDATE Review Date Time XX X X X Report Format Regional Short Date and Time format hh mm XML CSV Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss REVIEWER Reviewer Name XX X X X RSFCORR Random Summing Factor Correction form
71. process as follows 1230 2014 09 58 Review All Publish Publish All MAPAS Figure A 2 3 Analysis Editor Header Detector List This list is populated with all detectors configured on the Detectors tab in Configuration Management See Section A 2 3 2 and an Archived Database option When a detector is selected from the list the program will connect to the specified detector database to display analysis information If the associated database is not available i e the network server or local computer is not accessible then a message is displayed indicating that the database could not be connected When the Archived Database option is selected a standard File Open dialog is displayed to allow the user to select an archived Detector database Spectrum List This list is populated with spectra from the selected detector database based on the Filter By criteria specified below The list can be refreshed by clicking on the Refresh button next to this field to reflect changes due to the addition of new records or data being reviewed or published When a spectrum filename is selected from this list the associated analysis information is displayed in the signature grid and tabbed sections Filter By List This field filters the list of spectra displayed in the Spectrum dropdown to only those meeting the specified criteria This filtering capability is intended to simplify the electronic review process It is not intended as a me
72. result in unexpected results The most notable issue when copying calibration files outside of GammaVision is that the calibration file path shown on the analysis report will be the same as the analysis spectrum path instead of the actual calibration file path When this occurs the default geometry option in any of the Global Value program interfaces will be blank when running the re analysis automation processes Create a calibration file in the Energy calibration director C User Cal Energy if using the Default Configuration with the name X_Energy clb where X is the detector number This calibration file can be copied from an existing file used for another detector without any additional changes required Create a new folder in the root Spectrum directory C User SPC if using the Default Configuration with the name DetX where X is the detector number Create a new Detector database by copying the file GlobalValue1 md_ from the Default Configuration to the desired location using a naming convention similar to existing detector databases i e GlobalValueX mdb where X is the Detector number Page 23 of 30 4 10 4 11 4 12 9 Ifthe detector QA data will not be stored in an existing QA database then create a new QA database by copying an existing QA database for any detector to the desired location with a logical file name Note that QA can be established for multiple detectors in a single database depending on the networ
73. retaining all of the original data in the database Typically the workbooks with the data set used to recalculate limits should be saved and possibly protected to avoid inadvertent changes if needed for review at a later time Page A68 of A91 A 4 5 QA Options The QA Reporting Parameters and Options page allows customization of the QA report header and footer fields along with options related to the report content o Global Value QA Administration QA Reporting Parameters and Options File Database Path C User GVCR Databases GlobalValuel1QA mdb t9 La aay S Q Current User Admin Login Reports Notebook BA Charts ic Detectors QA Limits Database User Group Administrator Report Type BA Peaks C QA Background Report Header Line 1 xz Nuclear Facility Analysis Report Options Report Header Line 2 Chemistry Department I Print Analysis Report when QA is run Report Header Line 3 Quality Assurance Spectrum Analysis V Save Analysis Report with QA Report Custom Text Field1 IV Publish Analysis Report Custom Text Field2 7 Print Spectrum on QA Report Custom Text Field3 Custom Text Field4 7 Document Code Document Type D 123456 Perform Signature Analyst Review Signature Approval Figure A 4 5 1 QA Reporting Parameters and Options The following fields are available to establish the QA Report content Report Type This selection dete
74. several Job Templates that can be used for routine measurement processes or as a starting point for configuring automation processes tailored to a specific application These files can be found in the C User GVCR Job Templates directory The Default Global Configuration Files contain the predefined parameters that are used with the default Job Templates These files can be found in the C User GVCR Configuration Files directory Changes to Global parameter settings should be made in the file O_ SiteSpecific cfg to override the standard settings with those desired for a specific site configuration Additional configuration parameters are provided in each Job Configuration file that is selected from the Quick Start interface to initiate the automation process Any of the global configuration parameters can be overridden by setting them in the Job Configuration files The best way to fully understand how automation jobs are rendered by merging Job Templates and Configuration files is to run an automation routine from Quick Start After the Job is started then compare the Job content X_Run job or X_RunReanalysis job in the C User GVCR directory to the Job Template content and replacing the parameters in the Job Template with those defined in the GVQuickStart cfg or GVQuickStartReanalysis cfg files in the C User GVCR directory These configuration files contain the content from the Job Configuration File Quick Start program and Global Configuration F
75. size variables have PUBLIC scope to the workbook Sub Auto Close On Error Resume Next With Application If Not sLeftPos 0 Then Left sLeftPos Top sTopPos Height sHeight Width sWidth End If End With End Sub B 6 2 3 Custom Data Parameters and Re Analysis Automation The Excel Interface can be used in combination with other Global Value Job Programs to pass custom data associated with the sample during the measurement process and re populate the Excel interface with the original sample data during re analysis The Excel Interface examples demonstrate this process and can be referenced for additional detail for specific commands and parameters used in the automation Jobs The Reanalysis process is described below with the standard sample count being very similar File paths and WAIT commands have been removed for simplicity 1 Prompt for user login and make a Buffer window active in GammaVision 2 Select the buffer and prompt for a spectrum to re analyze The file created at this step will be read by the Excel spreadsheet to get some of the sample data See Section B 3 GVRecallSpectrum for detail related to the file content Run GVRecallSpectrum exe GlobalValuel mdb 1 Recall Job 1 _RecallData txt Page B10 of B77 Create an SDF file from the detector independent template file and modify default parameters as applicable This SDF file will be updated by GVSampleData later Run GVCopyFile exe Decay
76. task With this configuration it is not possible to perform acquisition and reanalysis processes in parallel and there is a risk of data loss if a reanalysis process is canceled before completion For these reasons the new methodology is preferred which makes the GV_ResetInputs program obsolete GV_ResetInputs has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required The database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector 2 Spectrum ID This parameter is normally set by the Job File variable ShortBase when recalling a spectrum for reanalysis GVSpectrumMux This program provides a simple method for summing multiple spectra into a single spectrum This process is similar to a hardware signal multiplexer but with much better performance and additional options to meet various application needs The options included with this program include 1 Summing multiple spectra data by channel or energy position with the option to also sum the acquisition time 2 Perform software Gain Adjustment based on a user defined energy calibration 3 Convert the Input Spectra to a different ADC Conversion Gain in the output spectrum These options can be implemented in an automated fashion by specifying a configuration file as a command line argument to the program See Section B 35 2 or using the standard User Interface that allows vario
77. that gets rendered in the final Job file These parameters must be defined in the configuration files for this process to work correctly All of the parameters specified in the default Job Templates have been validated at the factory so these are known good starting points for initial system configuration If the process must be modified then a copy should be made with an appropriate naming convention i e use the site name as a prefix to avoid Page 26 of 30 changes to the default files These files may be replaced when upgrading to newer versions so it is important to keep modified versions in different files The Configuration Files define the piped parameters used in the Job Templates As described in Section A 1 the configuration file merged with the Job Template to create the Job file is comprised of Job Configuration files normally in C User Job DetX where X is the detector number parameters created by the Quick Start program and Global Configuration files located in the C User GVCR Configuration Files directory Typically changes to the automation processes are managed in these files rather than the Job Templates There are several Global Configuration Files installed with the default configuration These files can be opened and modified using any text editor such as Notepad Normally there are only a few parameters that are modified within the Global Configuration files When changes are necessary the applicable parameters s
78. the Global Value installation This program has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Criteria File Path Full path to a file specifying the comparison criteria as described below 2 Exceptions Only Flag If the Exceptions Only flag is set to T then the report is simplified by showing any exceptions at the top followed by a summary of the other directories compared If this flag is set to anything other than T then the report will display the results of each directory compared in the order in which they are listed in the comparison criteria file Example C User GVCR GVFileCompare exe CRITERIAFILEPATH EXCEPTIONSONLYFLAG Compare Criteria File Format The first line in this file is the full path to the file where the results of the comparison will be saved Each subsequent line is the Source Folder Path and the Compare Folder Path separated by a comma Example C User GVCompare txt C Comparelmage GVCR C User GVCR C Comparelmage GVCR Job Templates C User GVCR Job Templates Extra spacing may be included for ease of readability as shown below C User GVCompare txt C Comparelmage GVCR C User GVCR C Comparelmage GVCR Job Templates C User GVCR WJob Templates NOTES 1 Only the files in the source folder are included in the comparison and output report Files that may change with some frequency but are located within a folder with critical files that do not change should be excluded from
79. the Source Folder to avoid being shown as an exception when the GVFileCompare program runs 2 Subfolders are not included in the compare criteria Each applicable folder must be specified separately 3 Files typically included in a compare image are the program files associated with Global Value INI files for Global Value or GammavVision Calibrations Libraries SDF Page A89 of A91 files Configuration Files Job Templates etc Spectrum and Report files or Excel files that frequently change are normally excluded from the compare image 4 Ifa Subject Matter Expert or Administrator intentionally changes a file on the working system i e changes to calibrations libraries analysis options or configuration files that may occur over time then a copy of the new file should be copied to the relevant location in the compare image directory 5 The compare image directory should normally be configured with read only privileges for non administrative personnel to prevent unauthorized changes A 12 GVDataExport This program exports all of the associated analysis data from a secured Global Value database containing Sample information to an unsecured MS Access database that is structured to accommodate analysis results from multiple detectors Once the data is transferred to the unsecured database it is accessible from applications outside of Global Value i e for automated data integration with other systems Analysis data may be expor
80. the current date day month and year and the associated sequential counter value Aside from the configuration file generated by GVQuickStart the current counter values can also be accessed using the GVINIParameter function from the Excel Add In See Appendix F Function F4 GVIncrementCounter has the following command line parameter 1 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required The database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector GV_Custom_Rpt This program generates the Custom Report Report Template Selection summary based on the Report Template specified and analysis information stored in the database If the Report Template is not valid then a prompt similar to that shown in Figure B 24 1 is displayed for the analyst to select one from the list Report Template Figure B 24 1 GV_Custom_Rpt Prompt This summary report is stored in the database and can be viewed using the Sample Administration Analysis Editor Analysis Log or using the print functions described in Section B 25 GV_Custom_Rpt has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required The database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector 2 Report Template name optional The template names are established in Sample Administration Configuration on the Report Tem
81. the default 3 Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty so the automation process is unaffected b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammaVision immediately Page B60 of B77 B 20 GV_GetRadMon This program sets the Radiation Monitor Readings for the sample The monitor list is established in Sample B 21 a Global Value Radiation Monitor Readings re a a a Rad Monitor Administration Configuration on the Misc tab Ad hoc ALS E monitor names may also be manually entered Several Reading 236 6 monitor readings may be entered using the Add button Add SPING 1 6 370B 06 and existing entries may be removed using the Remove SPING 2 8 230E 06 button All monitor readings must be numeric Remove GV_GetRadMon has the following comma delimited command line parameters OK 1 2 3 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required The database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector Figure B 20 1 GV_GetRadMon Prompt Re Analysis Flag optional f set to T true then the
82. then the current code doesn t do anything A commented placeholder is used to indicate where special initialization code would be set for this condition Typically additional code is unnecessary here because the worksheet is generally easier to configure with default settings than it would be to use VBA code When the Excel file is closed it is important to capture all of the important data and save the file This is usually accomplished by having the user click a button on the Worksheet or Form that runs VBA code to automate this process In the Excel example Job that uses AirVolumeCalc xls a button is included on the Calc worksheet with the caption Save and Continue The VBA code that runs when this button is clicked is as follows Private Sub cmdContinue_Click Call GenerateCustomDataFile ActiveWorkbook Save Application Quit End Sub Sub GenerateCustomDataFile On Error GoTo errHandler Open GetCustomDataFilePath For Output As 1 Print 1 DisplayForm No Print 1 ShowSavedData No Print 1 SampleFlowrate Sheets Calc Range SampleFlowRate Print 1 FlowrateUnits Sheets FlowUnitsList Range FlowRateUnits Print 1 CollectionEfficiency amp Sheets Calc Range CollectionEfficiency Close 1 Exit Sub errHandler Exit End Sub The following is a brief overview of the process implemented in this code a Run the GenerateCustomDataFile routine to create a text file tha
83. to replace GammaVision s built in functionality with a more comprehensive QA solution Similar to the sample analysis processes described above Global Value s enhanced QA module is completely automated using GammaVision s Job process It includes custom reports electronic data review and embedded user names Unlike the standard GammaVision QA Global Value s QA data and charts are also accessible from remote computers GETTING STARTED Global Value simplifies routine gamma spectroscopy tasks from spectrum acquisition and analysis to custom reporting data review and report archival in an automated and structured manner to minimize the potential for error and enhance productivity The default configuration and automation routines are very flexible and are intended to meet a wide variety of applications Review Section 3 Process Overview which describes the primary functionality and objectives of GammaVision and Global Value and how they work together to optimize counting lab processes Page 6 of 30 The primary differences in specific site installations will primarily be the reporting formats custom calculations default data inputs and electronic publishing routines The following steps describe the overall installation and operation process 1 2 If upgrading from a previous version ensure that the current configuration files have been backed up prior to continuing When configuring computers intended for spectrum ac
84. until the Enter key is pressed on the keyboard and then the files are copied using the XCOPY command as shown below The additional command line parameters are described in the batch script comments xcopy SourceDir DestDir e v y k h c After the source directory has been copied then unnecessary files are deleted from a specified directory including all subdirectories using the script shown below This process frees up valuable disk space and improves the efficiency of future system backups echo Deleting old spectra set SPCPath C User SPC for f tokens G in dir a d b SPCPath do start C User GVCR GVDeleteFiles exe SPCPath G An1 90 start C User GVCR GVDeleteFiles exe SPCPath G Spc 0 start C User GVCR GVDeleteFiles exe SPCPath G Ufo 90 start C User GVCR GVDeleteFiles exe SPCPath 9 G rpt O exit Note that the SPCPath root directory is set as a static path within the batch file This parameter could easily be converted to a command line parameter similar to the Destination directory described previously if necessary for added flexibility In the FOR loop the GVDeleteFiles progam is run with command line parameters as follows C User GVCR GVDeleteFiles exe DIRECTORY CRITERIA MAXDAYS Where DIRECTORY folder from which files will be deleted CRITERIA File criteria use ext to delete all files with ext extension MAXDAYS Files older than the current date
85. updated when the database is synchronized from the current default Master database and any existing sample results can be deleted using the database purge function on this tab see below after the synchronization The only requirement for the new database is a valid path and proper structure for storing configuration and analysis data Analysis Report Path This is the directory where Global Value will look for the standard GammaVision report to get analysis data This path must match the report path specified in the SDF files used for the selected detector This path should normally be a directory on the local computer so that the system can operate without interruption in the event of a network or server outage but it can also be set to a server or shared folder location which is necessary when operating in a configuration that allows running automation Jobs for the same detectors from multiple workstations Click on the button next to this field to browse to the appropriate directory If a network path is desired it can be typed directly into the field Custom Report Path This is the default directory for printing Text or PDF analysis reports from the Analysis Editor or using the Print_Rpt program in JOB files When printing reports from the Analysis Editor the standard Windows Save As dialog is displayed The current directory is set to the Custom Report Path and the file name is set to the spectrum file name The directory and filen
86. where X is the COMM port number and Y s the current position The GVGammaProductsChangeSample program is compatible with an older DOS version of the sample changer control software as well as a more recent version used in the Windows environment The communication protocol used for each of these configurations is specified using a command line parameter as described below GVGammaProductsChangeSample has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Target Position or Reset Command This parameter is either the desired sample changer position or the reset command R to send to the Gamma Products Sample Changer computer If a number is specified then the command is formatted as XL where X is the target sample position If this parameter is omitted then the program s INI file is read to determine the most recent position for the specified COMM port This value is incremented and the INI file updated to reflect the new position This value is then used with the XL command format where X is the target sample position If the INI protocol is used then the initial position position 1 must be specified on the command line in order to reset the value in the INI file for the first sample 2 COMM Port Number This parameter specifies the COMM Port number as configured in the computer Hardware Properties Refer to the Windows Operating System documentation to configure COMM Ports If this parameter is omitted then
87. which they are displayed in the configuration grid A 2 3 9 Synchronizing Databases When the Sample Administration program starts it establishes a connection to the default database which acts as the Master database for Security and Configuration changes as described in Section A 2 Changes applied to Security and Configuration parameters are only saved in this default database until the others are updated using the Database Synchronization option shown in Figure A 2 3 9 1 which is accessed from the Sample Administration program as shown in Figure A 2 2 Each detector that is configured in the current database is displayed in the list to represent the database used to store sample analysis data along with an additional entry for the associated QA Synchronize Databases QJHPGe 1 QA Update Figure A 2 3 9 1 Synchronize Databases database If the Default Database on the Misc tab in Configuration Manager is the same path as any detector database then that detector database item is omitted from the list If any detector database is the same physical database as the default but has a different path specified in the configuration i e local path vs shared drive path vs fully qualified network name path then that item will be included in the list but it will be automatically unchecked when the synchronization process runs based on a flag that is set in the default or Master database when the synchronization is initiat
88. 1 WPS TAN AMON rita ir Ear EA AAAA EN AA Eaa ERER aa 8 2 2 Initial GammaVision COntqur lO told a 9 2 2 1 B30Winds ini File Comiquera aia 9 2 2 2 Sample Definition Files SDF Configuration oocoococcccnonocccccnnnnccccnnnnnnacnncnnnannnnnnnns 10 2 2 3 Acquisition Settings Configuration 12 2 2 4 EER a EE Pe E EENE A E E E att gait E E T A 12 2 3 Microsoft Word and Excel Configuration 12 3 PROCESS OVERMIEW aiarar cite Ses araa aa za ee aaae pam date ave Peer SPAA an aE duty as Nma anei nirai EAER inaua it 13 3 1 GammaVision Process Overview ios ends 13 3 2 Global Value Process Overview iso 15 3 3 Global Value Interface Overview oooooccoconoccccccconccccnnnnnncnnnnnannccnnnnnnn cnn nnnn cnn nan nnn nn nana arc rrnnanene 18 4 ROUTINE GLOBAL VALUE OPERATIONS inasianiaaii 20 4 1 sample and QA MGaSureMmemts vernos ce tese nc sexessdsacteegs veeerengalt cestiungeig nd ened adenetyaua sees ade tenmses tare 20 4 2 AnalySis Data REVIEW susi 21 4 3 Quality Assurance Data HevISWio ii a 22 4 4 Add Edit Users and Permissions voii aii ia dan 22 4 5 Change User PassWord emi ida dias 22 4 6 Resetting the Job Running Flags ceco iciin oca deere castes dba dao detiene cial 22 4 7 Repairing a Database ConnectiOI cosiocnoniamac qe ro in dead e 22 4 8 Create Geometry Source Certificate from a Master Source Certificate o ooonn 22 4 9 Add Detector to the Global Value Configurati0N cconoccccnnnoocccno
89. 1 is used as the default 3 COMM Type The COMM Type specifies the handshaking protocol between the Global Value computer and the Gamma Products Sample Changer computer as follows e 0 zero This setting is used when the Gamma Products computer is running the Windows application With this configuration the program uses the Carriage Return Ascii character 13 as a termination character when sending commands and receiving responses Responses from the Sample Changer computer are managed as follows o LOK The Sample Position was set successful and the program exits o E An error occurred and the error message is displayed A Retry button is displayed to allow the user to resend the command after correcting the condition o UY A message is displayed indicating that the Sample Changer has jammed A Retry button is displayed to allow the user to resend the command after correcting the condition e 1 one This setting is used when the Gamma Products computer is running the DOS application With this configuration the program sends commands and receives responses without the terminating Carriage Return character Responses from the Sample Changer computer are expected to be a single character managed as follows o Bell Character Ascii character 7 The Sample Position was set successful and the program exits o J A message is displayed indicating that the Sample Changer has jammed A
90. 14 1 6852E 10 1 7011E 10 2 6044E 10 1 2542E 10 2 2736E 10 5 5812 10 3 2986E 09 3 2986E 09 14 846 15 976 4 8973E 10 5 2698E 10 7 2760E 10 3 9336E 10 28181E 09 3 7792E 09 2 6834E 08 26834E 08 5 772 8 303 1 5488E 09 22279E 09 24396E 09 1 2066E 09 25314E 08 2 8354E 08 9 6394E 11 3 6391E 11 151 100 151 100 1 4565E 10 1 4565E 10 4 6463E 10 22247E 10 3 7943E 12 27107E 10 1 7167E 10 1 7166E 10 151 100 151 100 25939E 10 25939E 10 7 1910E 10 3 5437E 10 6 7572E 12 4 8274 10 1 1764E 09 1 1764E 09 151 100 151 100 1 7775 09 1 7775E 09 5 2609E 09 26042E 09 4 6306E 11 3 3082E 09 9 1986E 11 9 1986E 11 151 100 151 100 1 3899E 10 1 3899E 10 4 1100E 10 1 9457E 10 3 6208E 12 2 5868E 10 1 1386E 10 1 1384E 10 151 100 151 100 1 7204E 10 1 7204E 10 4 7664E 10 2 3503E 10 4 4817E 12 3 2018E 10 5 1305E 11 5 1217E 11 151 100 151 100 7 7522E 11 7 7522E 11 2 1879E 10 1 0591E 10 2 0195E 12 1 4428E 10 Min a fae fae fee fdo fdo fee fdo fdo fed fee fe Figure A 2 2 3 2 ISO NORM Nuclide Data A 2 2 4 Unidentified Peaks The Unidentified Peaks tab contains the same data displayed on the GammaVision report for unidentified peaks The Identification field is editable to allow the source of the peak to be specified if the Current User belongs to a group with permission to Edit Data and the results have not been locked i e Reviewed or Published All other fields are read only Analysis Report Sample Data Nuclide Data Custom Data Change Summ
91. 16 of A91 4 Text File The report is saved to a text file A standard Save As dialog is displayed indicating the path and file name The default path is the Custom Report Path established for the selected detector in the Configuration Manager and the default file name is the Spectrum name Both the path and file name can be changed in the Save As dialog Also see Open File After Save below 5 Open File After Save This option is only enabled when the PDF File or Text File option is selected If this option is checked then the saved report will be opened and displayed using the associated program similar to opening the file directly from Windows Explorer 6 Print Font Size This field specifies the font size used when the report is printed to the selected destination Use the up and down arrows next to the field to change the font size as necessary based on your report content The default font size for the standard GammaVision report is 11 points Higher values may result in a poorly formatted report This option is typically used to reduce the font size to allow more information to be displayed on the custom report summaries i e more nuclide columns when multiple calculations or data grouping is desired The Printed Report font is limited to the range 8 11 to avoid formatting problems with printing A 2 2 2 Sample Data The Sample Data tab contains fields for viewing or modifying information associated with the
92. 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 JOBPATH GVTimerControl B 5 N A GV_GetRptData B 22 DETDBPATH Analysis Number Omit Nuclide if gt Half Life Cutoff Flag Decayed Activty 0 if gt Half Life Cutoff Flag Reanalysis Flag GV_Custom_Rpt B 24 Report Template Name Reanalysis Flag Print_Rpt B 25 DETDBPATH No Longer Used Report Type CVR ALL or omit 4 Report Destination WORD PDF TXT or omit 5 Font Size File Directory for PDF or TXT files Reanalysis Flag 1 2 3 4 5 1 DETDBPATH 2 3 1 2 3 GrossGamma B 26 Sample Spectrum Path 6 Background Spectrum Path Excel File Path 7 1 2 3 Page C4 of C4 Appendix D Field Size Limitations Field Parameter Limitations Spectrum ID Filename 50 Characters No Invalid File name characters allowed such as 2 lt gt and others Detector Description 100 characters max A practical limitation for proper display on custom report summaries is 64 characters i e use only the first line in the MCB Configuration dialog box Sample Description 130 characters max A practical limitation for proper display on custom report summaries is 64 characters i e use only the first line in the GammaVision Sample Description dialog box Calibration Description 100 characters A practical limitation for proper display on custom report summaries is 64 c
93. 9 GVDetectorDatabasePathByDetectorNuMbe ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeees F8 F10 GV SpPeCirumList ANS A haw isi Ade ade Alaa A A A A A F8 Elis GV NUGIIGGLISE a e hee O O Stas F9 F12 GVConsolidateNuclideList ooocooccoccconcococcnonccocnnoncnnonnncnnonnnnononnonnnonnnnnnnanonnnnnnnaninnnnos F9 ETS ON Pare tio F10 F14 GVN clideNaMe 00 cai A AAA F10 F15 GVNuclideActivity oooooooooncccccccccconononnnncccnnncnonnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrnrrrnnnnnnnns F11 F16 GVNuclideFactor occcooccccoccccccccccconcnnconcnnnonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnncnnnnnnns F11 AAA a O a F13 F18 GVNuclideDataList oooccccocccccocnccconnnocononoconnncnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnns F14 F19 GVUnidentifiedPeakListCOUNT oocooccocccocccccconcococcncononnonanonconnnnononnnnanonnonnnnnnnnnonanennonane F14 F20 GVUnidentifiedPeakList oocooccocccccconcocnconcococononnoononononnonanonnonnonanonnonannnnonnonaninnonans F15 F21 GVUnidentifiedPeak 00 55 acid F15 F22 GVUnidentifiedPeakData oocccoccoccccnconoocnconcnnoncnonnonnnnononnonnnnnnonnnnanonnonnnnnnonnnnaninninans F16 F23 GVUnidentifiedPeakDataList ooccoccconcoccconcococcnconcononanonnonanonnoononanonnonannnnonnonanennonane F16 F24 GVRWPListCoOUNt occoocccccnccccoccncconccncononon
94. ARTTIME 15 59 01 Start Time with colon separator STARTTIME_HOUR 15 2 digit Start Time Hour STARTTIME_MIN 59 2 digit Start Time Minute STARTTIME_SEC 01 2 digit Start Time Second STARTTIME_FILEFORMAT 155901 Start Time with no separator DETJOBCOUNTER 2 Job Counter from DAT file JDAYSPECTRUMCOUNTER 65 Day Counter no buffer DAYSPECTRUMCOUNTERBUFFERED2 65 2 digit Day Counter DAYSPECTRUMCOUNTERBUFFERED3 065 3 digit Day Counter MONTHSPECTRUMCOUNTER 117 Month Counter no buffer MONTHSPECTRUMCOUNTERBUFFERED2 1 17 2 digit Month Counter MONTHSPECTRUMCOUNTERBUFFERED3 1 17 3 digit Month Counter MONTHSPECTRUMCOUNTERBUFFERED4 0117 4 digit Month Counter YEARSPECTRUMCOUNTER 159 Year Counter no buffer YEARSPECTRUMCOUNTERBUFFERED3 159 2 digit Year Counter YEARSPECTRUMCOUNTERBUFFEREDA 0159 3 digit Year Counter YEARSPECTRUMCOUNTERBUFFERED5 00159 4 digit Year Counter YEARSPECTRUMCOUNTERBUFFERED6 000159 5 digit Year Counter iii Add the content of all Global Configuration files This includes all files with the CFG file extension in the C User GVCR Configuration Files directory These files contain standard parameter definitions that are used for all automation processes and aren t normally modified from the default installation files with the exception of 0_SiteSpecific cfg intended for this purpose If a parameter needs to be altered for a particular automation process then it can be set in the Job Config
95. Activity values in the QA Limits section of the QA Administration program as described in Section A 4 7 Since the efficiency for the QA source should be unaffected the QA results should fall within the specified limits without any other changes If the QA results fall outside of the limits or show a bias then there may be sufficient inaccuracy between the two sources to warrant recalibration for the QA geometry This recalibration should only affect QA measurements as the QA efficiency calibration should NOT be used for sample measurements If a change in QA results is determined to be related to instrument performance rather than a difference in source content then the impact on previous analysis results should be evaluated Page 29 of 30 B Ifthe new QA source uses the same nuclide mix as the current source but a different geometry then update the QA efficiency calibration in addition to the parameters specified in Step A If the new QA source uses a different nuclide mix then the QA Configuration will need to be reconfigured with a representative analysis library set in the Job Configuration files calibration and QA Points similar to an initial system configuration Typically a change of this type also warrants purging data from the previous source from the database and starting fresh with the new points and parameters Page 30 of 30 Appendix A Configuration and Data Management Programs Table of Content A 1 Global Value Q
96. B 8 2 GVSampleDataSC for Single Sample to save changes in the Sample Que A sample may be removed from the Sample Queue by selecting the item within the list and then selecting the Remove button All samples following the removed item will automatically be renumbered based on their order in the list After all samples have been added to the Sample Queue or when using the Single Sample mode select the Continue button to initiate the processes described previously in this section Alternatively the measurement can be canceled and GammavVision closed by selecting the Cancel button Page B29 of B77 B 8 1 3 Analysis Quantity Calculations The Analysis Quantity is calculated based on sample flow rate or dilution depending on the settings in the Analysis Method selected See Section B 8 2 4 for details related to the Analysis Methods 1 Analysis Quantity based on Flow rate AQ SF EFF Dur CF DF Where AQ Analysis Quantity SF Sample Flow rate See B 8 2 4 16 EFF Collection Efficiency B 8 2 4 18 Dur Duration Collection Stop Time Collection Start Time in minutes CF Conversion Factor See B 8 2 4 17 DF Dilution Factor See B 8 2 4 14 2 Analysis Quantity based on Dilution AQ SQ EFF DF Where AQ Analysis Quantity SQ Sample Quantity See B 8 2 4 5 EFF Collection Efficiency B 8 2 4 18 DF Dilution Factor See B 8 2 4 14 B 8 2 GVSampleDataSC Configuration The paramet
97. Configuration Support Files are installed or in Example Files User GVCR Excel on the installation disk 20 Page F2 of F21 F1 GVAnalysisParameter GVAnalysisParameter DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID Parameter This function returns a string representing the specified Parameter for the associated SpectrumID Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumID arguments The SpectrumID records must be stored in the specified database path Parameter is any one of the following not case sensitive Multiple Parameter Codes can be used to return the same data as shown Parameter Codes with 1 or 2 suffix return data for the first or second analysis respectively ReportSummary ReportDetail and ChangeSummary codes are available for use with VBA as the returned content will typically overflow a worksheet cell Data Returned Parameter Codes Acquisition Dead Time DEAD DeadTime Acquisition Live Time seconds LIVE LiveTime Acquisition Real Time seconds REAL RealTime Acquisition Start Date Time SMP_ACQU AcquisitionStart Activity Units AU ActivityUnits Activity Units Divisor ActUDiv1 ActivityUnitsDivisor1 ActUDiv2 ActivityUnitsDivisor 2 Activity Units Multiplier ActUMult1 ActivityUnitsMultiplier1 ActUMult2 ActivityUnitsMultiplier 2 Activity Range Factor ACTRANGE ActivityRangeFactor
98. Correction uCi Sdf 1 RunReanalysis sdf Make a detector specific copy of an Excel file that can be used for data input with the GVGetSampleData program Note that Reanalysis is appended to the file name as this naming convention will be used in the Excel VBA code to set the sample data fields Run GVCopyFile exe AirVolumeCalc xls 1 AirVolumeCalcReanalysis xls Prompt for sample data using the Excel Workbook that was just created See B 6 Item 2 for parameters that will be set in the helper Job Sample Description Recall SDF and Live Time if applicable Run GVSampleData exe 1 RunReanalysis sdf 1 SampleDataReanalysis Job 1 AirVolumeCalcReanalysis xls T 1 RecallData txt T Call 1 SampleDataReanalysis Job Load the Efficiency calibration and Library This can be accomplished either using GVGetConfiguration as shown here or by calling a Job that is dynamically created by the Excel VBA code from the previous step if desired Run GVGetConfiguration exe 1 ConfigReanalysis Job 1_ C User Cal C User Lib T 1_RecallData txt Set or prompt for PBC files and other parameters Similar to the calibration and library parameters these settings can be modified by creating dynamic Jobs in Excel VBA code and then calling those Jobs here Run_GVGetCustomData to load custom data from a file created by the Excel VBA code previously The file path to the custom data file must be synchronized in the Excel file to ensure t
99. DA2 lt MDA2 gt lt ReportedUncertainty gt PUBNUCUNCT lt ReportedUncertainty gt lt CountUncertainty gt PUBNUCUNCTAC lt CountUncertainty gt lt TotalUncertainty gt PUBNUCUNCTAT lt TotalUncertainty gt lt Flag gt PUBNUCFLAG lt Flag gt lt BadShape gt PUBNUCBADSHAPE lt BadShape gt lt Edited gt PUBNUCEDITED lt Edited gt lt HalfLife gt PUBNUCHL lt HalfLife gt lt ElapsedHalfLives gt PUBNUCEHL lt ElapsedHalfLives gt lt DecayCorrection gt PUBNUCDC lt DecayCorrection gt lt DACFactor gt PUBNUC_DAC lt DACFactor gt lt DACMult gt PUBNUC_ DAC lt DACMult gt lt DACDiv gt PUBNUC_ DAC lt DACDiv gt lt GVPublishNuclideData gt lt GVPublishDataSet gt Page A54 of A91 The CSV Comma Separated Values Template requires the following configuration 1 2 The Sample Data and Nuclide Data have two separate records In the rendered CSV file the Sample Data will be returned in a single row and the Nuclide Data will be generated with one row per nuclide The Sample Data record must start with the parameter CSVSAMPLEDATA This parameter is not returned in the final CSV file Sample Data parameters described for standard report templates may be included within this record The Nuclide Data row must start with the parameter CSVNUCLIDEDATA This parameter is not returned in the rendered CSV file Report parameters with the PUBNUC prefix are valid parameters within the nuclide record
100. DF File Add Delete Text File Y Open File After Save Print Figure A 2 3 3 1 Sample Types Tab The following command buttons are available to manage Sample R Types as shown in Figure A 2 3 3 1 e Add A prompt is displayed allowing the new Sample and R Types to be entered e Delete Remove the selected item from the database A confirmation dialog will be displayed to help prevent inadvertent deletions Page A27 of A91 e Save Saves changes to the R Type field for the selected Sample Type Note that the Sample Type is not editable after the Add function as this field is often a key parameter established in automation Jobs and other configuration files e Print Generates a report of all Sample Types and associated R Types based on the selected Destination and Sort Order If the Destination is set to the PDF or Text File options then a standard Windows dialog will be displayed to specify to the desired location If the Open File After Save option is checked then the PDF or Text file will be opened using the default program for opening these types of files similar to opening one of these files directly from Windows Explorer Note that Microsoft Word must be installed to use the MS Word option A 2 3 4 Nuclide Adjustment Factors Nuclide Adjustment Factors are used for a variety of calculations on custom report summaries and using the Excel Add In For example nuclide activity can be multiplied by the specified adj
101. DFPath Set_Preset_Clear Set_Preset_Live lt Live Time Value gt NOTE The Preset commands are only written if the Live Time field is implemented with this program See parameter 8 Presets cannot be changed in GammavVision during an active acquisition so the main automation Job must ensure that the acquisition is stopped prior calling this Job and started or restarted afterwards as applicable b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammavVision immediately Full Path to Microsoft Excel file optional f a valid path is provided then the file will automatically be opened for data entry All of the other command line parameters used for data input are ignored with the exception of the Live Time Preset See section B 6 2 for additional details Default Sample Description optional This parameter is used to populate the Description field on the Basic Form interface To display a dropdown list of sample descriptions use the following syntax for the Sample Description field FILE FILEPATH where FILEPATH is the full path to a text file with a list of sample descriptions Not applicable when using the Excel interface Page B6 of B77 5 Default Decay Date Time optional This parameter is used to populate the Decay Date Time field on the Basic Form interface This field can be set to the current date using the word TODAY or the current date time using the word
102. Detector editor in QA Administration is provided only as a means to remove detectors that are no longer needed For example when establishing multiple QA databases in a networked system a copy from one computer may be used as the starting point on another computer and the original detectors will need to be removed Note that detectors cannot be deleted when they have associated QA Reports Data Comments or QA Points Limits established Removing associated records may require Purging the database as discussed in Database Management See Section A 4 8 e Global Value QA Administration Detector Parameters Database Path C a s y mdb A Current User Admin NA Limits E User Group Administrator Detector ID Delete Detector Description ORTEC 11 Figure A 4 6 1 QA Detectors A 4 7 QA Limits The QA Limits define which QA Points and associated parameters are reported for each detector as well as the number format for each parameter and the methodology for calculating the percent difference from a target value Global Value QA Administration QA Limits File Database Path C as aie ES Current User Admin Detectors Dacha User Group Administrator Save Close Detector ID 44 w ORTEC 11 Edit Parameter Number Formats IV Hide Unused Parameters Edit Percent Difference Method Low Control Low Tolerance Target High Tolerance High Control Countrate 0 0 5 10 100 QA Point Edit List Figu
103. E 10 2 4162E 10 4 1668E 10 1 9904E 10 No Ce 141 lt 7 1736E 10 lt 7 1733E 10 0 0000E 00 4 3030E 10 4 3030E 10 7 1736E 10 3 5447E 10 No Ce 144 lt 4 8961E 09 lt 4 8960E 09 0 0000E 00 2 9488E 09 2 9488E 09 4 8961E 09 2 4292E 09 No Zn 65 lt 4 0076E 10 lt 4 0076E 10 0 0000E 00 2 3057E 10 2 3057E 10 4 0076E 10 1 8994E 10 No 1 131 lt 4 7559E 10 lt 4 7551E 10 0 0000E 00 2 8540E 10 2 8540E 10 4 7559E 10 2 3510E 10 No 1 133 lt 2 1833E 10 lt 2 1796E 10 0 0000E 00 1 2860E 10 1 2860E 10 2 1833E 10 1 0594E 10 No Figure A 2 2 3 1 Standard Nuclide Data Page A19 of A91 Analysis Report Sample Data Nuclide Data Unidentified Peaks Custom Data Change Summary Y Show ISO NORM ISO NORM ISO NORM ISO NORM ISO NORM ISO NORM ISO NORM ISO NORM ISO NORM ISO NORM ISO NORM Activity TOC Activity Count Unc Total Une Count Une Total Unc Det Limit Dec Thres ini ji Cis Cis Cis Cis Cis 1 1520E 08 1 1520 08 4 370 7 338 5 0341E 10 8 4533E 10 61796E 10 3 0383E 10 1 1026E 08 1 2014E 08 3 2277E 07 3 2277E 07 0 667 5 938 2 1538E 09 1 9168E 08 9 9809E 10 4 9323E 10 3 2066E 07 3 2489E 07 3 9280E 09 3 9280E 09 11 302 13 030 4 4396E 10 5 1182E 10 6 8386E 10 3 3853E 10 3 4923E 09 4 3637E 09 5 1182E 08 5 1181E 08 1 703 6 155 8 7151E 10 3 1502E 09 5 0092E 10 2 4542E 10 5 0326E 08 5 2037E 08 1 4363E 08 1 4363E 08 3 625 6 845 5 2059E 10 9 8317E 10 29230E 10 1 4015E 10 1 3852E 08 1 4874E 08 3 9274E 10 3 9274E 10 42908 43 3
104. Elle EE A A sl il B71 GV a a E E E rt O B71 GVSpectr MMUX siirius te iaa aapea A Aida B71 GVGammaProductsChangeSample cooccconnnccconnnnccnnnnnccnnnnnnnncrcnnnnn rre rre B76 Page B1 of B77 B 1 GVSetUser amp GVQASetUser These programs prompt for a user name and password for Sample measurement and QA automation processes using the dialog shown in Figure B 1 1 With a successful login the analyst name is set in the Detector Samples or QA database for the specified detector and this name is Global Value User Login assigned to subsequent analysis or QA measurements on User Name Admin Ei that instrument If these functions are not called in the Parne automation processes then the last user name set for oK Sample Analysis or QA measurements on each detector will be used as the default for subsequent Figure B 1 1 GVSetUser amp GVQASetUser Prompt measurements on the respective detector GVSetUser has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Full Path to a Detector Samples database required 2 Require Login Flag optional When the Require Login Flag is set to T true the login prompt cannot be cancelled A valid login is required If this parameter is omitted or set to anything other than T then users can cancel the login dialog and the analyst name is set to an empty string 3 Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the appli
105. FILEPATH C User GVCR Temp 3_SampleDataSC_SDFDatat txt This file contains the parameters that will be passed to the SDF file used for analysis using the GVSDFData program See Section B 9 during the automation processes This file content is as follows LiveTime as specified for Live Time preset Weight Analysis quantity from Sample Data ActivityUnits Activity Units from Sample Data QuantityUnits Analysis Quantity from Sample Data Divisor 1 Activity Units Conversion Factor DecayDateTime Sample collection Stop Date and Time CollectionStart Sample collection Start Date and Time CollectionEnd Sample collection Stop Date and Time ReportFileName Path specified for DetRptDir See Section B 8 2 8 with appended Page B52 of B77 B 8 3 18 B 8 3 19 B 8 3 20 B 8 3 21 B 8 3 22 B 8 3 23 B 8 3 24 B 8 3 25 B 8 3 26 B 8 3 27 GVSampleDataSCOut_SAMPLETYPE Sample Type selected as selected GVSampleDataSCOut_REPORTTEMPLATE The Report Template specified for the selected analysis method or the default template if none is specified for the analysis method GVSampleDataSCOut_AnalysisMethod The Analysis Method specified for the sample GVSampleDataSCOut_DilutionFactor The Dilution Factor specified for the sample GVSampleDataSCOut_SampleQuantity The Sample Quantity specified for the sample GVSampleDataSCOut_SampleComment The Sample Comment specified for the sample GVS
106. File 8 ABSLength is the Absorber length 9 ABSConfigID is either Linear 0 or Mass positive number An empty space is equivalent to zero therefore a negative value is required for no change 10 ABSTypelD is either External 0 or Internal positive number An empty space is equivalent to zero therefore a negative value is required for no change 11 ABSFileName is the full path to an Attenuation file If a path is specified then the Internal attenuation option is automatically turned off Page B54 of B77 B 10 GVSetSDFParameter This program is used to update a single field in a Sample Definition File SDF with the specified data as described below This process simplifies implementation for some applications but the GVSDFData program See Section B 9 is more efficient when many parameters must be updated GVSetSDFParameter has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 2 3 Full Path to SDF file required This file should be unique to the detector so that Jobs running on other systems will not inadvertently modify this file prior to being loaded into GammaVision SDF Parameter Name required Any of the parameters described for GVSDFData See Section B 9 may be specified Parameter Value required f an invalid data type is specified then no changes are written to the SDF file B 11 GVAskConfirm This application replaces the standard ASK_CONFIRM job command in GammaVision by
107. For XML and CSV output types this parameter is required since the template defines the layout and content of these file types These templates are processed different than those used for summary reports and must comply with the formatting rules described below Note that these templates cannot be used as standard analysis report summaries displayed in the Analysis Editor See Section A 2 3 5 for report template parameters for use with Text PDF CSV and XML files The XML Template requires the following configuration 1 The data set record must be enclosed in the tags lt GVPublishDataSet gt and lt GVP ublishDataSet gt 2 The Sample Data record must be enclosed in valid opening and closing tags The recommended tags are lt GVPublishSampleData gt and lt GVPublishSampleData gt but other names could be used if desired The Sample Data parameters described for standard report templates may be included within this record with each parameter enclosed in appropriate opening and closing tags Attributes may also be included in tags if desired 3 The nuclide data record must be enclosed in the tags lt GVPublishNuclideData gt and lt GVPublishNuclideData gt The report parameters in Table A 2 3 5 1 with the PUBNUC prefix are valid within the nuclide record with each parameter enclosed in appropriate opening and closing tags 4 When the XML Template is rendered the Sample Data parameters are replaced with the applicable resul
108. GVGetCustomData See Section B 21 custom applications or the Analysis Editor This data can also be displayed on the custom reports or loaded into Excel using the Add In functionality Detectors Sample Types Nuc Adj Factors Report Templates PDF Properties Custom Fields Move Up Add Delete Save Move Down Parameter Name 50 Char Max Interface Label 30 Char Max Report Code 10 Char Max Locked p Quantity Calc Type QCTYPE x QuantityCalculation alue Quantity Cale Input Yalue QCVALUE QuantityCalculationUnits Quantity Cale Units QCUNITS QuantityCalculationMultiplier Quantity Cale Multiplier QCMULT QuantityCalculationDivisor Quantity Cale Divisor ACDIY AnalysisMethod Analysis Method ANAMETHOD DilutionFactor Dilution Factor DILFACTOR SampleQuantity Sample Quantity SAMQUANT SampleFlowrate Sample Flowrate SAMFLOW FlowrateUnits Flowrate Units FLOWUNITS CollectionE fficiency Collection Efficiency COLLEFF SampleComment Sample Comment SAMCOMMENT SamplelD Sample Number SAMPID BatchlD Batch ID BATCHID ProjectlD Project ID PROJECTID AnalpsisID Analysis ID ANALYSISID Matrix Matrix MATRIX x KX X KX KX X X KX XxX Xx Figure A 2 3 8 1 Custom Fields Tab The following fields must be established for each Custom Parameter e Parameter Name This field is used to reference the custom parameter when using GVGetCustomData See Section B 21 or the Excel Add In GVAnalysisParameter function See Section F1 The parameter name cannot have spaces
109. GVSampleDataPlus Configuration The parameters in this section are required in the configuration file specified on the command line for this program Any other text in the configuration file is ignored to allow comments or other parameters to be included without affecting the application Any valid variables may be used for setting the configuration file parameters in the Global Value Quick Start process as well Typically this would include parameters defined in the Global or Job Configuration Files or those generated by GlobalValueQuickStart when an automation process is initiated This is normally accomplished in the automation Job by making a copy of GVQuickStart cfg or GVQuickStartReanalysis cfg using GVCopyFile The following is an example Job excerpt that would be run prior to GVSampleDataPlus Run C User GVCR GVCopyFile exe C User GVCR GVQuickStart cfg C User GVCR Temp 1_GVQuickStart cfg Wait C User GVCR GVCopyFile exe The file path C User GVCR Temp 1_GVQuickStart cfg is passed to GVSampleDataPlus as a command line argument as shown in section B 7 1 Page B14 of B77 Configuration File Parameter List The following parameters must be defined in the configuration file passed to the application Each parameter is defined in detailed in the remainder of this section Section Parameter Name B 7 2 1 GVSampleDataPlus_ReanalysisFlag B 7 2 2 GVSampleDataPlus_SampleDescription B 7 2 3 GVSampleDataPlus_CollectionS
110. GammaVision Job command SET_SETTING along with a dynamically generated configuration parameter generated by the Quick Start program See Section 3 3 which describes the typical automation processes The Internal option should be set for the LIBRARY and CALIBRATION parameters on the Sample tab and the PEAK BACKGROUND CORRECTION parameter if used on the Corrections tab By setting the Library Calibration and PBC file fields to Internal these parameters can be set by commands in the Job process either by prompting the user to choose a file or by specifying the file without user input If Internal is not selected then the file specified in the SDF file is always used for analysis regardless of any change implemented in Job files or GammaVision s menu selections Using the Internal option for the calibration file also allows the Energy FHWM and Efficiency calibrations to be loaded from separate files For example the Energy FWHM calibration may be frequently updated i e as part of a daily calibration routine while the efficiency calibration is loaded from files that are updated less frequently The appropriate DECAY CORRECTION options on the Decay tab should be set for each type of sample Generally this requires a dedicated SDF file for decay during collection in which all decay options are applied and for background counts and other types of samples where no decay corrections are applied When using Global Val
111. Global Value to get results from the wrong files unless a unique identifier is provided The unique identifier that prevents this mix up is the File Prefix This parameter is also used in various utility programs in Global Value to associate various types of files with a specific detector for example calibration files in the GVGetConfiguration program Database Each detector requires a unique database to store analysis data associated with samples The path to that database is specified in this field and can be set using a standard Windows File Open Save dialog by selecting the button next to this field Database paths may be set to the local C drive when running Global Value from a stand alone computer but should use a fully qualified network path or mapped drive path when remote data access on a network is desired If the databases and data files Page A24 of A91 are stored on local computers vs a network server then the C User directory must be shared with Read Write permissions for the personnel or groups that will run Global Value Refer to Appendix E for information regarding network configurations and database file storage locations When Adding Detectors a new database must be created This can be accomplished by copying one of the existing detector databases or the file GlobalValue1 md_ to the new database name The content of the starting point database is not important because the Configuration data will be
112. MAXDAYS that meet the File Criteria will be deleted Example to delete all Report files from the C User directory that are older than 30 days C User GVCR GVDeleteFiles exe C User Rpt 30 A copy of the spectrum and report files are stored in the Global Value database so it isn t necessary to retain any of these file types An1 Spc Rpt unless desired for quick reference on the local computer outside of Global Value The UFO files are used for displaying analysis results within GammaVision and creating PBC files so typically a local copy is retained for sufficient time to allow all data reviews to be completed Retaining any of these files locally is strictly a matter of convenience to avoid having to restore a copy from the backup directory when needed Page A88 of A91 A 11 File Compare This program is intended to confirm the integrity of critical configuration files by comparing reference files to those used in production The reference files are established by copying files from a known good configuration to location that is normally read only to non administrative personnel running the system Typically the file structure is established for the files that are common to all computers and those that are unique for each detector or computer system An example directory structure is provided in the C User GVNetworkFiles GVFileComparelmage directory that is created if the Default Configuration Files option is selected during
113. NDIX B AUTOMATION JOB PROGRAM REFERENCE ccoccccccooccconoccononncconnnnnnon cnn nan nnnnnn cnc rancios B1 B 1 GVSetUser a EVOASOU Sic a B2 B 2 GVG lear Daiana aaa B3 B 3 GVRec allSpectrU M aeee noie erario ario dd B3 B 4 VDE TIME oa B4 B 5 ENTE Modales ola Mant qui aaa ost B5 B 6 EGvsampleDala sc adi ia B6 B 7 GV Sample araP lus erstes B13 B 8 GV Sample Data usina its B27 B 9 CN SDF Deseret creas ahaa rolas B54 B 10 GVSeLSDEP arameten anaconda ica B55 BAG ANACO dai dadas B55 B412 GVGetCo figuratiO M asomar ii piscis B56 Bass EVERY A Io B57 Bil4 GV GetSite Unida aaa dia dadas B58 BAS EN GDA dE B58 B 16 GV_GetCOMMe nt cocccncnnnccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos B59 B 17 GV_GetGDTPressure cocccccccccncccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneninnnnnnns B59 BAS GN Goes ample PUMP cat o B60 BIO GV G tRWP estat ira de ini cerns B60 B 20 GV GetRadMon iii is la Jet ech seeded A Gd crias B61 B 21 GV GetCustomD AA eo co dde B61 A O B63 B23 GVincrementGouM ur A ia B64 B24 GV O CUSION Alison aid ati B64 B 29 IPUR AP td B65 B 26 EOS AMM a lala B66 Bi27 COVA POS baaa a oi B66 B 28 GVQABackground tr dado B67 B 29 gt GVQAChec kS A U aa no ie B67 B 30 UfoTOPDO rierien e ei B68 Biol Gvremplate Master oscura s B69 B 32 GVCOPYRIS iii sida B70 B 339 GOD cl io nad e ad B71 Bigs OV A A B71 B35 UV SPECTRUM
114. ORM Best Activity normally decay corrected X X Page A43 of A91 Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes Corus gt Report Code Returned Data 3 2o A PUBNUCITOC ISO NORM Best Time of Count not decay corrected X X PUBNUCIUAC ISO NORM Counting Uncertainty in Activity Units XX PUBNUCIUPC ISO NORM Counting Uncertainty in Percent X X PUBNUCIUAT ISO NORM Total Uncertainty in Activity Units X X PUBNUCIUPT ISO NORM Total Uncertainty in Percent X X PUBNUCIMIN ISO NORM Minimum Activity X X PUBNUCIMAX ISO NORM Maximum Activity X X PUBNUCICRL ISO NORM Critical Level Decision Threshold X X PUBNUCIMDA ISO NORM Minimum Detectable Activity Detection Limit X X PUBNUC_TBL Nuclide Adjustment Factor value from table named TBL X X PUBNUC_ TBL Calculated as Standard Nuclide Activity times or divided by X X PUBNUC_ TBL Adjustment Factor value from table named TBL If Standard Nuclide Activity is lt MDA then value is reported as zero PUBNUC_ ATBL Calculated as Standard Nuclide Activity times or divided by XX PUBNUC_ ATBL Adjustment Factor value from table named TBL If Standard E Nuclide Activity is lt MDA then the MDA is used in the calculation PUBNUC_ MTBL Calculated as Standard Nuclide MDA times or divided by X X PUBNUC_ MTBL Adjustment Fac
115. ORTEC Global Value 7 Productivity Add On for GammaVision on Microsoft Windows 7 8 1 and XP Professional Software Version 7 User Manual Printed in U S A ORTEC Part No 931019 0314 Manual Revision C Advanced Measurement Technology Inc a k a ORTEC a subsidiary of AMETEK Inc WARRANTY ORTEC DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE NOT EXPRESSLY SET FORTH HEREIN IN NO EVENT WILL ORTEC BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVINGS EVEN IF ORTEC HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THESE DATA Copyright 2014 Advanced Measurement Technology Inc All rights reserved ORTEC is a registered trademark of Advanced Measurement Technology Inc All other trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners NOTICE OF PROPRIETARY PROPERTY This document and the information contained in it are the proprietary property of AMETEK Inc ORTEC Business Unit It may not be copied or used in any manner nor may any of the information in or upon it be used for any purpose without the express written consent of an authorized agent of AMETEK Inc ORTEC Business Unit Page 2 of 30 TABLE OF CONTENT 1 INTRODUCTION cunas ri 6 2 GETTING STARTED ou o o li aaa a 6 2
116. PDF file name structure as discussed in Section A 2 3 6 for the Analysis Editor Note that when the QA Publisher is used for Feld Sept additional data processing or reporting the PDF report name can only be set to the SpectrumID Password to Modify Password to Open OK Cancel Figure A 4 2 1 2 PDF Security Settings Page A62 of A91 A 4 2 2 QA Sample Manager Report Viewer Viewer Font Size 3 Report Content MV QA Report View V Analysis Spectrum Print Destination Printer e MS Word C PDF File C Text File r Spectrum 11_2011 10 06_009_QA2 XYZ Nuclear Facility Chemistry Department Quality Assurance Spectrum Analysis Document Type D 123456 Acquired 10 6 2011 3 31 04 PM Detector Count Room 11 487 0 122 05 0 92 Print Energy FWHM ActivityDiff 1 40 1345 000 Figure A 4 2 2 1 QA Report Viewer The QA Report viewer is nearly identical to the report viewer in the Analysis Editor It includes a text only representation of the QA report along with a Spectrum Histogram viewer with various print and export options The content in the report viewer may appear to be editable but no changes from this interface are retained in the database or included with reports generated from the print options The following options are available with the report viewer Viewer Font Size This field specifies the font size used in the report
117. QADBPATH Detector Number 2 GVQAAdmin A 4 gt Application Specific Utility Programs Program Section Command Line Parameters 1 PDF Report File Path SAA sees A 3 2 Configuration File Path 1 PDF Report File Path Bla AS 2 Configuration File Path GVQASummary A 6 N A AnalysisLog xls A 7 N A GVDetectorMonitor A 8 N A GVDatabaseUtility AQ N A File Backup BackupAndPurge bat A 10 1 Target Backup Directory 1 Target Directory GVDeleteFiles A 10 2 File Criteria ext 3 Max Days 1 Criteria File Path GVFileCompare poke 2 Report Exceptions Only Flag 1 Detector Number GVDataExport A 12 2 Spectrum ID GVEFTConvert A 13 N A Page C1 of C4 Automation Job Programs Common to Quality Assurance and Sample Measurements Program Section Command Line Parameters 1 Source File Path GX OOPYTIE B 32 2 Destination File Path 1 SDF File Path GVSetSDF Parameter B 10 2 SDF Parameter Name 3 SDF Parameter Value 1 SDF File Path CASO Dala B 9 2 SDF Data File Path 1 JOBPATH GVAskConfirm B 11 2 Message Text GVIncrementCounter B 23 1 DETDBPATH GVOpenFile B 33 1 Target File Path 1 Template File Path GVTemplateMaster B 31 2 Configuration File Path 3 Result File Path GVSpectrumMux B 35 1 Configuration File Path 1 Position or Command GVGammaProductsChangeSample B 36 2 Comm Port Number 3 Comm Type A
118. SRI DEADI DESCI DETI EDITDATEI EDITORI Figure A 2 3 5 1 Report Templates Tab Parameter codes are available in the list to the right of the template editor as shown in Figure A 2 3 5 1 A detailed description of each parameter is available in Table A 2 3 5 These parameters can be added to the report template in Edit mode by clicking on the item in the list and pasting it to the appropriate location in the report template using the Right Click shortcut menu or the keyboard combination CTRL V This process uses the Windows clipboard for temporary storage similar to the standard Copy Paste functions in other Windows applications Page A30 of A91 The following command buttons are available to manage Report Templates Add Edit mode is enabled with a blank report template name and layout Enter a name for the report and define the layout by adding standard text around the desired report parameters A simple method of creating a new report template is to copy the entire content of an existing template paste it into the empty template editor and then modify it as necessary for the new report content The Add Edit and Delete buttons are replaced with the Save and Cancel buttons when in the edit mode Edit Edit mode is enabled to allow an existing report template name and layout to be modified The Add Edit and Delete buttons are replaced with the Save and Cancel buttons when in the edit mode Delete A dialog is displayed t
119. SampleDataSC GVSampleDataSC provides an interface for sample data entry when using sample changers importing data and using custom data fields This program includes most commonly used parameters including Geometry and Library selection so that all data can be entered for multiple samples from a common location When using the Multiple Samples option which is typical for sample changer operations the interface is similar to that shown in Figure B 8 1 The Sample Queue is hidden when run in the Single Sample mode The content of the Analysis Data and Custom Sample Data sections may be modified by the Analysis Method and Custom Data configurations respectively gt GV Sample Data Ls r Analysis Data r Sample Que Analysis Method Service Air y M Custom Sample Data Position Sample Description Sample Description ice Air S 1 Service Air 54 146 Service Air 54 117 Add 2 Service Air S4 148 Sample Comment Monthly Surveillance 3 Se SA 117 A Update Sample Start Date Time 6 12 2012 08 22 Sample Stop Date Time 6 12 2012 08 52 Remove Sample Type Service Air Geometry 41 GasMarineli_0 x Library lbs Sample Flowrate 2 fsm z Collection Efficiency 0 95 Dilution Facto q Lookup Analysis Quantity 1 61418 06 fece y Activity Units fuci y r Custom Sample Data Batch ID 8123458783 y ProjectlD Projecto Client Cien S Sample ID pooo yl Analysis ID ANIZM56844 oo Method HPGe Matris F
120. TNO Detector Number SPECTRUMID Spectrum ID OutputFileNameX File name of output file OutputFilePathX Full path of output file OutputFile Directory X Directory of output file Where X Single character unique identifier matching the respective RunApp and Output group Page A56 of A91 Example Configuration The following example demonstrates how four different output files of different types can be generated and two custom applications configured to run with command line parameters Notes and comments as shown are acceptable in the configuration file XML file for passing data in a standard format OutputType1 XML OutputEnabled1 T OutputCoverTemplate1 PublishXMLTemplate OutputDirectory1 C User XML OutputFileExtension1 xml CSV file for passing data in an easily read format OutputType2 CSV OutputEnabled2 T OutputCoverTemplate2 PublishCSVTemplate OutputDirectory2 C User CSV OutputFileExtension2 csv Text file consisting of only the coversheet possibly used as a Meta Data file OutputType3 T XT OutputEnabled3 T OutputCoverTemplate2 PublishT XT Template OutputIncludeSummary3 F OutputIncludeDetails3 F OutputDirectory3 C User TXT OutputFileExtension3 asc PDF file with a cover sheet summary report and detailed report s OutputType4 PDF OutputEnabled4 T OutputCoverTemplate4 PublishPDFTemplate OutputincludeSummary4 T OutputincludeDetails4 T OutputDirectory4 C User PDF Out
121. This function returns the comma delimited unidentified peak data string described for GVUnidentifiedPeakData F22 for all peaks associated with the specified SpectrumID with each peak data set delimited by the pipe character Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumiD arguments The database is detector specific Example Spreadsheet formula B1 GVParseList GVUnidentifiedPeakData A1 A2 A3 1 returns the comma delimited Unidentified Peak data string described in F22 for the first peak in the list Spreadsheet formula B2 GVParseList B1 1 returns the peak energy for the first unidentified peak in the list Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database Page F16 of F21 F24 GVRWPListCount GVRWPListCount DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID This function returns the total number of Radiation Work Permits associated with the specified SpectrumID Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumID arguments The database is detector specific Example Spreadsheet formula GVRWPListCount A1 A2 A3 returns the number of RWPs associated with the specified Spectrum ID Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell
122. Value applications are closed including any that could be running with remote database connections prior to initiating the backup process Refer to Section A 10 for details related to configuring and running the File Backup batch process provided with Global Value Validating Critical Configuration Files Critical configuration files are validated by comparing the files on the production computers to those in a read only location managed by administrative personnel This process is configured as described in Section A 11 and normally is configured to run from the Quick Start menus or Window s shortcuts depending on the site configuration Accessing Analysis Results for Custom Data Integration The databases used in the Global Value system are secured to prevent unauthorized changes but the data can still be made available in a few different ways to accommodate integration with Page 24 of 30 4 13 4 14 other systems One method is to create various file structures such as text comma separated values or XML using the publisher programs as described in Sections A 3 and A 5 Normally these programs are initiated using the Publishing process as part of the electronic data review as described in Sections A 2 2 and Sections A 4 2 for analysis results and QA data respectively Analysis results for samples can also be exported from the Global Value databases to an unsecured Microsoft Access database as described in Section A 12 This proces
123. WRATEUNITS 3 Record 3 Field Label The label as displayed on the program interface 4 Record 4 Parameter Name The Parameter Name must match a name defined in the Sample Administration Configuration Custom Fields The data associated with these parameters is written to the Custom Data file for each sample as described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 4 so that the data can be stored in the Global Value database and reported as required The parameter name is not required for Linked fields because the associated data is stored with the Analysis Data parameters B 8 2 24 2 LIMS Input File Examples The following examples demonstrate how the LIMS Input file can be configured for different applications The file content is shown in the Microsoft Excel interface for clarity 1 Simple field for user entry This example demonstrates a single custom parameter field that allows the analyst to enter the applicable data Since there aren t any List type parameters the displayed field will be blank even if data is provided after the fourth record 1 S le ID Custom Sample Data Field sample Number Sample Number SamplelD Figure B 8 2 24 2 2 Custom Data for Single parameter data Figure B 8 2 24 2 1 Simple LIMS Input File Content Page B46 of B77 2 Complex LIMS Data This example demonstrates a more robust integration with the file content generated by a LIMS The first two parameters define the unique records the second tw
124. Y MM DD hh mm ss for all file types QAPUBLISHER Publisher Name X X X X QAREVIEWDATE Review Date Time X X X X Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss for all file types QAREVIEWER Reviewer Name XX X X QASMP_ACQU Acauisition Start Date Time XX X X Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss for all file types IQASPC Spectrum File Name X X IQATYPE QA Type either QAPeak or QABackground X X X X QA Data Parameters for XML and CSV files QAPUBHIGHCTRL QA Parameter High Control Value X X QAPUBHIGHTOL QA Parameter High Tolerance Value X X QAPUBLOWCTRL QA Parameter Low Control Value X X QAPUBLOWTOL QA Parameter Low Tolerance Value X X QAPUBPARAMETER QA Parameter Name i e Energy FWHM etc X X QAPUBPOINT QA Point Name i e QA 122 QA 1408 etc X X QAPUBRESULT Result as displayed on QA report i e PASS Low OOT etc XX QAPUBTARGET QA Parameter Target Value X X QAPUBVALUE QA Parameter Measured Value X X Page A45 of A91 A 2 3 6 PDF Properties The PDF Properties define the PDF file names and passwords that are employed when Publishing reports from the Analysis Editor These properties are not used when printing reports to the PDF format from automation Jobs or from the Analysis Editor Detectors Sample Types Nuc Adj Factors Report Templates PD ties Custom Fields File Name Format Passwords Available File Name Fields Used File Name Fields Modify SpectrumlD SpectrumlD Open Description SampleT yp
125. ade from a single location when active measurements are not in progress Navigation controls on the program header provide the following links and information Current User Admin User Group Administrato 1 Password Editor for users to manage their system password Section A 2 1 2 User Login to change the current user 3 Security Editor to manage Users and User Group Permissions Section A 2 3 1 4 Analysis Editor for analysis data review editing and approval Section A 2 2 5 Configuration Manager to manage various configuration settings Section A 2 3 6 Synchronize Databases to push Security and Configuration changes from the default database to the other databases Section A 2 3 9 7 Database Path for the currently selected detector in the Analysis Editor 8 User Name and Group for the current user logged in 9 Close Button to exit application Page A10 of A91 A 2 1 Sample Administration Login and Password Management NOTE The default installation database uses a default User Account which has all permissions enabled The User Name and Password is Admin case sensitive This User Name should be deleted or the password changed during the initial configuration to prevent unauthorized access When the Sample Administration program opens a prompt is displayed for login If a valid User Name is selected from the list with the correct password then the User and Group Names will be displayed in the
126. affected e Review Data Allows a Review Signature to be applied to or removed from Sample or QA records stored in the database This also locks or unlocks the data fields to prevent or allow changes in the Analysis Editor as applicable e Publish Data Allows analysis reports to be published to the specified location This also locks or unlocks the data fields to prevent or allow changes if a Review signature was not previously applied Typically this is the last step in an electronic review process While in the edit mode the buttons below the Security Group field change to Save Cancel as shown in Figure A 2 3 1 1 Select the Save button to save the changes or Cancel to discard them If changes are saved then all other databases must be synchronized as described in Section A 2 3 9 Note that at least one Security Group must always exist A report summarizing the Group Permissions can be printed or displayed in Microsoft Word if installed by selecting the appropriate destination and the Print button User names and initial passwords are established along with the applicable Security Group on the Users tab as shown in Figure A 2 3 1 2 Note that User Names currently assigned as the Analyst Editor Reviewer or Publisher for Sample or QA reports are not affected when users are deleted or permissions are changed using the Security Editor Any changes are applied to future operations after all databases are synchronized but no existing
127. age A72 of A91 A 4 7 2 QA Parameters After establishing the QA Points for the selected detector the limits and target values associated with each parameter can be configured in the QA Limits editor as follows See Figure A 4 7 1 1 Select a QA point in the list If no limits have been established for any parameters associated with the selected point then the full list of parameters is displayed in the grid If parameters have been previously established for the selected QA Point then the only those parameters are displayed in the grid by default The entire list of parameters can be displayed i e to establish limits for new parameters by unchecking the Hide Unused Parameters checkbox Select a field in the Limits Grid and enter the appropriate limits and target value using the following guidance a The target value is required If the target field is empty when changes are saved then data for that parameter will be discarded regardless of any entries in the Limits fields The Control Limits typically correspond to 3 sigma bounds and Tolerance Limits typically correspond to 2 sigma bounds The actual criteria for these are determined by site requirements If a target value is set but Limits are not specified then all limits for that parameter are set to zero by default All parameters that end with Diff will calculate the measured value for that parameter in terms of a percent difference from the target value as sp
128. ailable in the specified directories then no item will be selected in the respective list Re Analysis Data File optional f the Re Analysis Flag parameter 7 is set to T true this file is read to determine which Calibration and Library files were used in the previous analysis The re analysis data file must be generated by the GVRecallSpectrum program section B 3 or a custom developed application capable of creating the same content GV_GetRType This program sets the Sample and Record Type for the Global Value Sample Entry sample The Sample Type relates a meaningful description to a document control code R Type or Record Type that Semele Type RCS may be less meaningful to the analyst See Section A 2 3 3 for Sample Type and R Type configuration R Type 14132 GV_GetRType has the following comma delimited command Cancel line parameters 1 2 3 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required The Figure B 13 1 GV_GetRType Prompt database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector Sample Type optional Ifa valid Sample Type is specified then the R Type is automatically set based on the configuration established in Sample Administration Configuration on the Sample Types tab If this parameter is omitted the dialog shown in Figure B 13 1 is displayed to allow the analyst to select the appropriate Sample Type In addition to the pre d
129. al scale can also be viewed in Log or Linear scale with automatic or manual range settings After setting the desired view an image of the spectrum can be saved to a Bitmap file or printed The full spectrum file can also be extracted from the database and saved to a file for use directly in GammaVision Print Destination This section has several options for report output which are applied when the Print button is selected 1 2 3 Printer The report is printed on the default printer MS Word The report is displayed in Microsoft Word MS Word is required PDF File The report is saved to a PDF file A standard Save As dialog is displayed indicating the path and file name The default path is the Custom Report Path established for the selected detector in the Configuration Manager and the default file name is the Spectrum name Both the path and file name can be changed in the Save As dialog Also see Open File After Save below NOTE Printing the report to a PDF file is not the same as Publishing the report When Publishing the report is always saved to the Publish directory and the file name and protection is determined by the PDF Properties in the Configuration Manager GVPublishSample is also launched for additional processing when publishing When printing a PDF file you can change the name and location the file is not encrypted and no additional processing occurs after the file is saved Page A
130. alysis processes because all of the data has already been linked to the analysis results therefore this function is unnecessary for reanalysis process that use the GVRecallSpectrum program described in B 3 GV_ClearData has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Full Path to a Detector Samples database required GVRecallSpectrum This program prompts the user to selecta Global Value Recall Spectrum Spectrum for reanalysis using the prompt shown in Figure B 3 1 The Spectrum list Spectrum 3 2012 06 26_001 y is populated with analysis records in the o ta specified database that have not been Analysis Date 21 Jul 2012 23 40 electronically reviewed locked in the File Path C UsenSPC Det3 3_2012 06 26_001 Ant Sample Administration Analysis Editor Spectra can be un reviewed with the oF appropriate permissions to allow reanalysis when required Figure B 3 1 GVRecallSpectrum Prompt When a Spectrum is selected from the list the Description Analysis Date and Spectrum File path are also displayed for further validation that the correct spectrum has been selected When OK is selected the Reanalysis spectrum ID is stored in the database commands are written to a helper Job to recall the spectrum and the reanalysis data file is written as described below GVRecallSpectrum has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Full Path to a Detector Samples database required
131. ame can both be changed in the dialog When using the Print_Rpt program from JOB files the report is saved in the Custom Report Directory unless the path is specified as a command line argument See Section B 25 Print_Rpt for more detail Click on the button next to this field to browse to the appropriate directory If a network path is desired it can be typed directly into the field Network Report Path This path is not used directly by the Analysis Editor or any other Global Value programs by default However it is an available parameter that can be used in automation Jobs with Excel worksheets that implement the Excel Add In or other custom programs Click on the button next to this field to browse to the appropriate directory If a network path is desired it can be typed directly into the field Publish Report Path This path is the directory where PDF files are automatically stored when Publishing reports Typically this is a local directory for optimal efficiency in saving PDF files and the GVPublishSample program See Section A 3 is used for additional processing including moving reports to a network location where they can be pulled directly into the Document Control Record Keeping system If no additional processing is required then the Publish directory can be set directly to the network location Click on the button next to this field to browse to the appropriate directory If a network path is desired it can be type
132. ampleDataSC1 Job The last line calls the automation Job for the first or in this case the only sample in the queue Configuration Parameters may also be combined to allow for multiple commands This is accomplished by making a parameter that includes others that are predefined The following example shows a parameter configured to prompt for Radiation Monitor Readings and Radiation Work Permits RunRadMonitor_RunRWP Run_GVGetRadMonitor CrLf Run_GVGetRWP If the Continue Command is set to RunRadMonitor_RunRWP then the helper Job content would be Run C GV_GetRadMon exe C GlobalValue3 mdb F C 3_ Abort Job Wait C GV_GetRadMon exe Page B36 of B77 B 8 2 5 B 8 2 6 Call C 3_ Abort Job Run C GV_GetRWP exe C GlobalValue3 mdb F C 3_ Abort Job Wait C GV_GetRWP exe Call C 3_ Abort Job Call C 3_SampleDataSC1 Job Refer to Section B 32 GVTemplateMaster for details related to configuration parameters and how they are used with Job Templates to create automation Job commands GVSampleDataSC_JobFilePath This parameter specifies the full path to a Job File that will be called from the main application Job immediately after the GVSampleDataSC application closes The contents of this Job are either the word Quit if the Cancel button is selected in the application interface this command terminates the automation routine and closes GammaVision
133. ampleDataSCOut_SampleFlowrate The Sample Flowrate specified for the sample GVSampleDataSCOut_SampleFlowrateUnits The Sample Flowrate Units specified for the sample GVSampleDataSCOut_CollectionEfficiency The Collection Efficiency specified for the sample Other GVSampleDataSCOut parameters A parameter is generated for each of the Custom Data parameters specified for the sample in the format GVSampleDataSCOut_CustomDataParameterName where CustomDataParameterName is the name of the parameter as specified in the fourth record of the LIMS Input file For the Custom Data shown in Figure B 8 2 24 2 5 the following parameters would be generated GVSampleDataSCOut_BatchID B 12345 GVSampleDataSCOut_ProjectID Project B GVSampleDataSCOut_AnalysisID AN 234 GVSampleDataSCOut_Matrix Liquid Page B53 of B77 B 9 GVSDFData This program is used to modify Sample Definition File SDF fields with analysis information stored in a simple text file This text file is very easy to generate with a custom application as compared to writing the data directly to the binary SDF structure A static set of parameters can also be set in this text file to meet the needs for some implementations This program is more efficient than the GVSetSDFParameter program See Section B 10 when multiple parameters must be written to the file After updating the SDF file with GVSDFData the SDF file must be recalled in GammaVision to be used for the spec
134. and cannot be used to store any other data 1 CrLf This parameter is automatically replaced with the Carriage Return Line Feed character set to force a new line in the Result file 2 LINK This parameter should be followed by the full path to another Configuration file After the list of parameters defined in the current file is loaded the program will load any parameters from the file path specified by the LINK parameter This chain will continue until the LINK parameter is not set to a valid file name NOTE The full path specified for the LINK parameter CANNOT contain any user defined variables Page B69 of B77 B 32 Implementation Example Template File Content Configuration File Content My Name is MyName MyName JB Nimble My Department is MyDepartment MyDepartment Chemistry My User ID is MyID MyID 2345 MyInfo MyInfo MyName CrLf MyDepartment CrLf MyID The Result file generated by running the GVTemplateMaster program will be My Name is JB Nimble My Department is Chemistry My User ID is 2345 JB Nimble Chemistry 2345 When reading Configuration files the data is stored for each parameter the first time the parameter is found If the parameter is set multiple times within the configuration file then it is ignored after the first instance For example if the following text was specified in a Configuration file then the value of MyParameter that gets ret
135. and may be stored on a network server or other location depending on the specific site configuration The dialog shown in Figure 2 1 1 will be displayed during the installation process to allow different components to be installed e The Program Files option will install all of Soba Vae Sag 2 y Select C O the required programs for Global Value to id YI perform its intended functions Select the components you want to install and clear the components you do not want to install Additional Program Files may optionally be E ig Program Fies Description y Default Publisher Program Files Executable programs and installed for Publishing Sample and QA data Def Backup end Puce Bach Fie a eaten Default Configuration Support Files pons D pm Eee See Sections A 3 and A 5 and automating the curently installed fles system backup See Section A 10 if the default programs are desired These options i ifi 5 Required on C DK should not be checked when Site Specific a pes Publisher or Backup processes have been implemented a ae Figure 2 1 1 Installation Component e The Default Configuration Support Files should normally be installed with a new installation to establish standard counting operations This option provides a set of standard automation routines for QA and Sample measurements using the three main data entry programs offered with Global Value Several routines are configured for us
136. ant Output Spectrum channels as follows i Determine if the input and output spectrum channels overlap based on their minimum and maximum energy range meeting the following criteria OCmin lt Cmax AND OCmax gt ICmin Where ICmin Minimum Energy for the Input Spectrum Channel ICuax Maximum Energy for the Input Spectrum Channel OCwin Minimum Energy for the Output Spectrum Channel OCmax Maximum Energy for the Output Spectrum Channel ii If the energy range overlaps then determine the fraction of the Input channel energy range that overlaps the output channel energy range as follows ICFuin Higher of ICyin and OCnin ICFuax Lower of I Cyax and OCvax OC countrate ICcountrate e ICF max AE ICF vin ICmax E lCmin Where ICF nin Minimum Energy for the Input Channel Fraction ICFmax Maximum Energy for the Input Channel Fraction ICcountrate Input Channel Countrate OCcountrate Output Channel Countrate Page B73 of B77 iii Sum all of the output channel countrate contributions from all applicable input channels and then divide by the effective Live Time to determine the total output spectrum channel counts The following example demonstrates how this method is applied when the input and output are not perfectly matched by energy gain As shown in Figure B 35 2 there are two channels in the Input Spectrum 999 and 1000 that overlap the applicable energy range for Channel 1000 in the Output Spectrum For this examp
137. ar to copying the database file in Windows Explorer The default file name for the database will be the original database name followed by the current date in the format YYYY MM DD The detector database is not changed in any way Note that analysis data can be accessed from an archived database by selecting the Archived Database item in the Detector list in the header section If it is necessary to query an archived database using the Analysis Log then a temporary Detector should be established with a path to the respective database so that it will be available to the Analysis Log The archived detector database will also be available as a direct Detector selection in the Analysis Editor with this configuration Page A26 of A91 A 2 3 3 e Compact This function compacts the database for the selected detector similar to the process performed by Microsoft Access Global Value uses an Access format database which does not reclaim used space when data is deleted i e the file size is not automatically reduced when records are deleted Normally there is very little space to recover unless a large number of records have been removed i e after using the Purge function e Purge This function will delete all analysis records in the selected detector database that are prior to date specified in the field below this button The date can be selected from a calendar control by selecting the drop down arrow When Purge is selected a confirmat
138. arameter is omitted the dialog shown in Figure B 14 1is displayed to allow the analyst to select from a pre defined list or manually type the unit name If a Site Unit is specified then the dialog is not displayed Re Analysis Flag optional f set to T true then the Site Unit from the previous analysis is used as the default The prompt is always displayed for reanalysis mode Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty so the automation process is unaffected b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammavVision immediately GV_GetBatch This program sets the Batch Description for the sample Global Value Batch Entry GV_GetBatch has the following comma delimited command BatchID RGP MG1935 line parameters 1 2 3 4 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required The ms database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector Figure B 15 1 GV_GetBatch Prompt Batch Description optional Any text may be specified for the batch description If this parameter is omitted the dialog shown i
139. arameter is set to F then the UFO file is deleted immediately after the analysis is completed As described in Section 3 Global Value loads some of the analysis information from this file so it must be available after the analysis is completed The Peak Background Correction PBC files and Analysis Results display in GammaVision and GVPlots also rely on information from this file Item 427 Print discarded peak table must be set to T This parameter ensures that all unidentified peaks in Global Value are reported The Discarded Peak table is the list of peaks that are associated with a particular nuclide during the initial peak identification but removed from consideration after the nuclide has been rejected for failing a specified test e g the Fraction Limit or Key Line test These peaks are normally reported in the Unidentified Peak list in Global Value but the information is only available if this flag is set to T true Item 38 Second MDA type T Calculate This parameter determines if MDA2 is calculated and which calculation method is used Normally this method is set to Method 2 Critical Level and T true This MDA value provides additional sorting options for the nuclide activity table on custom reports which can be useful for data evaluation when using the Directed Fit option in the analysis settings See the custom report parameters NUC_ lt and _NUC_ gt in Section A 2 3 5
140. are acceptable e CVR Print only the report summary Global Value Custom Report e ALL Print report summary and all detailed Gamma Vision analysis reports e Omitted Print detailed GammaVision analysis reports without the report summary Report Destination optional Any of the following parameters are acceptable e WORD Displays report in Microsoft Word requires MS Word to be installed e PDF Save report to a PDF file required Directory Item 6 e TXT Save report to a Text file e Omitted Print report on the default printer Font Size optional f omitted the default size is 11 points The maximum practical font size is also 11 points to avoid formatting and table alignment issues on the standard GammaVision analysis report The minimum practical font size is 8 points File Directory optional This parameter specifies the directory PDF or Text reports It is ignored if the Report Destination is not set to PDF or TXT If a path for PDF or Text reports is not specified then the Custom Report Path specified in Sample Administration Configuration on the Detectors tab for the applicable detector is used as the default The file name will always be the same as the Spectrum File name Re Analysis Flag optional f set to T true then the spectrum ID used for generating the report summary is based on the most recent selection in the GVRecallSpectrum program If set to F false then the spectrum ID used for ge
141. ary Ca e o eses use esse us la les ss 705 10 2043 16 2427 03 2685 68 2709 56 1365 38 5460 92 1400 37 5601 66 1475 19 5900 18 1505 15 6020 01 1690 87 6762 95 Figure A 2 2 4 1 Unidentified Peak Data Page A20 of A91 A 2 2 5 Custom Data The Custom Data tab contains fields for viewing or modifying Custom Data associated with the sample The parameters in the grid are defined on the Custom Fields tab in the Configuration Manager See Section A 2 3 8 The fields on this tab can be modified if the Current User belongs to a group with permission to Edit Data and the report has not been locked i e Reviewed or Published See Appendix D for data length limits Analysis Report Sample Data Nuclide Data Unidentified Peaks Custom Data Change Summary Parameter Quantity Calc Type Quantity Calc Input Value Quantity Calc Units Quantity Calc Multiplier Quantity Calc Divisor Parameter Data Flowrate 2 000E 00 CFM 1 000E 00 1 000E 00 Sample Number Analysis Method Dilution Factor Sample Quantity Sample Comment SC My Comment Sample Flowrate Flowrate Units Collection Efficiency Batch ID Project ID Analysis ID Matrix A 2 2 6 Figure A 2 2 5 1 Custom Data Change Summary The Change Summary tab displays details of every change applied in the Analysis Editor tabs along with the user name and date time the changes were saved This includes the data value pr
142. at 0 00000E 00 XXIX XX RSFSLOPE Random Summing Factor Slope value entered in analysis options X X X X X format 0 00000E 00 IRTYPE R Type Record Type X X X X X RWP RWPs separated by commas X X X X X ISMP_ACQU Acquisition Start Date Time X X X X X Report Format Regional Short Date and Time format hh mm ss XML CSV Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss SMP_ANAL Analysis Report Date Time X X X X X Report Format Regional Short Date and Time format hh mm XML CSV Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss ISMP_STOP Sample Stop Date Time X X X X X Report Format Regional Short Date and Time format hh mm XML CSV Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss ISMP_STRT Sample Start Date Time X X X X X Report Format Regional Short Date and Time format hh mm XML CSV Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss ISMPLR Air Sampler Identification X X X X X SPC Spectrum File Name X X X X X SPCPATH Spectrum File Path X X X X X Page A34 of A91 Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes Corus gt Report Code Returned Data E a Q A SPCPICTURE Image of Spectrum in Log mode xX xX A placeholder SPECTRUMPLACEHOLDER is displayed in the Analysis Editor report viewer and this parameter is replaced by the spectrum image when printing to the Printer or MS Word or saving the report to PDF format Only one image per document is allowed If more than one is specified then only the first is rendered as a
143. ataSC_Methods csv in the directory C User GVCR Configuration Files directory The format of this file is described in Section B 8 2 4 and the default methods file can be used as a template Another file that is typically configured for the GVSampleDataSC interface is the Custom Data Input file This file defines the custom fields that can be used for manual user input or it can be created and fully populated with information from a data management system for optimal data integration The structure of this file is described in Section B 8 2 24 1 and a few examples are installed with the default configuration files in the C lUsenGVCR Configuration Files directory using the prefix GVSampleDataSC_CustominputData Other files that define the activity and sample size units dilution factors and flow units are also found in the directory C1UsenGVCR Configuration Files with the prefix GVSampleDataSC and an applicable suffix defining their purpose The GVSampleDataSC program is the main interface used with Sample Changers When using the Sample Changer mode of operation all of the data required to be captured for each sample should be accomplished in the GVSampleDataSC interface to avoid any additional prompts once the sample changer automation is started Refer to the Global Configuration file Page 28 of 30 4 16 9 SampleChanger cfg to ensure that the appropriate methodology for changing the sample is implemented
144. ater in this section Global Value Sample Data Live Time Preset Seconds Cancel Figure B 6 2 1 GVSampleData Live Time Prompt The following is an example Job excerpt using the Excel interface Set Detector 1 Stop Clear Run C User GVCR GVSampleData exe C User 1_AirFilter sdf C User 1_SampleData job C User 1_AirVolume xls Wait C User GVCR GVSampleData exe Call C User 1_SampleDataJOB Start Wait Analyze B 6 2 1 Excel Workbook Format Requirements The Excel file must be configured properly to ensure that the correct data is returned This program reads data from the following cells in a worksheet named GlobalValue Cell Sample Data B1 Sample Description B2 Collection Start Date Time B3 Collection Stop Date Time B4 Decay Correction Date Time B5 Quantity B6 Quantity Units Page B8 of B77 If a worksheet named GlobalValue is not found or these fields are not populated then no data is returned by the program NOTE The GlobalValue worksheet fields are typically linked to another worksheet that is configured for data entry and calculations such as sample volume based on flow rate as shown in Figures B 6 2 2 and B 6 2 3 eS T a El Daa 9 EQ 7 AirvolumeBa la o e x D aa 19 7 AirvolumeBa C ax Hol Ins Pac For Dat Rev Vie Ad de 9 Q
145. ath required Full path to the file that is generated when the Configuration parameters are merged with the process Template This file is overwritten if it exists Process Details The GVTemplateMaster starts by reading the Configuration file and saving the parameter list and associated data These parameters are similar to variables declared in a programming language These parameters are used in the Job Templates to allow the process to be consistent for all measurements while details within that process are determined by the parameter data specified Qualified parameter names are encased in pipes The data assigned to the parameters can be static text or other valid parameters defined within the same file Example Three parameters are defined as Message Name and Greeting Data can be assigned to these variables as follows Name Mike Message Hello Greeting Message Name The data stored with the Greeting parameter is interpreted as Hello Mike If data for the Name or Message parameters were not defined then an error would occur When the Configuration file is read all parameters that are followed immediately by the equal sign are stored with their associated data Any matching parameters found in the Template file are replaced with the data stored for that parameter and the result is saved to the Result file path specified There are two special parameters that are interpreted by the program
146. ation For additional assurance of report content integrity passwords can be set to Modify or Open PDF files using the applicable fields on this tab Generally the reports should be available for viewing by anyone but encryption to prevent unauthorized changes may be desired This condition is established by leaving the Open password blank and specifying a password in the Modify password field Note that modifications to PDF files that are encrypted require a PDF editor Changes are not stored in the database until the Save button is selected Page A46 of A91 A 2 3 7 Startup and Non Analysis Sample Input Defaults The Misc tab in the Configuration Editor allows default parameters to be defined for system startup and various data input fields that are not related to the spectrum analysis as described below Detectors Sample Types Nuc Adj Factors Report Templates PDF Properties Misc Custom Fields NOTE Parameters on this tab are automatically saved when changes are made Default Database Path C User GVCR Databases Global alue1 mdb GammavVision Path C Program Files x86 G ammaVision Gv32 exe Gas Decay Tank Volume 600 Cubic Feet Sample Admin Interface Options Default GDT Pi i des Aa OO peg MV Show Time of Count Activity in Nuclide Grid RWP Prefix Current Year is used if left blank ra iGansrals Eciorandanabss eparate Editor and Analys Y Show ISO NORM Nuclide Option Default Sam
147. ationValue 2 000E 00 QuantityCalculationUnits cc min QuantityCalculationMultiplier 9 500E 01 QuantityCalculationDivisor 1 000E 00 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationConversionTablePath This parameter requires the full path to a Conversion Table file that is used for Flow rate and Unit Conversion Analysis Quantity Calculations This file is also used to define the default Analysis Quantity units to display in the dropdown list when the Quantity Calculation Method is set to None Example GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationConversionTablePath CONFIGDIR ConversonTable txt The File format for the Conversion Table content is four comma delimited parameters as follows Calculation Method Input Units Output Units Conversion Factor The Conversion factor is used to convert the input units into the output units specified using the calculations shown in Section B 7 2 11 The Input and Output units define the available selections in the Quantity Calculation Input and Output unit dropdown list Examples Flowrate cc min L 1E 3 Flowrate CFM L 28 320 UnitConversion L cc 1000 UnitConversion g Kg 1E 3 The default quantity units to display without calculations are also included in this file These settings have three comma delimited parameters and must follow the Flowrate and UnitConversion parameters Note that the second parameter is ignored and can be blank Examples None L None gm Page B26 of B77 B 8 GV
148. bal Value 8 Recalibrate Energy FWHM and load AS LEFT QA data as applicable 9 Call the Job File for the Next sample in the queue Refer to Section B 31 and the example Job Templates for more detail related to the file content Example GVSampleDataSC_QAPeakJobTemplateFilePath SCQAPeak where SCQAPeak is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files Page B42 of B77 B 8 2 19 GVSampleDataSC_QABkgdJobTemplateFilePath B 8 2 20 This parameter specifies the full path to a Job Template file which is used to create the automation Jobs for the QA Background Analysis Method as described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 2 Ata minimum this Job Templates must include the following functions a Change Sample Multiple Samples mode only Changer type dictates the specific commands 2 Set Sample Description 3 Copy the Default SDF file to the sample specific SDF file path 4 Update the sample specific SDF file using options set in the QA Background Configuration File See Section B 8 2 20 5 Load the SDF file into GammavVision 6 Load the calibration and library files 7 Save Analyze and load Background data into Global Value 8 Call the Job File for the Next sample in the queue Refer to Section B 31 and the example Job Templates for more detail related to the file content Example GVSampleDataSC_QABkgdJobTemplateFilePath SCQAB
149. calculation described in Table A 2 3 5 1 Default Gas Decay Tank Pressure This is the default value displayed when the analyst is prompted for Gas Decay Tank pressure during automation Jobs using the GV_GetGDTPressure program see Section B 17 RWP Prefix This is the default text displayed in the RWP Prefix field when the analyst is prompted for RWP Radiation Work Permit numbers during automation Jobs using the GV_GetRWP program see Section B 19 If this field is left blank then the current year format YYYY is displayed in the RWP entry prompt Default Sampler ID This is the default text displayed when the analyst is prompted for a Sampler Identification during automation Jobs using the GV_GetSamplePump program see Section B 18 Default Monitor List This is the list of monitors that are displayed when the analyst is prompted for Radiation Monitor Readings during automation Jobs using the GV_GetRadMon program see Section B 20 A comprehensive list is not always required because the analyst may enter monitor names that are not listed if necessary Site Units List This is the list of Unit names that are displayed when the analyst is prompted for the Site Unit during automation Jobs using the GV_GetSiteUnit program see Section B 14 A comprehensive list is not always required because the analyst may enter a unit name that is not listed or the unit name may be specified without user input Show Time of Count Activity in Nuc
150. calibration is loaded in the subsequent Job file therefore some default efficiency calibration should be specified prior to running this program in the main automation Job 6 Calibration Directory optional Used to generate a fully qualified calibration file path This parameter is only required if a valid Geometry list is specified See 3 a 7 Calibration File Prefix optional Used to generate a fully qualified calibration file path This parameter is only required if a valid Geometry list is specified See 3 a GVTimerControl This program is typically used within the automation process to ensure that the data E Sobel Ya oa acquisition is started ata precise time lt Target Date Time 05 Sep 2012 12 00 ea acts as a countdown timer to pause an Start DateTime 05 Sep 201211 5028 Start Timer automation Job until the specified date time Current Date Time 05 Sep 2012 11 51 21 is reached This is accomplished by entering Time Remaining 00 08 39 End Timer the Target Date Time and clicking on the Start Timer button When the time E remaining reaches zero the program closes Figure B 5 1 GVTimerControl Prompt and allows the Job to continue to the next step The program can also be closed immediately by selecting the End Timer button Page B5 of B77 B 6 GVSampleData This program is used in automation Jobs to collect basic data related to sample analysis lt allows the use of Mic
151. cation to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty as no further processing is necessary b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammavVision immediately 4 Reanalysis Flag optional Not applicable for GVQASetUser When the Reanalysis Flag is set to T true the analyst name is set for Reanalysis processes If this parameter is omitted or set to anything other than T then the analyst name is set for non Reanalysis processes such as Sample counts or loading spectra as a new analysis Refer to Section A 1 2 for further information on Re analysis processes run from Quick Start GVQASetUser has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Detector ID required This is the Detector ID or number specified in the MCB Configuration and QA Detector configuration 2 Full Path to a QA database required 3 Require Login Flag optional When the Require Login Flag is set to T true the login prompt cannot be cancelled A valid login is required If this parameter is omitted or set to anything other than T then users can cancel the login dialog and the analyst name is set to an empty string 4 Full Path to Job File required The content
152. ced on the detector or the sample is repositioned during the acquisition GVDeadTimeCheck has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Detector Number required This is the Detector ID or number specified in the MCB Configuration and Sample Administration configuration 2 Dead Time Limit required This value is listed as a percentage value For example a limit of 10 would require a value of 10 3 Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is Page B4 of B77 normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If Continue Count is selected or the program closes automatically and an item from the Geometry list has been specified then the command Recall_Efficiency followed by the full path to a calibration file is written to the file with the file path determined as follows CalFilePath CalDirectory CalFilePrefix Geometry clb b If Continue Count is selected or the program closes automatically and an item from the geometry list has not been set either due to no geometry list file specified or the dead time limit being exceeded for the last geometry in the list then the file is empty c If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and clo
153. ch they are listed in the configuration file The following dynamic parameters may be specified in addition to any static parameters desired DETNO Detector Number SPECTRUMID Spectrum ID OutputFileNameX File name of output file OutputFilePathX Full path of output file OutputFileDirectoryX Full path of output file Where X Single character unique identifier matching the respective RunApp and Output group Page A80 of A91 A 5 1 11 Example Configuration The following example demonstrates how four different output files of different types can be generated and two custom applications configured to run with command line parameters Notes and comments as shown in this example are acceptable in the configuration file XML file for passing data in a standard format OutputType1 XML OutputEnabled1 T OutputCoverTemplate1 PublishQAXMLTemplate OutputDirectory1 C User XML OutputFileExtension1 xml CSV file for passing data in an easily read format OutputType2 CSV OutputEnabled2 T OutputCoverTemplate2 PublishQACSVTemplate OutputDirectory2 C User CSV OutputFileExtension2 csv Text file consisting of only the coversheet possibly used as a Meta Data file OutputType3 TXT OutputEnabled3 T OutputCoverTemplate2 PublishQAMetaDataTemplate OutputIncludeSummary3 F OutputIncludeDetails3 F OutputDirectory3 C User TXT OutputFileExtension3 asc PDF file with a cover sheet summary report and detail
154. chanism for searching sample results based on all available parameters See Section A 7 for more advanced search capabilities using the Analysis Log The following filtering options are available a Unreviewed This option will limit the list of spectra to only those that do not have a Reviewer signature applied b UnPublished This option will limit the list of spectra to only those that do not have a Publisher signature applied c Previous X Days When this option is selected a field is displayed to specify the number of days The list of spectra is limited to only those where the Report Date also referred to as the Analysis date is after the current date time minus the number of days specified d All This option will populate the Spectrum list with all spectra in the database e All Custom Data Parameters Each custom parameter defined on the Custom Fields tab in the Configuration Manager is listed in the Filter By list A field is displayed to specify the custom parameter criteria when one of these options are selected and the spectrum list is updated accordingly Delete Button This button is only enabled if the Current User belongs to a Group that has permission to Delete Data When selected a prompt is displayed indicating that all of the data associated with the currently selected spectrum will be permanently deleted from the database None of the files stored outside of the database are affected i e published reports spectra
155. compatibility with Global Value and discuss different options for initial configuration and system maintenance Page 10 of 30 NOTE The only parameter critical in setting up Global Value is on the Report tab as specified in items 1 and 2 below All other parameters may be set based on user preference and the specific applications employed 1 At a minimum the following Reporting Options on the Report tab MUST be selected LIBRARY PEAK LIST and NUCLIDE ABUNDANCE It is recommended that ALL reporting options are checked If the UNKNOWN PEAKS option is not selected these peaks will not be available in Global Value Global Value uses the ASCII text report generated by the GammaVision analysis engine as one source of information It parses this report and extracts the relevant information for storage in the database and retains a copy of the full detailed report minus signature blocks so it is available for review within the Global Value system For this to occur Global Value and GammaVision must be configured such that GammaVision stores the report files in a directory where Global Value knows to look for them In GammaVision the path is set in the analysis options SDF file on the Report tab The Output option must be set to File along with the Global Value Analysis Report Path for the respective detector The path is normally set as part of the automation process using the GVSetSDFParameter program Section B 10 or using the standard
156. configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty so the automation process is unaffected b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close Gamma Vision immediately 4 Allow Continue Flag optional If set to T then the Continue Counting Sample button is displayed on the warning prompt The user can select this button to continue a sample count even though a QA parameter failed If this flag is set to F or omitted then the user has no choice but to abort the count if any parameter fails the QA check UfoToPbc This program creates a Peak Background Correction PBC file using all of the Identified Peaks stored in the specified UFO file This function is similar to the CREATEPBC job command in GammaVision except that the PBC file name can be named with the current date time automatically and an automation Job with commands to load this PBC file is updated This program is typically run in the QA Background automation processes when long background counts are measured UfoToPbc has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 UFO File Path required Full path to the UFO file generated by the GammavVision analysis 2 PBC File Path required Full path to the PBC file to be created This path may use the keyword DATE which will be replaced by the current date a
157. corrected unless the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded If the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded then this value is set to the Time of Count value similar to the GammaVision report content XCVR TXT PDF _ ICRL _S ISO NORM Critical Level Decision Threshold Must be on the same row as the NUC_ code Value is right aligned SH See ACT_S format code If Decay Correction is enabled then this value is decay corrected unless the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded If the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded then this value is set to the Time of Count value similar to the GammaVision report content _ IMDA _S ISO NORM Minimum Detectable Activity Detection Limit Must be on the same row as the _NUC_ code Value is right aligned SH See _ ACT_S format code If Decay Correction is enabled then this value is decay corrected unless the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded If the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded then this value is set to the Time of Count value similar to the GammaVision report content _MDA_S Standard Nuclide MDA Must be on the same row as the _NUC_ code Value is right aligned SH See ACT_S format code If Decay Correction is enabled then this value is decay corrected unless the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded If the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded then this value is set to the Time of Count value MDA2_S Standard Nuclide MDA2 Typically Critical Level 1 AOU MN
158. ction is enabled then this value is decay corrected unless the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded If the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded then this value is set to the Time of Count value similar to the GammaVision report content 5 If Standard Nuclide Activity is reported as lt MDA then this value is set to the ISO NORM Counting Uncertainty in Activity Units _lUPT _S ISO NORM Total Uncertainty in Percent 1 Must be on the same row as the _NUC_ code Value is right aligned S See _ACT_S format code If Standard Nuclide Activity is reported as lt MDA then this RW ND value is set to the ISO NORM Counting Uncertainty in Percent _ IMIN _S ISO NORM Minimum Activity as Reported by GammaVision 1 Must be on the same row as the NUC_ code 2 Value is right aligned 3 S See _ACT_S format code 4 If Decay Correction is enabled then this value is decay corrected unless the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded If the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded then this value is set to the Time of Count value similar to the GammaVision report content Page A39 of A91 Report Code Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes Returned Data XML CSV _ IMAX _SH ISO NORM Maximum Activity as Reported by GammaVision Must be on the same row as the NUC_ code Value is right aligned SH See ACT_S format code If Decay Correction is enabled then this value is decay
159. d directly into the field Page A25 of A91 Job File Path This path is the directory that the Quick Start program uses to search for automation Jobs or Job Configuration files for the selected detector The path must be unique so that only Jobs associated with the selected detector can be executed from the Quick Start program This path should normally be a directory on the local computer so that the system can operate without interruption in the event of a network or server outage However the path can be set to a network path to allow running automation Jobs for the same detectors from multiple computers if desired Click on the button next to this field to browse to the appropriate directory If a network path is desired it can be typed directly into the field QA Database This field specifies the path to the database where QA data is stored for the selected detector Unlike data associated with samples the QA databases may contain information for multiple detectors When configuration data is synchronized from the Sample Administration program the associated detector parameters described in this section and Security settings users and groups are copied to the specified QA Database The Synchronize Security Settings option is available only for backward compatibility This option must be checked to synchronize the detector and security settings to the QA database as these settings are no longer available directly in the QA Administrati
160. d the content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammavVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected then the following commands are written to the Job File Describe_Sample Description Specified Recall_Options SDFPath Set Preset Clear Set Preset Live lt Live Time Value gt NOTE The Preset commands are only written if the Live Time Preset parameter is implemented with this program See Section B 7 2 Presets cannot be changed in GammaVision during an active acquisition so the main automation Job must ensure that the acquisition is stopped prior calling this Job and started or restarted afterwards as applicable Page B13 of B77 b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammaVision immediately This application also creates a Custom Data File which allows custom data parameters to be stored for the analysis See Section B 7 2 31 The following is an example of how this application would be run from an acquisition Job Run C User GVCR GVSampleDataPlus exe C User GVCR Temp 1_GVQuickStart cfg Wait C User GVCR GVSampleDataPlus exe Stop Call C User GVCR Temp 1_SampleDataPlus job Start Run C User GVCR GV_GetCustomData exe with applicable parameters B 7 2
161. e PublishD ate Field Separator E File Name Format fs Figure A 2 3 6 1 PDF Properties Tab The File Name Format is established by adding any of the available field names to the Used File Name Fields list using the arrow buttons or simply double clicking on an item in the Available File Name Fields list Items may be removed from the list in a similar manner Each field may be separated by additional characters such as or _ to make the file name easy to decode or parse The File Name Format field displays the file naming convention consisting of the specified fields and separation characters When using the Date fields the format of the applicable date is YYYY MM DD hhmm NOTE When using the GVPublishSample program described in Section A 3 only the SpectrumID can be used as the filename NOTE Invalid file name characters such as lt gt could be used in several available File Name fields including the sample description user names Sample Type and RType since all of these fields are treated as simple text throughout the application These characters would result in an error preventing the PDF file from being saved so caution should be exercised when using these fields Generally this should not be issue for fields that are predefined by an administrator including the names Sample Type and RType but the Sample Description is less predictable in routine oper
162. e Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes Returned Data XML CSV 2_XXX_S Nuclide Adjustment Factor or Calculated Nuclide Value The flag can be set to as follows A A Mor omitted to define the column content as follows 1 asterisk or backslash Value is calculated as Standard Nuclide Activity times or divided by Adjustment Factor If Standard Nuclide Activity is lt MDA then value is reported as A or A Value is calculated as Standard Nuclide Activity times or divided by Adjustment Factor If Standard Nuclide Activity is lt MDA then the MDA is used in the calculation and the MDA result is included in the column total M or M Value is calculated as Standard MDA times or divided by Adjustment Factor M2 or M2 Value is calculated as Standard MDA2 times or divided by Adjustment Factor IB or IB Value is calculated as ISO NORM Best Activity times or divided by Adjustment Factor IMN or AMN Value is calculated as ISO NORM Minimum Activity times or divided by Adjustment Factor IMX or AMX Value is calculated as ISO NORM Maximum Activity times or divided by Adjustment Factor IMD or AMD Value is calculated as ISO NORM MDA Detection Limit times or divided by Adjustment Factor
163. e GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMethod UnitConversion Page B19 of B77 B 7 2 12 B 7 2 13 B 7 2 14 B 7 2 15 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMethodShow This flag is set to either T true or F false to show or hide the Quantity Calculation Method dropdown list Displaying the list provides maximum flexibility in performing various calculations but this configuration does not provide the structure that is often desired for data input When this configuration is used the labels for the Quantity Calculation Input Multiplier and Divisor fields must be sufficiently generic to apply to all types of calculations Typically this field is hidden and the Quantity Calculation Method is preset for a specific sample type For example an automation Job for Air Filters may use the Flowrate Calculation Method with the labels set similar to those shown in Figure B 7 1 Example GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMethodShow F GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputValue This parameter sets the default value for the Quantity Calculation Input field This field is only used when the Quantity Calculation Method is set to either Flowrate or UnitConversion See B 7 2 11 Example GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputValue 2 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputUnits This parameter sets the default units for the Quantity Calculation Input field This field is only used when the Quan
164. e or Sample Date Time field is hidden then this default time is written to the specified SDF file for analysis If this field is hidden and a default date time is not specified then the current date time is written to the specified SDF file Examples GVSampleDataPlus_CollectionStopTime 2012 06 08 13 25 GVSampleDataPlus_CollectionStopTime 8 9 2012 08 00 GVSampleDataPlus_CollectionStopTime NOW GVSampleDataPlus_CollectionStopTime TODAY GVSampleDataPlus_ShowCollectionStopField This flag is set to either T true or F false to show or hide the Sample Collection Stop Time field respectively If the Sample Collection Stop Time field is hidden then the Sample Collection Start Time field is also hidden automatically If this field is hidden then the default Sample Collection Stop time is passed to the SDF file Both the Sample Collection Start and Stop Time fields must be displayed in order for the Flowrate Quantity Calculation Method to be calculated correctly See B 7 2 11 Example GVSampleDataPlus_ShowCollectionStopField T Page B17 of B77 B 7 2 7 B 7 2 8 B 7 2 9 B 7 2 10 GVSampleDataPlus_Quantity This parameter sets the default analysis quantity The analysis quantity field is also the QuantityCalculationOutput field If a quantity calculation method is specified then this field is disabled and the content is determined by the calculation method Example GVSampleDataPlus_Qua
165. e Editor Figure A 4 7 2 is displayed to allow configuring the QA Points Available Points Det 1 Points The Available Points list displays all of Bkod the QA Points Bkgd or nuclide 04 60 names used as peak identifiers that 04 122 have been previously established for QA 344 cee 04 662 any detector The Detector specified 04 779 QA Points are shown in the list on the 04 1112 right Select the appropriate list item QA 1332 and use the arrow buttons to add or Ne ae remove QA Points in the detector list NOTE If a QA Point with associated Add Edit limits or data is removed then all of E ea the limits and data are also removed Delete Close from the database It is advisable to Archive the database prior to making these changes to prevent the loss of Figure A 4 7 1 1 QA Points Nuclide Editor historical QA data QA Points can be added to the Available Points list using the Add button and existing QA Points may be modified by selecting the Edit button or double clicking on the list item Select an item and then the Delete button to remove a QA Point from the Available Points list QA Points that are currently assigned to any detector cannot be removed from the Available Points list Any changes made are applied to the QA Points list for the selected detector in the QA Limits editor NOTE The Bkgd QA Point is required for Background QA measurements and should not be removed or renamed P
166. e and Group for the current user logged in Close Button to exit application Page A59 of A91 A 4 1 A 4 2 QA Administration Login The Login prompt for the QA and Sample Administration programs are identical and are displayed when the program opens or when the applicable toolbar button is selected If a valid Login User Name and Password is supplied then the User and Group Names will be displayed in the toolbar near the top of the window and permissions associated with the User Group will be enabled If Cancel is selected then the User Name and Group are set to None and no permissions are enabled This allows visitors to view QA data without the ability to make any changes r Global Value User Login User Nome Password ox Cancel Figure A 4 1 1 Login Prompt Note that users and group permissions as well as password changes cannot be modified in the QA Administration program These settings are managed from the Sample Administration program and synchronized to all databases in the Global Value system QA Sample Manager Reports The QA Sample Manager is the main interface for reviewing QA reports similar to the Analysis Editor in Sample Administration It includes a few report filter options a text only representation of the QA report Spectrum Histogram viewer and various print and export options The reports can also be reviewed electronically and published to PDF files with
167. e has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Source File Path required Full path to Source file to be copied 2 Destination File Path required Full path to Destination file to be created The directory where this file will be copied must exist or the copy process will fail Page B70 of B77 B 33 B 34 B 35 GVOpenFile This program opens the file specified using the default program This process is similar to opening a file from Windows Explorer This program is useful for opening files from applications that may change installation path with different versions such as Microsoft Excel or Word GVOpenFile has the following command line parameter 1 Target File Path required Full path to File to be opened using the default program GV_Resetinputs This program is included for backward compatibility for installations that use the legacy reanalysis method It is not used with the reanalysis configurations supplied with this release As described in Section B 22 the non analysis parameters are usually saved with a temporary spectrum ID during the spectrum acquisition phase When the GV_GetRprtData program runs these temporary spectrum IDs are updated to the actual spectrum ID The old reanalysis process operated in the same way as the spectrum acquisition process which required all of the non analysis parameters to be reset to the temporary spectrum ID and the GV_ResetInputs program accomplished this
168. e lists into one comma delimited list with no duplicates This is useful when combining the results of several analyses on a single spreadsheet Argument Notes NuclideList is a comma delimited list of nuclides When combining the results of several analysis results the nuclide lists must be combined before use in this function See Example below Example Spreadsheet formula GVConsolidateNuclideList A4 returns a comprehensive list of all unique nuclide from a comma separated list that has some duplicated names Where Cells A1 and B1 contain the GVNuclideList function described in Formula F11 with two different SpectrumIDs specified Each cell contains a different nuclide list with some common nuclides belonging to each analysis Cell A4 contains the formula A1 8 amp B1 which concatenates the two strings with a comma between them to maintain the required comma delimited format required by the GVConsolidateNuclideList function Page F9 of F21 F13 GVParseList GVParseList List ListID ParseCharacter This function returns an item in a character delimited list based on the number of the item in the list This function is generally used in combination with the Nuclide Lists Nuclide Data Unidentified Peak Lists RWP Lists Radiation Monitor Reading Lists etc to retrieve an individual item from the list Argument Notes List is a character string of items delimited by a common character ListID i
169. e message will be displayed indicating the results of the repair process After repairing the database verify that last operation completed successfully If the database was being Synchronized as described in Section A 2 3 9 from a different database then the Synchronization should be run from the Master source again to ensure that this repaired database received all of the applicable configuration changes If data was being edited for a particular sample then that sample data should be reviewed for completeness and edited as applicable Page A86 of A91 A 10 File Backup NOTE It is important that all Global Value applications are closed on the local computer no remote computers are connected to the local databases and that the process runs to completion to ensure that all files are backed up successfully The process of backing up and purging unneeded files is accomplished by running the File Backup and Purge batch routine An example process is installed with the Default Configuration Files with a shortcut in the Global Value folder which links to the file C User GVCR BackupAndPurge bat This file is a standard DOS batch file with commands to copy all files from a source directory to the specified destination directory and then delete unnecessary files from specified directories This file can be modified using any text editor and personnel experienced with batch file programming can extend the capability of the program Additional c
170. e name of the last analysis report generated in the analysis report directory specified in the specified detector database Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw F6 GVDetectorListCount GVDetectorListCount DatabasePath WorkGroupPath This function returns the number of detectors configured in the Global Value database Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath and WorkGroupPath arguments The database is not detector specific Example Spreadsheet formula GVDetectorListCount A1 A2 returns the number of detectors specified in the specified database Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Page F6 of F21 F7 GVDetector GVDetector DatabasePath WorkGroupPath ListID This function returns the detector description for a specified detector in the Global Value database Argument Notes See Notes 1 amp 2 above for a description of the DatabasePath and WorkGroupPath arguments The database is not detector specific ListID is a unique number that identifies each detector in the database This number is defined by the order that each detector was added to the database Example Spreadsheet formula GVDetector A1 A2 ROW returns the name of the detector listed in the specified database where the ListID is the same value as the ce
171. e row as the NUC_ code Value is right aligned S See _ACT_S format code If Decay Correction is enabled then this value is decay corrected unless the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded If the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded then this value is set to the Time of Count value similar to the GammaVision report content AOUN Page A38 of A91 Report Code Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes Returned Data XML CSV _ ITOC _S ISO NORM Time of Count Activity not decay corrected 1 Must be on the same row as the NUC_ code 2 Value is right aligned 3 S See _ACT_S format code XCVR TXT lt PDF _ IUAC _S ISO NORM Counting Uncertainty in Activity Units 1 Must be on the same row as the NUC_ code Value is right aligned 3 S See _ACT_S format code If Decay Correction is enabled then this value is decay corrected unless the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded If the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded then this value is set to the Time of Count value similar to the GammaVision report content _ IUPC _S ISO NORM Counting Uncertainty in Percent 1 Must be on the same row as the NUC_ code 2 Value is right aligned 3 SH See _ACT_S format code _ IUAT _S ISO NORM Total Uncertainty in Activity Units 1 Must be on the same row as the NUC_ code Value is right aligned 3 SH See _ACT_S format code If Decay Corre
172. e stored all of the temporary records are updated with the final spectrum ID This process requires GV_GetRptData to be called immediately after the spectrum analysis and the other GV_Get programs to be called prior to the analysis When reanalyzing a spectrum the spectrum ID is already known so the process of using a temporary GV_GetRptData has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required The database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector 2 Analysis Number optional The analysis number can be set to one 1 or two 2 If any other value is specified it is treated as one 1 If the analysis number is set to one then any previously stored analysis data for the most recent analysis associated with the specified detector are deleted and the new results are saved The Unidentified Peak list is also saved from the first analysis of a spectrum If the analysis number is set to two then the results from a second analysis of the same spectrum is saved to the database The report image calibration file name dates library file name PBC file name date analysis engine version and nuclide information are saved from the second analysis All other parameters are expected to be identical to the first analysis Duplicate nuclides are not allowed between the first and second analysis therefore different libraries are requir
173. e with a detector configured as ID 1 in GammaVision and DEMO routines are available to demonstrate Page 8 of 30 2 2 2 2 1 the processes using example spectra when no physical detector is configured on the computer This option should not be selected when installing Global Value on subsequent computers at a common site because the appropriate configuration is expected to be copied from a previously established system or backup location and additional configuration files such as Global Configuration Files can result in unexpected behavior when running automation processes from Quick Start j gt Program Compatibility Assistant ua The Default Configuration Support Files are also This program might not have installed correctly located on the installation disk ok nee e Program en Publisher ORTEC Location C Gl GlobalValuelnstallation7 0 0 Distribution exe e If the message shown in Figure 2 1 2 is displayed after the installation has completed Reinstall using recommended settings then select the This program installed correctly gt This program installed correctly option Cancel What settings are applied L 4 Figure 2 1 2 Program Compatibility Initial GammaVision Configuration This section is only required when configuring computers intended for spectrum acquisition and analysis automation processes Computers configured for remote data access i e data review c
174. ecified in Section A 4 7 4 The Countrate and CountrateDiff parameters are applicable only when the Bkgd QA Point is selected i e for Background QA All other parameters are used for Peak QA which requires an associated nuclide name for each peak monitored as discussed in Section A 4 7 1 Different parameters may be established for each QA Point For instance you may want to monitor the Channel and Energy centroid on a low and high energy peak but monitor the Activity or ActivityDiff for several peak energies in between or vice versa 3 Select the Save button to save changes to the parameters for the selected QA Point A prompt will be displayed to save changes if a different Detector ID or QA Point is selected prior to saving changes Page A73 of A91 A 4 7 3 A 4 7 4 QA Parameter Formatting The number format can be specified for each parameter using formatting codes similar to those used by Microsoft Excel and most programming languages These number formats are applied to the values displayed in the QA Limits grid as well as QA reports The number formats are not detector specific Select the Edit Parameter Number Formats button to display the Parameter Format editor shown in Figure A 4 7 3 1 6 2 12 The number format may be specified using standard format codes for fixed decimal or scientific notation or using named formats such as General Fixed Scientific etc Select the Help button to vie
175. ed The Update button must be selected to start the synchronization all of the selected databases If a detector database is not currently available then uncheck the associated detector before the update or the synchronization will be delayed by the network timeout setting while the program attempts a connection If a database cannot be accessed then that item will automatically be unchecked and a message will be displayed temporarily at the bottom of the dialog Corrective action should be taken to ensure that all database remain in synchronization to avoid the potential of synchronizing from an outdated database and losing more recent changes Page A50 of A91 A 3 Sample Publisher Previous versions of Global Value did not include the standard publishing program as this functionality was originally intended for custom development for special applications Based on experience with many custom installations over the years Global Value now provides a default publisher program that satisfies the most common requirements without customization If additional functionality is required the publisher provides the capability to launch other applications after the published files have been rendered to common file structures that are easily processed This approach allows site personnel to develop their own custom applications without having to understand the underlying details associated with extracting information from Global Value databases When samples
176. ed This functionality is intended for Particulate Charcoal air samples analyzed from a single spectrum so that results from both analyses can be displayed on a single report summary For this application the library content is usually identical for both analyses except for the nuclide flags Nuclides flagged as Activity Not in Total are not stored in the Global Value database so this flag can be used to filter out nuclides that are not of interest For example all of the particulate nuclides may have this flag set for the iodine analysis and the iodine nuclides have the flag set for the particulate analysis The primary reasons for using a consistent library structure are to avoid an extensive unidentified peak list in either analysis and to ensure that interference corrections are implemented appropriately for complex analyses There are other applications aside from the Particulate Charcoal air samples example that can benefit from this configuration For example it could be used to determine the activity for two different nuclides from the same peak which is often used as a conservative measure for some applications It can also be used to simplify the analysis of particular nuclides by eliminating interferences in the second analysis library 3 Omit Flag for Half Life Cutoff optional If set to T true then nuclides reported as gt X Halflives in the decayed activity column are not transferred to the Global Value database
177. ed report s OutputType4 PDF OutputEnabled4 T OutputCoverTemplate4 PublishQAMetaDataTemplate OutputIncludeSummary4 T OutputIncludeDetails4 T OutputDirectory4 C User PDF OutputFileExtension4 pdf Run application to process the XML file RunAppPath1 C User GVCR XMLProcessor exe RunAppEnabled1 T RunAppCommandLineParameter1 OutputFilePath 1 Run application to process the CSV file with additional command line parameters RunAppPath2 C User GVCR CSVProcessor exe RunAppEnabled2 T RunAppCommandLineParameter2 DETNO RunAppCommandLineParameter2 SpectrumID RunAppCommandLineParameter2 OutputFileName2 RunAppCommandLineParameter2 OutputFileDirectory2 RunAppCommandLineParameter2 OutputFilePath2 RunAppCommandLineParameter2 TRUE The last parameter is a static flag for some condition or status required by the application Page A81 of A91 A 6 GVQASummary This program provides a QA Status summary for multiple detectors The results are based on the most recent QA Peaks and QA Background measurements and the maximum time span between measurements as set in the configuration file Global Value QA Summary es Last Update Time 24 Aug 2012 15 59 OA Peak Status DA Peak Due BA Background Status QA Background Due 25Aug2012 06 00 24 Aug 2012 00 00 Pass 24 Aug 2012 12 01 Pass 25 Aug 2012 18 01 24 Aug 2012 13 07 Pass 25 Aug 2012 19 07 Figure A 6 1 GVQASummary Each row in the g
178. ed with the following options a Raw Channel Data This method sums the total counts for each channel from all input spectra This method is useful when peak positions for all spectra are well matched and either the Live Time is the same for all spectra or the Sum Acquisition Time option is used b Channel Count Rate This method sums the Live Time corrected count rate for each channel from all input spectra and then divides the total by the effective Live Time to determine the final channel counts This method is useful when peak positions for all spectra are well matched and the Live Times for input spectra are not the same for all spectra c Energy Count Rate This method calculates the Live Time corrected channel count rate for each spectrum based on the fractional energy range represented by the input spectrum channel width to that of the channel width represented in the output spectrum The total channel count rate is then divided by the effective Live Time to determine the final channel counts This method is useful when the Energy Calibration for each input spectrum is expected to be more accurate than the actual peak positions by channel due to gain differences in individual instruments Live Time differences are also taken into account with this method Since each spectrum channel represents the number of events measured within a specified energy range we can calculate the fractional counts from the Input Spectrum channels to the relev
179. efined Sample Types displayed in the list the analyst may also enter any other Sample Types by typing in the dropdown field Re Analysis Flag optional f set to T true then the Sample Type from the previous analysis is used as the default If a Sample Type was previously specified then the prompt is not displayed If a Sample Type was not previously specified then the prompt is displayed requiring analyst input Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty so the automation process is unaffected b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammavVision immediately Page B57 of B77 B 14 GV_GetSiteUnit Global Value Site Unit Entry B 15 This program sets the Site Unit for the sample GV_GetSiteUnit has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 2 3 Site Unit Unit 1 X Full Path to Detector Samples Database required The database path is defined on the Detectors tab in A Sample Administration Configuration for each detector Figure B 14 1 GV_GetSiteUnit Prompt Site Unit optional Any text may be specified for the site unit If this p
180. en using the GammaVision Directed Fit option which could generate negative activity 4 Totals are aligned and formatted based on parameter format codes in the nuclide table 5 Must be on a row after the NUC_ code normally immediately after the nuclide table Nuclide Parameters for XML and CSV files Format 0 0000E 00 See related parameters in the previous table for more detail PUBNUCACT Standard Nuclide Activity normally decay corrected XX PUBNUCAU Activity Units X X PUBNUCBADSHAPE TRUE or FALSE depending on Bad Shape Flag status X X IPUBNUCDC Decay Correction See _DC_S above for calculation X X PUBNUCEDITED TRUE or FALSE depending on Edit status XX PUBNUCEHL Elapsed Half Lives See _EHL_S above for calculation X X PUBNUCFLAG Returns lt if activity reported as lt MDA value otherwise blank XX PUBNUCHL Half Life days X X PUBNUCMDA Standard Nuclide MDA XX PUBNUCMDA2 Standard Nuclide MDA2 X X PUBNUCNAME Nuclide Name XX PUBNUCTOCACT Standard Nuclide Time of Count Activity not decay corrected X X PUBNUCUNCT Standard Nuclide Reported Uncertainty X X Data is based on the standard GammaVision report uncertainty as set in the Analysis Options i e or Activity units for Total or Counting Uncertainty PUBNUCUNCTAC Standard Nuclide Counting Uncertainty in Activity Units X X PUBNUCUNCTAT Standard Nuclide Total Uncertainty in Activity Units XX PUBNUCIDEC ISO N
181. enuation or Geometry can also be applied based on the analysis settings but PBC is mentioned here because Global Value normally manages the generation of these files as described in Section 3 2 The following output files files are created by the analysis engine e Spectrum An1 This file contains all of the original spectrum data plus the analysis settings and calibration data used for analysis e Analysis Report RPT This file is an ASCII text report that displays most of the information available in the UFO file in a readable form The format depends on the reporting options and engine used for the analysis as described in the GammaVision manual e Unformatted Output file UFO This file contains the analysis results including peak and nuclide information in a binary format and is used to create PBC files and display analysis results in GammaVision and GVPlots GammaVision automation is accomplished using simple text files called Jobs with commands that allow users to automate many of the menu functions and run external programs These Jobs provide a structured process for consistent and reliable analysis results by limiting the decisions required by the analyst at the time of measurement For example most analysis parameters can be pre configured for a particular measurement by an administrator such that the analyst only has to enter information that changes with each sample like the sample size collection time etc When us
182. eport Path C User Network Report Path C Users Publish Report Path C User Publish Job File Path C UserJobiDerdt fa aa Fields must be unique for each detector Detector GA Settings QA Database C User GVCR Databases GlobalV alueQA mdb a Figure A 2 3 2 1 Detectors Tab The following is an explanation of each field e Detector Description This description is displayed in drop down selectors on various Global Value screens such as the Quick Start program Analysis Editor and the Sample Log which uses the Excel Add In e Detector Number This number should be the same as the detector number established when MCB Configuration is run during the initial instrument setup with GammavVision This value is critical for QA measurements and automation Job processes e File Prefix If analysis reports from more than one detector are generated by GammaVision in the same directory then the File Prefix is required During the automation Job process the program GV_GetRptData is run to load analysis results from the GammaVision files This program searches for the most recent analysis report in a specified directory to get the necessary information If each detector sends its analysis reports to a separate directory then this process is very efficient and a File Prefix is not required However if several detectors send reports to the same directory at the same time then it would be possible for
183. eport on the default printer GVQACheckStatus This program checks the most recent QA Peak and Background results and displays a prompt similar to that shown in Figure B 29 1 if any parameters were outside the specified limits The View QA Reports button can be selected to show the last QA Peak and Background reports This program would normally be called as one of the first few functions in an automated analysis routine requiring spectrum acquisition i ORTEC 2 QA Failure Notification QA Point Parameter Minimum Low Target Measured High Maximum Result QA 662 FWHM 1 40 1 60 1 70 Low00T OOT a 0 00 0 00 5 00 10 00 100 00 Bkgd Countrate High OOT View GA Reports Continue Counting Sample Abort Count Figure B 29 1 GVQACheckStatus Failure Notification Page B67 of B77 B 30 GVQACheckStatus has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Detector ID required This is the Detector number specified in the MCB Configuration which is also the Detector ID specified in Sample Administration Configuration on the Detectors tab 2 Full Path to the QA Database required The QA database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector 3 Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally
184. er of the chart when this option is checked c Black and White The Control and Tolerance limits are displayed in black and white with the Control line in Dashes and the Tolerance line in dots when this option is checked This mode is useful when printing to non color printers where the grayscale of the limit lines may not produce clear charts d AutoScale Y Axis When this option is not checked the QA chart is centered around the QA Control limits In this condition it may not be possible to see points that fall outside of the established limits When this option is checked the Y Axis will be scaled to show all data In this condition a single outlier may cause the rest of the chart data to appear very compressed Export to Excel When this button is selected the currently displayed QA data will be exported to Microsoft Excel A statistics summary page is generated along with several charts which can be used to evaluate the data The statistics are generated using standard Excel functions Refer to Microsoft Excel s Help for an explanation of each function used in the statistics summary All worksheets and charts are unprotected to allow changes to these functions either manually or automated through macros to meet site specific needs Note that changes to QA data in the worksheets do not affect any data stored in the QA database This allows bad data points or outliers to be removed from the data set in Excel to calculate new limits while
185. erTemplate parameter The IncludeSummary and IncludeDetails parameters are ignored for these Output Types When set to PDF or TXT the report content is based on the OutputCoverTemplate OutputIncludeSummary and OutputincludeDetails parameters any of which can be omitted PDF reports will use the same security rules passwords as established in Sample Administration Configuration on the PDF Properties tab Multiple reports can be generated with different content by using the unique character identifier X as shown in Section A 3 1 e OutputEnabled This parameter is set to T true to enable the specified report output Anything other than T will disable the report output This parameter allows output configurations to be established for Page A52 of A91 testing or other temporary conditions without removing the complete set of parameters from the file OutputCoverTemplate The OutputCoverTemplate is a report template appropriate for the output type specified This parameter can be the full path to a text file or the name of a Report Template established in the Sample Administration Configuration Normally the latter option would be used as it provides security for the template content For PDF and TXT output types this parameter is optional If a template is specified then it is processed in the same way as the Summary Reports in Sample Administration Configuration and is used as the first section of the report
186. ers in this section are required in the configuration file specified on the command line for this program Any other text in the configuration file is ignored to allow comments or other parameters to be included without affecting the application Any valid variables may be used for setting the configuration file parameters in the Global Value Quick Start process as well Typically this would include parameters defined in the Global or Job Configuration Files or those generated by GlobalValueQuickStart when an automation process is initiated This is normally accomplished in the automation Job by making a copy of GVQuickStart cfg or GVQuickStartReanalysis cfg using GVCopyFile The following is an example Job excerpt that would be run prior to GVSampleDataSC Run C User GVCR GVCopyFile exe C User GVCR GVQuickStart cfg C User GVCR Temp 1_SampleDataSCData txt Wait C User GVCR GVCopyFile exe The file path C User GVCR Temp 1_SampleDataSCData txt is passed to GVSampleDataSC as a command line argument as shown in section B 8 1 Page B30 of B77 Configuration File Parameter List The following parameters must be defined in the configuration file passed to the application Each parameter is defined in detailed in the remainder of this section Section Parameter Name B 8 2 1 GVSampleDataSC_MultipleSamples B 8 2 2 GVSampleDataSC_DETNO B 8 2 3 GVSampleDataSC_DETSPECTRUMPREFIX B 8 2 4 GVSampleDataSC_AnalysisMethodFilePath B
187. es from a Master Source certificate file to quickly generate new tables based on the quantity or fraction of source material used in each geometry See Section A 13 The GVSpectrumMux program enables spectrum summing capability with several options including changing the conversion gain and calibration parameters See Section B 35 The Excel Add In provides the functions to retrieve any of the sample data stored in the Global Value databases as well as various configuration parameters such as nuclide adjustment factors and detector file paths These functions can be used to populate worksheet cells similar to the standard Excel functions like AVERAGE or SUM allowing complex post analysis calculations to be automated These functions can also be used in VBA code to allow fully automated processing scripts similar to those used for the Analysis Log See Appendix F Page 17 of 30 3 3 Global Value Interface Overview Global Value Apps Menu gt Analysis Log gt ane ast Update Tene B72472012 16 46 47 Database Utility Rea ES ne Br2Ar2012 16 47 06 i p me 8242012 1651 47 Detector Monitor ee Tis EPA Last Update Time REE QA Menu QA Summary Giobai Value Quick Start a Value Quick Start Detector Selection Court Sample Reansyze Spectrum _Analyze Eang Spectrum as New Dala GammaVision Automation Jobs Set_Detector 1 7 Sample Administration Stop O co coo nr o tome Clear OTAN Start a e
188. es conversion factors to convert from the standard activity units set in the SDF file to those specified The default file content includes conversion factors from standard units of Becquerel Bq Example GVSampleDataSC_ActivityUnitsFilePath CONFIGDIR GVSampleDataSC_ActivityUnits txt The file contains comma delimited parameters as follows Unit Conversion Factor Data starts after the asterisk line kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Ci 3 7E 10 Bq 1 DPM 0 01666667 Any text can precede the asterisk line but the asterisk line must exist as it signals the start of the parameters to be read The units use conversion factors from Bq This conversion factor is written to the SDF file Activity Units Divisor field as part of the automation Job process as described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 3 Page B40 of B77 B 8 2 15 B 8 2 16 GVSampleDataSC_SampleSizeUnitsFilePath This parameter specifies the full path to a text file that defines the valid units that are used to populate the Sample Quantity Units dropdown list Note that the user can also enter units that are not included this list Example GVSampleDataSC_SampleSizeUnitsFilePath CONFIGDIR GVSampleDataSC_SampleSizeUnits txt The file format is as follows Data starts after the asterisk line kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk g mg Kg ml
189. espective item will be removed from the Active Jobs list If the Show Remote Jobs option is selected then any detectors in the pick list that are currently running automation Jobs from a different computer are also displayed in the Active Jobs list When the Active Jobs list is updated the program also checks the most recent Peak and Background QA results If any parameters failed outside the tolerance limits for the selected detector then the Detector and Automation Jobs fields will turn yellow If any parameters failed outside the control limits then the Detector and Automation Jobs fields will turn red In either condition a message will also be displayed in the status bar indicating which type of QA failed This check is also applied when the detector selection is changed so the user is immediately notified of the QA status This indication is intended solely as a warning to the user The Quick Start program will not prevent the user from counting samples under this condition however the GVQACheckStatus program Section B 29 can be configured to prevent counting samples as part of the automation routine if desired The Quick Start program will allow one automation Job to run for creating new Sample records acquisition or load spectrum processes and for updating existing Sample records reanalysis simultaneously A message indicating that an Acquisition or Reanalysis Job is already running will be displayed in the status bar if an Automation Job
190. ess database capable of receiving results from multiple detectors See Section A 12 for more detail related to GVDataExport After the publisher has generated the required reports and launched the specified programs the original PDF file created by the Sample Administration Analysis Editor is deleted to avoid a large number of unnecessary files accumulating on the local workstation GVPublishSample has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Full Path to PDF Report required The PDF file name must match the spectrum ID and the file prefix must be in the format DETNO_ where DETNO is the detector number This is the default configuration for new installations 2 Full Path to Configuration File optional This optional configuration file may be specified when using the publisher program outside of the routine publishing process This may be useful for generating CSV or XML reports and or processing the data dynamically within automation Jobs When this file is omitted such as when publishing results from the Analysis Editor the default configuration file GVPublishSample ini in the Global Value installation directory is used Page A51 of A91 A 3 1 Configuration File Content The Configuration file consists of a series of parameters that are used for generating various file types and running applications These parameters are enclosed in pipe characters similar to those used with the Quick Start and GVSamp
191. etc Page A13 of A91 5 Save Button This button is only enabled if the Current User belongs to a Group that has permission to Edit Data and the record has not been locked i e Reviewed or Published When selected any changes made on the tabbed sections Sample Data Nuclide Data Unidentified Peaks and Custom Data are saved in the database Any changes are reflected in the Change Summary tab and the Report Summary content is updated The Editors name is also changed to the name of the Current User as the data owner if the Separate Editor and Analyst option is selected on the Misc tab in Configuration Management See Section A 2 3 7 Review Button This button is only enabled if the Current User belongs to a Group that has permission to Review Data When selected the custom report summary is refreshed based on the specified report template such that the Reviewer name and date will be displayed on the final report if these parameters are used on the template If changes are made on the Sample tabbed sections prior to selecting the Review button then a prompt will be displayed to save changes prior to applying the Review signature If changes are saved at this point then the Editor name is changed to the current user similar to selecting the Save button If changes are not saved then all changes are discarded prior to applying the review signature and refreshing the custom report After the Review signature has been applied all of t
192. ext Update Time 4 14 2014 17 42 49 Last Update Time 4 14 2014 17 37 49 Update Interval 5 min Current Time 4 14 2014 17 38 44 Detector Status HY Setting Real Time Live Time Dead Time Acq Start Time Est Acq Stop Time Figure A 8 1 GVDetectorMonitor Each row in the grid is color coded depending on the High Voltage and acquisition condition as follows Red HV Off and Acquiring data Yellow HV Off and Not Acquiring data Cyan HV On and Acquiring data Green HV On and Not Acquiring data Note This program is not accurate for instruments that do not report the HV status as it is always displayed as if it was off Page A85 of A91 A 9 Database Utility This program enables users to reset certain process flags or repair a database that has become corrupted 49 Global Value Database Utility ic UserX GVCRAD atabases Global alue11 mdb Repair Selected Database Clear Acquisition Job Running Flag Clear Reanalysis Job Running Flag Figure A 9 1 GVDatabaseUtility Process Flags The process flags are set when Global Value initiates automation Jobs from the Quick Start program so that the programs can determine if an automation routine is running from a different location If the flag is set and a user from a different computer tries to start an automation routine for the same detector using GVQuickStart then a message is displayed indicating that the system is
193. f A91 A 13 EFT Convert This program generates geometry specific Efficiency tables from a Master Source Certificate GammaVision Efficiency Table using the interface shown in Figure A 13 1 This is an efficient way to quickly generate efficiency tables for calibration when labs create sources for various geometries from a known standard such as a liquid vial gt Global Yalue Certificate File Conversion Utility 0 x Master Certificate File JE AUsersEfficiencyT ables 66873 11 eft we New Certificate File C UserEfficiencyT ables 66873 11 Newl eft mj Adjustment Factor 2 cnet Figure A 13 1 GVEFTConvert To create a new Efficiency Table from a Master certificate perform the following 1 Browse to the Master Certificate File by clicking on the button next to this field 2 Specify the full path for the New Certificate File by typing directly in this field or using the browse button 3 Enter an Adjustment Factor to scale the activity values specified in the Master Certificate to the amount contained in the prepared geometry This could be a quantity based on volume or weight if the master source certificate contains activity per volume or weight or a fractional value if the master source certificate contains total activity for the source material 4 Select the OK button to generate the new Efficiency Table All Gammas Per Second and Activity values in the Master file are multiplied by the Adjustment Factor when creating t
194. figuration Page A83 of A91 Set the database and workgroup paths to establish a connection to a Global Value database that contains Sample results Note that this log will not query the QA database The max records field has a maximum value of 2000 This parameter limits the number of records that will be returned if the date ranges specified on the Analysis Log result in a very large number of samples The default max report date can be either Today or None If Today is selected then the current date is set in the lt Report Date filter field when the workbook is opened The gt Report Date filter field is automatically set to the lt Report Date field minus the Default Previous Days Criteria value Select the Configure Field Properties button to specify which fields and data formats will be displayed on the Analysis Log using the form shown in Figure A 7 3 After querying the selected detectors based on the specified date criteria use the AutoFilter dropdowns at the top of each column to further refine the search criteria based on values set in these fields Analysis Log Field Properties xj Field Name Field Label i Alignment Field Format Width SampleDescription SampleDescription Yes Left Text 35 ReportDate ReportDate Yes Center DD MMM YYYY hh mm 15 AcquisitionStart AcquisitionStart Yes Center MM DD YYYY hh ren 15 CollectionStart CollectionStart Yes Center MM DD YYYY hh mm 15 CollectionStop CollectionStop
195. fix each parameter has a property name followed by a unique character identifier This unique identifier is a single character that is used to group the Output and RunApp properties as well as link the Output file to the RunApp parameters This identifier can be any alphanumeric character thereby providing up to thirty six 36 different Output and RunApp scenarios in the same file The following shows the complete list of Output and RunApp parameters which are discussed in more detail in the remainder of this section OutputTypeX OutputEnabledX OutputCoverTemplateX OutputIncludeSummaryX OutputIncludeDetailsX OutputDirectory X OutputFileExtensionX RunAppPathX RunAppEnabledX RunAppCommandLineParameterX Where X Single character unique identifier 0 9 A Z not case sensitive A 5 1 1 OutputType The OutputType can be set to PDF TXT XML or CSV When set to XML or CSV an appropriate XML or CSV template must be specified for the OutputCoverTemplate parameter The IncludeSummary and IncludeDetails parameters are ignored for these Output Types When set to PDF or TXT the report content is based on the CoverTemplate IncludeSummary and IncludeDetails parameters any of which can be omitted PDF reports will use the same security rules passwords as established in QA Administration PDF Properties Multiple reports can be generated with different content by using the unique character identifier A 5 1 2 O
196. for XML and CSV output types When set to T true the QA Report stored for the sample is included in the PDF or TXT report that is generated OutputincludeDetails This parameter is used only for the PDF and TXT output types It is ignored for XML and CSV output types When set to T true the Detailed Report stored for the sample is included in the PDF or TXT report that is generated OutputDirectory A valid directory or folder path must be specified to indicate where the rendered file will be stored The file name will be the same as the original PDF file name also same as Spectrum ID with the file extension described in Section A 5 1 7 OutputFileExtension This parameter defaults to the Output type PDF TXT XML or CSV if no extension is specified Other extensions may be assigned as necessary RunAppPath This parameter requires the full path to an application to be run Command line parameters may be assigned as described below RunAppEnabled This parameter is set to T true to enable the specified application Anything other than T will not allow the application to run This parameter allows configurations to be established for testing or other temporary conditions without removing the complete set of parameters RunAppCommandLineParameter Multiple Command Line parameters can be specified for the application If more than one is provided then they will be comma delimited in the order in whi
197. ght aligned 3 SH See _ACT_S format code Calculated as DC DTA x DDC x DDA Where See GammaVision manual for calculations DTA Decay to Acquisition DDC Decay During Collection DDA Decay During Acquisition NOTE This is the overall decay correction The Time of Count activity generated in GammaVision has the DDC and DDA corrections applied so this value cannot be directly derived by the difference between the Time of Count and Decayed activities EHL_S Elapsed Half Lives EHL 1 Must be on the same row as the NUC_ code 2 Value is right aligned 3 SH See _ACT_S format code 4 Calculated as EHL Ln DC Ln 2 If too many half lives have elapsed then this calculation may result in an error in the Ln DC function If this occurs then the following calculation is used instead EHL Acquisition Start Collection End Half Life Page A37 of A91 Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes Corus gt Report Code Returned Data Z Q A _F_ Nuclide Summary Peak Flags typically used with Standard Nuclide X X X Data E Displayed if any of the nuclide information has been changed in the Analysis Editor Displayed if the Bad Shape flag was displayed on the original GammavVision report A Displayed if the decayed activity is less than the MDA value B Displayed if the decayed activity is less than the MDA2 normally critica
198. guration File Path GVSampleDataSC B 8 Configuration File Path GVGetConfiguration B 12 JOBPATH Calibration File Prefix Calibration File Directory Library File Directory Default Geometry Default Library Reanalysis Flag Reanalysis Data File Path GV_GetCustomData B 21 DETDBPATH Data Source File Path Append Data Flag Reanalysis Flag 1 Excel File Path 0 JOBPATH 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 Page C3 of C4 Automation Job Programs for Sample Measurements continued Program Section Command Line Parameters GV_GetRType B 13 DETDBPATH Sample Type Reanalysis Flag JOBPATH GV_GetSiteUnit B 14 DETDBPATH Site Unit Reanalysis Flag JOBPATH GV_GetBatch B 15 DETDBPATH Batch Description Reanalysis Flag JOBPATH GV_GetComment B 16 DETDBPATH Default Comment JOBPATH GV_GetGDT Pressure B 17 DETDBPATH Reanalysis Flag JOBPATH GV_GetSamplePump B 18 DETDBPATH Reanalysis Flag JOBPATH GV_GetRWP B 19 DETDBPATH Reanalysis Flag JOBPATH GV_GetRadMon B 20 DETDBPATH Reanalysis Flag 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 Reanalysis Flag 4 1 2 3 1 2
199. gure B 16 1 GV_GetComment Prompt detector Pre defined Comments optional The pre defined comments provide a method of generating a custom prompt for specific comments The analyst is not required to add additional comments and is allowed to change the pre defined text if desired Line breaks can be forced in the Pre defined comments by using the pipe character For example a pre defined comment of Name Company would show Name and Company on separate lines The pre defined comments are ignored in re analysis mode Re Analysis Flag optional f set to T true then the Comments from the previous analysis are used as the default Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty so the automation process is unaffected b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammaVision immediately GV_GetGDTPressure This program sets the Gas Decay Tank pressure for the Global Value GDT Pressure Entry sample This parameter is normally used to calculate Total Equivalent Xenon activity A default entry can be specified in Sample Administration Configuration on the GDT Pressure
200. h that only the ISO NORM data is displayed if desired The Standard Nuclide Time of Count TOC field can also be optionally hidden or displayed by an option set on the Misc tab in the Configuration Manager This field is typically hidden for applications where there is no particular interest in the Time of Count activity when decay is applied or when decay correction is not used Analysis Report Sample Data Nuclide Data Unidentified Peaks Custom Data Change Summary Analysis Ro po la fa fae fee fae fo fee foe fee fo fo fe F Show ISO NORM Counting Total Activity TOC Activity Uncertainty Uncertainty Nuclide uCi ec uCitco uCitec uCi cc MDA2 Cs 134 1 1520E 08 1 1520E 08 6 6603E 00 3 5714E 10 7 6728E 10 5 6065E 10 2 7652E 10 No Cs 137 3 2277E 07 3 2277E 07 5 9385E 00 2 1538E 09 1 9168E 08 7 8936E 10 3 9005E 10 No Co 57 3 9280E 09 3 9280E 09 1 3030E 01 4 4396E 10 5 1182E 10 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 No Co 58 5 1182E 08 5 1181E 08 6 1549E 00 8 7151E 10 3 1502E 09 3 7484E 10 1 8298E 10 No Co 60 1 4363E 08 1 4363E 08 6 3473E 00 3 6809E 10 9 1165E 10 1 4876E 10 6 8519E 11 No Mn 54 3 9274E 10 3 9274E 10 4 3314E 01 1 6852E 10 1 7011E 10 2 2493E 10 1 0797E 10 No Ag 110m 3 2986E 09 3 2986E 09 1 2442E 01 3 6134E 10 4 1042E 10 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 No b 125 2 6834E 08 2 6834E 08 8 3025 00 1 5488E 09 2 2279E 09 0 0000E 00 0 0000E 00 No Fe 59 lt 4 1668E 10 lt 4 1667E 10 0 0000E 00 2 4162
201. haracters i e use only the first line in the GammaVision Calibration Description dialog box Calibration File Name Path 255 characters A practical limitation for proper display on custom report summaries is 64 characters in the file name Library 100 characters max A practical limitation for proper display on custom report summaries is 64 characters in the file name Note that GammaVision has an additional limitation of 32 characters for the full path length when using Jobs The library will still be used for analysis if the path is longer but the path is not displayed correctly on the analysis report and the default library may not be set in the Global Value prompts when reanalyzing a spectrum Custom Report Template Report Template names in Configuration Management are limited to 50 Characters Group and User Names 20 Characters max PDF Passwords 50 Characters max Sample Type R Type 20 characters max RWP 20 characters max prefix and suffix combined Suffix max is 6 characters Rad Monitor ID 10 characters max Rad Monitor Reading Numeric Air Sampler ID 25 characters max GDT Pressure Numeric Site Unit 50 characters max Batch ID 50 characters max Comments 64 000 characters max Page D1 of D2 Field Parameter Limitations Unidentified Peak Resolution 25 characters max Nuclide QA Peak Name 10 characters
202. hat employs the Excel Add In functions to provide advanced data filtering and report accessibility The main worksheet in the Analysis Log contains the controls shown in Figure A 7 1 This interface allows the user to select an individual detector or All Detectors from the dropdrown selector specify dates for various fields and query the detector database for the associated analysis results by selecting the Update Sample Log button The list of samples and related data will automatically populate the worksheet eae e Cancel Update Configuration Filter Criteria gt Report Date 01 Jan 2007 00 00 ShowReport lt Report Date 01 Feb 2007 00 00 gt Acquistion Date lt Acquistion Date M gt Sample Collection Start Date o m lt Sample Collection Start Date gt Sample Date lt Sample Date Figure A 7 1 Analysis Log Controls Before using the Analysis Log it must be properly configured with a valid database and the appropriate fields enabled This is accomplished by selecting the Configuration button After entering the password at the login prompt the form shown in Figure A 7 2 is displayed The default password is pwd Analysis Log Configuration E x Default Database Path C UserG CR GlobalValue1 mdb OO EEE Max Records per Detector f coq Max 2000 Default Max Report Date Today y Default Previous Days Criteria Fa Configure Field Properties Save Close Figure A 7 2Analysis Log Con
203. hat the correct file is used here Run GV_GetCustomData exe GlobalValuel mdb 1 GVSampleData CustomDataReanalysis txt T T C User GVCR TEMP 1 AbortReanalysis Job Analyze the spectrum load the analysis data to the database generate the custom report and print the results as applicable In Step 5 the GVSampleData program is run with key command line parameters that specify its behavior In this case it is passed the SDF file helper Job file Excel file Re analysis data file and a flag indicating that it will run in the Re analysis mode See comma delimited command line parameters in Section B 6 The following process is implemented when GVSampleData is run 1 2 Since a path to an Excel file is passed to the program this file is automatically opened When the Excel file is opened the VBA code in the sub routine Workbook_Activate fires The following is a brief snippet of this sub routine to highlight the main process Details are omitted for simplicity Refer to the VBA code in the AirVolumeCalc xls file for full details Private Sub Workbook Activate Determine if any code should be run based on flag setting This prevents the code from running when data is read from the GlobalValue worksheet after the file has been closed by the user If Not Sheets Main Range DataSavedFlag TRUE Then If the file contains the word Reanalysis then read the Reanalysis Data File with the same file prefix as th
204. he new file None of the other information from the Master file is modified Page A91 of A91 Appendix B Automation Job Program Reference Table of Content GVSetUser amp GV OQASeIUS6l sic ic ieee ia ee B2 MCV G le AD Nea avec csc eed ace ee natch weet ce tica cuss cas eucea ma cawanaie scutes unas keaueeseaeteel chemies teu cueresvaanea anne B3 GV RE CAlIS PO CRU oscar cede B3 GV Dead Time CROCK i n B4 GV Tim rC ON trol ici aan icao oia see B5 GVSampleDal ui ii oe tesla ii it B6 GV Sati le Dat PMS sascha ae we chs een eet nce een B13 GVSalriple Data SG ie a a B27 VS DE Dat ect can B54 GVS tSDFPar ametet aai eninin ias B55 A A B55 GTC nT AEN Os ais asa cect Sea ese eee eee accent B56 GV GTR Ty ie arose oa as oc cas acc O rencias B57 GV GUS Nai cae B58 GV Get A a E B58 e AAA A ued eteltars B59 ee A o A A B59 GV GEES amplePUMO Ln a ee oie da ai dla B60 GV ERY Pca E B60 GV GetR d MON orinal a a aaan Ea Aaa ENEO Ee aae RRA Ana narnia recia B61 GV GOiCuUStomMData A E A T E E B61 PER BLE ot cto 18 gt soon E ci B63 GVincrementCo nter ai cach sas ss dae sacesec ii A A toed tad desde B64 EV Custom Roland dai B64 PIDE Aplicar RT a chavs A Ar Rs B65 Gross GAMMA ic B66 E AP e P A E B66 GVOAB3CKgGLOUNO aa o teh do o an ee B67 VGA CHECKS EAI S iia B67 U TO TORDERA ricas B68 GIVITOM Plate MAS tC liste ssa tect ers tes B69 GV COPY File r foe AP cures EAE e a AE AEEA reae EE rano seven inecaceeeeteanaeenece B70 GVODEn
205. he Flowrate Flowrate Units and Collection Efficiency fields are displayed and populated with the default parameters specified in this section When set to No the Flowrate and Flowrate Units fields are hidden and not used for Analysis Quantity calculations Flowrate The default flowrate is set to zero if the default value is blank less than zero or non numeric This field is ignored if the Use Flowrate parameter is set to No Flowrate Units The default Flowrate units must match one of those defined in the Flow Units File See Section B 8 2 16 If omitted then no default selection is made in the Flow Units dropdown list Collection Efficiency If the Collection Efficiency value is greater than zero or the Use Flowrate parameter is set to Yes then the Collection Efficiency field is displayed and populated with the default value If the Collection Efficiency is not specified and the Flowrate calculation is not implemented then this field is hidden and not used in the Analysis Quantity calculation SampleComment This parameter sets the default text for the Sample Comment field Page B35 of B77 B 8 2 4 20 Sample Description B 8 2 4 21 This parameter sets the default Sample Description or the Full Path to a text file with a list of Sample Descriptions To display a dropdown list of sample descriptions use the syntax FILE FILEPATH where FILEPATH is the full path to a text file with a list of
206. he activity value is returned for nuclides with activity lt MDA as well as nuclides with detectable activity If IncludeMDA is omitted or FALSE then the activity value is only returned for nuclides not flagged as lt MDA in the database Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumID arguments The database is detector specific Nuclide is the exact nuclide name listed in the database IncludeMDA is a Boolean TRUE FALSE that determines if the activity value will be returned for nuclides with activity lt MDA Example Spreadsheet formula GVNuclideActivity A1 A2 A3 A4 FALSE returns the nuclide activity for the associated SpectrumID and Nuclide if the activity is NOT reported as lt MDA Otherwise zero is returned Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database Cell A4 contains the nuclide name F16 GVNuclideFactor GVNuclideFactor DatabasePath WorkGroupPath Nuclide AdjustmentTable This function returns the nuclide adjustment factor value associated with the specified Table Nuclide Adjustment tables are setup and modified using the Global Value Configuration Editor Argument Notes See Notes 1 amp 2 above for a description of the DatabasePath and WorkGroupPath arguments The database is not detector specific Nuclide
207. he fields on the tabbed sections are locked to prevent further changes Review All Button This button is only enabled if the Current User belongs to a Group that has permission to Review Data When selected the review process described for the Review Button is applied to every spectrum in the Spectrum List UnReview Button This button is only enabled if the Current User belongs to a Group that has permission to Review Data When selected the Reviewer and Publisher signatures are removed and the custom report is refreshed to remove the same signatures and dates The fields on the tabbed sections are also unlocked to allow changes based on the current user s group permissions Publish Button This button is only enabled if the Current User belongs to a Group that has permission to Publish Data When selected the custom report summary is refreshed based on the specified report template such that the Publisher name and date will be displayed on the final report if these parameters are used on the template The Report Summary and Report Details are then saved to a PDF file in the detector specific Publish Report Path directory as established on the Detectors tab in the Configuration Manager See Section A 2 3 2 The file name and any password protection are determined by settings on the PDF Properties tab in the Configuration Manager See Section A 2 3 6 If the publisher name already exists then a prompt to publish the report again will
208. headings This record is ignored when the file is read by GVSampleDataSC so any meaningful descriptions may be used The default header descriptions are similar to the following AnalysisMethod SDFFileName Geometry Library Quantity QuantityUnits ActivityUnits LiveTime ReportTemplate SampleType Different Start StopTimes DefaultSampleDateTime UseDilution DilutionFactor UseFlowrate Flowrate FlowrateUnits CollectionEfficiency SampleComment SampleDescription ContinueCommand Example GVSampleDataSC_AnalysisMethodPath CONFIGDIR GVSampleDataSC_Methods csv where CONFIGDIR is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files This parameter is normally set in the Global Configuration Files As described in Section B 8 1 several parameters are set to default values when the Analysis Method is selected on the GVSampleDataSC interface These parameters are described in the remainder of this section Analysis Method These method names are displayed in the Analysis Method dropdown list on the GVSampleDataSC interface The method names must be unique therefore empty records rows are not allowed in this file SDF File Name The SDF File Name excludes the directory path and file extension This file name is used to set the GVSampleDataSCOut_SDFDATAFILEPATH parameter See Section B 8 3 17 with the SDF path defined as SDFDIR SDFFileName sdf whe
209. hen selecting an available field from the dropdown list Custom field parameters are included in the dropdown list in addition to the default parameters When a field name is changed the Field Label is automatically set to the Field Name but it can be changed to reflect a more meaningful label if desired The remaining fields specify if the field is displayed data alignment and format and column width NOTE Depending on the version of Microsoft Excel installed on your system some functionality of the standard Sample Logs may not be available The AutoFilter features for instance are only enabled with protected worksheets in Excel 2002 and later With earlier versions it may be necessary to unprotect the worksheet or use VBA code to customize the workbook in order to achieve similar functionality To view an image of the analysis report associated with a particular spectrum simply double click anywhere on the applicable row or select any cell on that row and click on the Show Report button The Report Summary and or Detailed Reports will be displayed depending on the options selected by the Show Report button GVDetectorMonitor This program shows the status of each detector configured with ORTEC CONNECTIONS on the local computer including the HV and Acquisition status HV setting Real Live and Dead Time Acquisition Start Time and Estimated Acquisition Stop Time as shown in Figure A 8 1 r o Global Value Detector Monitor N
210. hould be copied the file 0_SiteSpecific cfg so that specific changes to global configuration parameters are more easily identified Note that setting global parameters in this file overrides those in the other global configuration files The most complex Global Configuration file is 4_GlobalValueFunctions cfg which defines all of the RUN parameters used throughout the Job Templates This file should not be modified to avoid the potential for adverse impact on all automation processes GVSampleData and GVSampleDataPlus program interfaces When using the GVSampleData and GVSampleDataPlus program interfaces for sample measurements most of the process changes are managed by changing settings in the Job Configuration files These files contain a series of parameters that are logically named for the command program or function with which they are linked For example the following parameters can be found in a Job Configuration file used with the GVSampleData program interface GVGetSampleData_SampleDescription FILE CONFIGDIR DescriptionsList_Examples txt GVGetSampleData_DecayDate Now GVGetSampleData_Quantity 1 GVGetSampleData_QuantityUnits ml GVGetSampleData_QuantityUnitsEnabled F GVGetSampleData_LiveTime 1000 The prefix for each parameter is common to the program and the suffix is associated with the command line arguments as described for each program in Appendix A and B Additional parameters may be specified in the Global C
211. ier tti SS S Sample Type fame o Location Loain 20 202 0 0 0 02027 Purpose Pups sti SC S Contact Name Contae Contact Phone Number 11 2223388 o Continue Cancel Figure B 8 1 GVSampleDataSC for Multiple Samples GVSampleDataSC has the following command line parameter 1 Full Path to Configuration File required The configuration file must contain the parameters described in section B 8 2 This file should be unique to ensure that it is not overwritten by other processes prior to use Page B27 of B77 B 8 1 GVSampleDataSC Operation B 8 1 1 Implementation GVSampleDataSC is run from within GammaVision automation Jobs to allow Sample Data to be captured for one or more samples depending on the mode When the Continue button is selected the following processes occur 1 If the Multiple Samples option is disabled then the sample data displayed is stored as the only sample in the hidden queue 2 An automation Job is created for each sample in the queue by merging the Output Configuration file See Section B 8 3 with the specified Job Template See Sections B 8 2 11 B 8 2 18 and B 8 2 19 for Samples QA Peaks and QA Background respectively This Job file creation processes is similar to that described for GVTemplateMaster See Section B 32 The file name for each Job file is the same as the Job File Path parameter See Section B 8 2 5 with the Sam
212. ified Peak List Full Unidentified Peak Table 1 Table includes Background and Net Counts Net Countrate Uncertainty FWHM Flags and Identification in that order 2 Number formats are the same as the Unidentified Peak table in the Analysis Editor 3 The Identification column is populated with the Identification field value from the Analysis Editor if the field has been populated i e manually updated by the user If this field is blank then the entry from the Suspect Nuclide column is displayed 4 One or more optional parameters separated by the underscore character can be included to filter the data shown in the table using the following format UNIDPK_MINENERGY _MAXENERGY _MINBKGD _MAXBKGD _ MINNET _MAXNET _MININT _MAXINT _MINUNCERT _MAXUNCERT Where e FP is replaced with the desired value for each parameter MINENERGY returns records where peak energy gt MAXENERGY returns records where peak energy lt MINBKGD returns records where peak background gt MAXBKGD returns records where peak background lt MINNET returns records where net area gt e MAXNET returns records where net area lt e MININT returns records where net countrate intensity gt e MAXINT returns records where net countrate intensity lt e MINUNCERT returns records where uncertainty gt e MAXUNCERT returns records where uncertainty lt XCVR TXT lt PDF UNIT Site Unit VOL
213. iles as described in Section A 1 4 ROUTINE GLOBAL VALUE OPERATIONS 4 1 Sample and QA Measurements Instrument checks and sample measurements are performed from the Global Value Quick Start program by selecting the applicable Detector Automation Group and Automation Job The automation Job is created and run in GammaVision as described in Section 3 3 and Appendix A 1 and an item is added to the Active Jobs list on the Quick Start window Quality Control and Instrument Background measurements are typically performed at a fixed interval often daily for instrument performance and as infrequently as weekly or monthly for background measurements depending on site requirements The process used for Quality Control checks can include an automatic energy calibration or gain stabilization with AS FOUND and AS LEFT measurements or no adjustments at all based on the required protocol Background measurements include spectrum analysis which can be used for detection limit verifications and optionally create background correction files automatically If any QA parameter is outside of the acceptance limits then some of the fields on the Quick Start program will be color coded in yellow out of tolerance or red out of control as applicable Example processes for each of these options are available in the Default Configuration Files which can be optionally installed or accessed from the installation disk Page 20 of 30 4 2 Sample measurements
214. ing Global Value the automation Jobs are dynamically created by the Quick Start program as described in Section A 1 to simplify and optimize automation far beyond the GammaVision basics Page 14 of 30 3 2 Global Value Process Overview Global Value extends GammaVision automation and spectrum analysis with tools to efficiently capture sample and analysis data as well as manage the results in a secure electronic environment An outline of this process is shown in Figure 3 2 1 Automation Progra for Analysis Data GVSampleDats GVSampleDatsPlus GVSampleDstsSC GVSDFData GVSetSDFParameter GVGetContguraton For Non Analysis Data GVSetUser GVClearData GVRecallS pectrum QA Reports PDF Text MS Word Printer GVDatabase Utility GV_GetCustomDate GVincrementCounter GV_Custom_Rpt Administration P m Oo re een QA Sample Msnager Analysis Log OA CRE e Lab Notebook QA Report Optons QA Limits Database Management QA Publisher GVPublshQA ample Administration P m Analysis Editor User Group Security Configuration Management Detector Configuration Database Management Sample Type Configuration Nuclide Adjustment Factor Tables Report Template Configuration Published PDF Properties Custom Field Configuration Miscellaneous Confgurston Parameters Custom Publisher Applications Sample Publisher GVPublishSample Figure 3 2 1 Global Value P
215. ings If Laboratory Information Management System LIMS Data is imported as shown in Figure B 8 1 then select the appropriate sample data The LIMS Data can be linked to Analysis Data fields that are updated when the LIMS record is selected If LIMS data is not imported then custom data section may be used for manual data entry as shown in Figure B 8 2 These parameters cannot be linked to the other Analysis Data fields so they can be updated at any time See Section B 8 2 24 for details related to the LIMS Data integration GV Sample Data s Analysis Data Validate or update all sample data Analysis Method RES Liquid Isotopic J Custom Sample Data fields Sample Description 5p Sample Comment RCS Liquid Isotopic If using the Multiple Samples mode Cee then select the Add button to add the C T current sample to the list The Position Ley Ra Number will automatically be set to the Sample Quantiy 250006202 w sample position within the grid Dilation Factor 1 0000E 00 Lookup Analysis Quantity 250 ml Sample data may be reviewed by i E selecting the applicable item within the Cueto Sempe Data list All of the associated fields will be ME populated with the data last saved for ERR RER the selected sample If any changes to K A the data are required then select the Update button after making changes Figure
216. ion dialog will be displayed indicating that all analysis data prior to the specified date will be deleted Select Yes to purge the data or No to cancel This Purge function is normally used to clear old records when setting up a new database or after Archiving a production database that is very large hundreds of megabytes Administrative procedures are normally established to Archive databases on at least an annual basis and Purge data older than some specified cutoff in the current production database Typically a year of two of data in the current production database is sufficient for easy retrieval while keeping the system running without unnecessary delays Sample Types and Record Types Sample Types are simply descriptive categories of samples that are often tied to a specified Document Control code or Record Type R TYPE for record keeping purposes These parameters are linked to allow the selection of a meaningful Sample Type and have the sometimes cryptic R Type set automatically in automation Jobs See Section B 13 and in the Analysis Editor They can also be displayed on the Custom Report Summaries or used as filter parameters when searching for specific samples using the Analysis Log See Appendix D for field length limitations l Nuc Adj Factors Report Templates PDF Properties Custom Fields Print Destination Sort Order Sample Type C Printer Sample type R Type C MS Word C R Type C P
217. ior to and after each change It also provides indication of a complete spectrum reanalysis including the Analyst name and the date time of the reanalysis Any changes made during the reanalysis are not tracked since the review effectively starts over at this point with all associated analysis data reset to the GammaVision analysis report data Analysis Report Sample Data Nuclide Data Unidentified Peaks Custom Data 1 30 2014 09 58 Admin Changed Cs 134 Data From 1520E 08 1520E 08 6603E 00 5714E 10 6728E 10 606SE 10 7652E 10 1520E 08 1520E 08 0341E 10 370 4533E 10 338 0383E 10 1796E 10 1026E 08 2014E 08 Activity Time of Count Activity Reported Uncertainty Counting Uncertainty Total Uncertainty MDA MDA2 ISO NORM Activity ISO NORM TOC Activity ISO NORM Count Uncert ISO NORM Count Uncert ISO NORM Total Uncert ISO NORM Total Uncert ISO NORM Decision Thres ISO NORM Det Limit ISO NORM Min Activity ISO NORM Max Activity Changed 1400 37 kev Unidentifed Peak Resolution From To Sum Peak in 1 30 2014 09 49 Admin Changed Radiation Monitor List From To SPING 1 1 230E 04 PPO OID EO PPM OI PR To 0000E 00 0000E 00 6603E 00 5714E 10 amp 72AF 1N Activity Time of Count Activity Reported Uncertainty Counting Uncertainty Tarts heart sintrr Figure A 2 2 6 1 Change Summary Page A21 of A91
218. is Excel file name Details for reading the content of the Reanalysis Data file are in the GetReanalysisData function If InStr 1 ActiveWorkbook Name Reanalysis vbTextCompare gt 0 Then szRootReanalysisDataFileName Sheets Main Range ReanalysisDataRootFileName bRecallDataSuccess GetReanalysisData GetAppPath amp GetFilePrefix amp _ szRootReanalysisDataFileName amp txt If bRecallDataSuccess Then If the RecallData file is read successfully then set the applicable fields to the previous analysis data either from the parameters read from the RecallData file or by using the GVAnalysisParameter Excel Add In function End If Else Setup default parameters for non reanalysis conditions here if desired End If Set a cell value so this code doesn t run again when the GlobalValue worksheet is read by the GVSampleData program Sheets Main Range DataSavedFlag TRUE End If End Sub Page B11 of B77 The following is a brief overview of the process implemented in the Workbook_Activate code a Check the cell content in the Main worksheet to prevent the code from firing twice This is similar to the process described in Section B 6 2 2 Instead of setting a date time we simply change the content of a cell to the word TRUE when the code runs After the file is saved and closed the GVSampleData program opens the file to read the content of the GlobalValue worksheet and the Workbook_Activa
219. is only used for Quantity Calculations so it is normally hidden when the Quantity Calculation Method is set to None Example GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMultiplierShow T GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationDivisorValue This parameter sets the default value for the Quantity Calculation Divisor field This field is only used when the Quantity Calculation Method is set to either Flowrate or UnitConversion See B 7 2 11 Example GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationDivisorValue 2 5 Page B22 of B77 B 7 2 24 B 7 2 25 B 7 2 26 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationDivisorLabel This parameter sets the label for the Quantity Calculation Divisor field This label is normally set to describe the expected units for this field such as Plate out Factor Dry Wet Ratio etc When the Quantity Calculation Method dropdown list is displayed this label should be generic enough for all calculation methods so that it is meaningful regardless of the method selected See B 7 2 11 Examples GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationDivisorLabel Plate out factor GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMultiplierLabel Dry Wet Ratio GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationDivisorShow This flag is set to either T true or F false to show or hide the Quantity Calculation Divisor field When the field is displayed the content is editable by the analyst When it is hidden the default Quantity Calculation D
220. is selected from the list while the same type of Job is currently running Page A3 of A91 A 1 1 NOTE If GammaVision or Quick Start is terminated abnormally i e by ending the process using Task Manager or an abrupt computer shutdown such as loss of power then a flag set in the Global Value detector database will still indicate that an automation Job is running and the message described above will be displayed even though no Jobs are shown in the Active Jobs list In this condition the GVDatabaseUtility Section A 9 must be used to manually clear the flag Quick Start Configuration The GlobalValueQuickStart INI contains parameters to configure the application menus as well as the width of the Automation Groups Automation Jobs and Active Jobs lists The list width parameters are shown below MaxAutomationGroupsWidth 0 MaxAutomationJobsWidth 0 MaxActiveJobsWidth 0 These parameters can be set to a static width for a custom view or zero to automatically set the list width to approximately one third of the screen width When setting manual widths the value must be specified in twips which is 15 times the pixel settings For example if the screen resolution is set to 1024 x 768 then the screen width is 15 360 twips 1024 x 15 The window border and frame alignment also requires approximately 490 twips leaving a maximum of 14 870 twips available to split between the three list controls Normally the default
221. isplayed or if the data will be stored directly in the database It also determines which parameters are used along with the associated data If this parameter is omitted then all Custom Parameters defined in Global Value will be displayed in the prompt with no default values specified This configuration is rare The first two lines in Data Source file should have the parameters DisplayForm and ShowSavedData followed by either Yes or No anything other than Yes equals No Page B61 of B77 3 4 5 If DisplayForm is set to Yes then a prompt similar to Figure B 21 1 will be displayed If DisplayForm is set to No then the data parameters specified in the file are stored in the database without the prompt If ShowSaveaData is set to Yes then the custom data currently stored for each parameter will be used as the default Any parameters set to default values within the Data Source file are ignored If ShowSavedData is set to No then the parameter data stored in the Data Source files is used as the default This parameter should be set to Yes for reanalysis processes It should be set to No for other processes that may require default parameters to be defined within the Data Source file Following the DisplayForm and ShowSavedData parameters the names of any Custom Parameters established in Sample Administration Configuration on the Cu
222. ist Me Range B1 Me Range B2 A13 _ Me Range C3 Me Range C4 _ Me Range C5 Me Range C6 _ Me Range C7 Me Range C8 _ Me Range C9 Me Range C10 End Sub Page F21 of F21
223. ityDiff 1345 000 7 500 5 000 3 866 5 000 7 500 PASS Figure A 4 2 1 QA Sample Manaqer Page A60 of A91 controls and buttons to progress reports through the review process and access the PDF security module a grid with QA measurements and the applicable reviewer publisher names and dates and the report viewer A 4 2 1 QA Sample Manager Header Controls Detector ID Dt D ORTEC 11 Refresh Grid MY PDF Security List Criteria 2 amp 7 QA Type pp Review All Publish Publish All MENOS BAType oef ateT ime Analyst Reviewer ReviewDate Publisher PublishDate DAPeak 10 4 2011 15 57 34 Admin Admin 10 4 2011 18 37 DAPeak 10 5 2011 14 01 07 Admin Admin 10 5 2011 18 49 DAPeak 10 5 2011 14 01 06 Admin Admin 10 5 2011 18 49 DAPeak 10 6 2011 15 31 03 Admin Admin 10 6 2011 18 24 QAPeak 10 6 2011 15 31 04 10 6 2011 18 24 Figure A 4 2 1 1 QA Sample Manager Header 1 Detector ID List This list is populated with the Detector Number for each detector in the current database The detector list in the QA database is configured on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration Management and each QA database is updated when the databases are synchronized When a detector is selected from the list the QA measurement grid is updated with records associated with the selected detector 2 List Criteria In combination with the QA Type this field filters the list of measurements displayed in the grid to o
224. ivisor value is used for any quantity calculations specified as long as the default value is greater than zero If the default is zero then the divisor is not used in the quantity calculation This field is only used for Quantity Calculations so it is normally hidden when the Quantity Calculation Method is set to None Example GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationDivisorShow F GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationlgnorePrevious This flag is set to either T true or F false and it is only used when the Reanalysis Flag is set to T true When set to T the Quantity Calculation method specified in the configuration file is used regardless of what method was used in the previous analysis if applicable In order to be able to change the calculation method during reanalysis i e when a sample is initially analyzed with an incorrect method this parameter should be set to T When set to F the Quantity Calculation method used with the previous analysis is used instead of the Quantity Calculation method specified in the configuration file This option is normally used for routine sample reanalysis so that all of previous parameters are shown in the data entry window Example GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationlgnorePrevious T Page B23 of B77 B 7 2 27 B 7 2 28 B 7 2 29 GVSampleDataPlus_SDFFilePath This parameter requires the full path to an SDF file The Decay and Collecti
225. k configuration employed 10 Add the new Detector in the Sample Administration Configuration Manager on the Detectors tab as described in Section A 2 3 2 and then Synchronize changes to all existing databases 11 If the QA Database established was a copy of an existing QA database then delete any detectors configured in the database other than those required for the new configuration as described in Section A 4 6 Note that all QA records and Lab Notebook Comments associated with detectors to be deleted must be removed and this is most easily accomplished using the Database Purge process described in Section A 4 8 After purging the QA Data records the QA Limits and QA Points also need to be removed per Sections A 4 7 2 and A 4 7 1 in order to delete a detector 12 Set up QA Parameters and Limits for the new detector as described in Section A 4 7 13 Test the automation jobs from Opening Quick Start to verify operation Note that the QA Peak and QA Background processes should be run first in order to establish an appropriate Energy FWHM calibration and Background Correction file which are typically used for sample measurements System Backup System backups can be accomplished using a simple batch process included with Global Value or using third party software The method chosen is often determined by the level of local IT support or site personnel experience Regardless of the method chosen it is important to ensure that all Global
226. kgd where SCQABkgd is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files GVSampleDataSC_QAPeakConfigurationFilePath This parameter specifies the full path to a Configuration file which defines Job specific parameters used to create the automation Jobs for the QA Peaks Analysis Method as described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 2 This configuration file is normally the Job Configuration File used to run QA Peaks as a standalone process from Quick Start Refer to Section B 31 and the example Job Configuration Files for more detail related to the file content Example GVSampleDataSC_QAPeakConfigurationFilePath JobDir Det DETNO QA Daily Calibration Check cfg where each parameter is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files Page B43 of B77 B 8 2 21 B 8 2 22 B 8 2 23 GVSampleDataSC_QABkgdConfigurationFilePath This parameter specifies the full path to a Configuration file which defines Job specific parameters used to create the automation Jobs for the QA Background Analysis Method as described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 2 This configuration file is normally the Job Configuration File used to run QA Background as a standalone process from Quick Start Refer to Section B 31 and the example Job Configuration Files for more detail related to the file content
227. l A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database F27 GVRadMonitorListCount GVRadMonitorListCount DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID This function returns the total number of radiation monitor readings associated with the specified SpectrumID Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumID arguments The database is detector specific Example Spreadsheet formula GVRadMonitorListCount A1 A2 A3 returns the number of Radiation Monitor Readings associated with the specified Spectrum ID Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database Page F18 of F21 F28 GVRadMonitorList GVRadMonitorList DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID This function returns a comma delimited string of all Radiation Monitor Readings associated with the specified SpectrumID The GVParseList function can be used to extract a specific item from the list Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumID arguments The database is detector specific Example Spreadsheet formula GVRadMonitorList A1 A2 A3 returns a comma delimited list of all Radiation Monitor Readings associated with the specified Spectrum ID
228. l level value When this field is used in the nuclide summary the E flag that previously followed the nuclide activity value is no longer displayed Otherwise the table displays standard nuclide activity with the E as in previous versions FF Nuclide Summary Peak Flags Full List typically used with ISO X X X NORM Nuclide Data lt Displayed if the Standard Nuclide activity is reported as lt MDA E Displayed if any of the nuclide information has been changed in the Analysis Editor Displayed if the Bad Shape flag was displayed on the original GammaVision report A Displayed if the decayed activity is less than the MDA value B Displayed if the decayed activity is less than the MDA2 normally critical level value C Displayed if the ISO NORM Best decayed activity is less than the Decision Threshold Critical Level value D Displayed if the ISO NORM Best decayed activity is less than the Detection Limit MDA value When this field is used in the nuclide summary the E flag that previously followed the nuclide activity value is no longer displayed Otherwise the table displays standard nuclide activity with the E as in previous versions HL_S Half Life days HL X X X 1 Must be on the same row as the NUC_ code 2 Value is right aligned 3 SH See _ACT_S format code _ IDEC _S ISO NORM Nuclide Activity Column normally decay corrected X X X 1 Must be on the sam
229. ld When the Quantity Calculation Method is set to either Flowrate or UnitConversion the input and output unit combination must be defined in the Quantity Calculation Conversion Table See B 7 2 32 Examples GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationOutputUnits cc GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationOutputUnits Kg GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationOutputUnitsAllowChange This flag is set to either T true or F false to enable or disable the Quantity Calculation Output Units field If enabled the analyst can select predefined units from the dropdown list or manually type in their own units Example GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationOutputUnitsAllowChange T GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationOutputUnitsLabel This parameter sets the label for the Quantity Calculation Output analysis quantity field This label is normally set to describe the expected units for this field such as Analysis Quantity Calculated Volume etc When the Quantity Calculation Method dropdown list is displayed this label should be generic enough for all calculation methods so that it is meaningful regardless of the method selected See B 7 2 11 Examples GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationOutputUnitsLabel Analysis Quantity GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationOutputUnitsLabel Sample Wet Weight GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationOutputUnitsLabel Sample Volume Page B21 of B77 B 7 2 20 B 7 2 21 B 7 2 22
230. ld may be left blank Print Analysis Report when QA is run If this option is checked then the standard GammavVision analysis report will be printed along with the Global Value QA report when GVQAPeaks or GVQABackground are run in the automation Job Page A69 of A91 e Save Analysis Report with QA Report If this option is checked then the standard GammaVision analysis report will be saved in the database along with the Global Value QA report when GVQAPeaks or GVQABackground are run in the automation Job e Publish Analysis Report If this option is checked then the standard GammaVision analysis report will be published included in the PDF file when publishing the QA report This option is unchecked and disabled if the previous option is not checked because the standard GammaVision report is not available in the database e Print Spectrum on QA Report If this option is checked then an image of the spectrum is included on the QA report just below the data table when reports are printed to a PDF file Microsoft Word or the default printer e Save button This button saves changes to the report parameters for the selected QA Type The following is an example QA Report showing the QA data table below the report header fields This table consists of all the defined parameters for each QA Point Bkgd or Peak definition and their associated data values Target Low Control Low Tolerance Measured High Tolerance High Control The measured
231. le assume that the Input and Output Spectrum Live Time is 100 seconds Input Spectrum Channel 999 count rate contribution 1000 100 250 000 249 875 250 000 249 750 5 0 cps Input Spectrum Channel 1000 count rate contribution 500 100 250 125 250 000 250 25 250 000 2 5 cps Total Input Spectrum count rate contribution 5 0 2 5 7 5 cps Output Spectrum Channel 1000 counts 7 5 cps 100 seconds 750 Input Spectrum Data 1000 Counts 500 Counts 10 cps 5 cps Channel 999 Channel 1000 249 750 kev 250 000 kev 250 25 kev Output Spectrum Data 750 Counts 2 Spectrum Template Channel 1000 249 875 kev 250 125 kev Figure B 35 2 Sum by Energy Countrate Example The Spectrum Template defines all of the spectrum parameters that are not modified by the multiplexer program The program loads this spectrum file as the starting point for the output spectrum format and then modifies the channel data and ADC Conversion Gain Energy Calibration coefficients and Live Real Time parameters as applicable The options for the Spectrum Output Template are a First Spectrum in List This option uses the first spectrum in the array of spectra being summed as the output template User Defined This option enables the Spectrum Template Path field and requires a valid spectrum file path to be specified Page B74 of B77 3 ADC Conversion Gain The ADC Conversion Gain number of spectrum channel
232. leDataSC programs Each configuration file can be configured to generate multiple output files and process them with different applications automatically if desired Two types of parameters are used to generate files and run applications The file generation parameters use the prefix Output and those used for running applications use the prefix RunApp All of the Output parameters must be listed before the associated RunApp parameters In addition to the prefix each parameter has a property name followed by a unique character identifier This unique identifier is a single character that is used to group the Output and RunApp properties as well as link the Output file to the RunApp parameters This identifier can be any alphanumeric character thereby providing up to thirty six 36 different Output and RunApp scenarios in the same file The following shows the complete list of Output and RunApp parameters which are discussed in more detail in the remainder of this section OutputTypeX OutputEnabledX OutputCoverTemplateX OutputIncludeSummaryX OutputIncludeDetailsX OutputDirectoryX OutputFileExtensionX RunAppPathX RunAppEnabledX RunAppCommandLineParameterX Where X Single character unique identifier 0 9 A Z not case sensitive e OutputType The OutputType can be set to PDF TXT XML or CSV When set to XML or CSV an appropriate XML or CSV template must be specified for the OutputCov
233. lide Data Unidentified Peaks Custom Data Change Summary Viewer Font Size 71 4 Spectrum 1 2014 01 30 002 Sample ID SN 12345 U E ae Record Type Total Pages PAGES Report Content Y Summary view Site Name 7 Details Spectrum Department Name Gamma Isotopic Results Print Destination Description High Activity Demo C Printer Sample Comment SC My Comment MS Word Detector HPGe 1 C PDF Fil ie Collection Start 5 19 2011 C Text File Quant Calc Type Flowrate Collection Stop 5 19 2011 IV Quant Input Value 2 000E 00 Acquisition Start 5 19 2011 Print Font Size 77 Y Multiplier 1 000E 00 Acquisition Stop 5 19 2011 Divisor 1 000E 00 Live Time 1000 Print Analysis Quantity 5 663E 05 Real Time 1039 Analyst i Analysis Time 1 30 2014 Editor i Edit i 1 30 2014 Narri aren we Dares a gt Figure A 2 2 1 1 Analysis Report The following options are available on this tab Viewer Font Size This field specifies the font size used in the report viewer Use the up and down arrows next to the field to change the font size as necessary based on your monitor resolution and report content Report Content The report viewer displays any combination of the Summary and Detailed Reports and allows access to the spectrum viewer as described below Note that the report viewer only displays standard text similar to Notepad If a report template uses the parameter SPCPICTURE then the code SpectrumPlaceholder
234. lide Grid When this option is checked the Standard Nuclide Time of Count activity field will be displayed in the Analysis Editor Nuclide Grid Otherwise this field will be hidden See Section A 2 2 3 Separate Editor and Analyst When this option is checked the signature grid on the Analysis Editor header will include the Editor and Edit Date row which is updated with the current user name and date when changes are saved Under this condition the original Analyst name is not changed If this option is not checked then the Editor row is not displayed in the Signature grid and Analyst name is updated to the current user along with the hidden Editor field when changes are saved The appropriate setting is dictated by the individual site protocol for electronic data review Show ISO NORM Nuclide Option When this option is checked the Show ISO NORM checkbox is displayed on the Analysis Editor Nuclide Data tab to allow toggling between the Standard Nuclide data and ISO NORM nuclide data Otherwise the Show ISO NORM checkbox is hidden and the last setting checked or not checked determines which data is displayed on the Nuclide Data tab See Section A 2 2 3 Page A48 of A91 A 2 3 8 Custom Fields The Custom Fields tab in the Configuration Editor allows end users to define custom parameter fields to meet a variety of needs The data associated with custom fields can be specified using the standard data entry prompt associated with
235. ll as the Analysis Editor for electronic data review See Section A 2 B1 The GVPublishSample program is executed when Publishing samples from the Analysis Editor to generate data files in PDF Text XML or CSV formats and run custom programs for additional processing of this data The GVPublishSample program can also be run through automation jobs See Section A 3 The QA Administration program contains QA charts a Lab Notebook QA Limits and reporting options as well as the QA Sample Manager for electronic data review QA data can also be exported to Excel for additional evaluation with preformatted statistics and charts See Section A 4 C1 The GVPublishQA program is executed when Publishing samples from the QA Sample manager to generate data files in PDF Text XML or CSV formats and run custom programs for additional processing of this data The GVPublishQA program can also be run through automation jobs See Section A 5 The GVDataExport program is used to copy analysis records from the secure Global Value databases which store analysis data from a single detector to a non secured Access database that can store results from multiple detectors See Section A 12 The GVDatabaseutility program can repair corrupted databases and reset automation Job flags when the Quick Start program or GammaVision is terminated abnormally See Section A 9 The EFTConverter program creates geometry specific efficiency tables source certificat
236. ll row Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw F8 GVDetectorDatabasePath GVDetectorDatabasePath SourceDatabasePath WorkGroupPath DetectorName This function returns the full path to a specified detector s database Argument Notes See Notes 1 amp 2 above for a description of the SourceDatabasePath equivalent to DatabasePath and WorkGroupPath arguments The database is not detector specific DetectorName is the unique Detector Description that identifies each detector in the Sample Administration Configuration on the Detectors tab Example Spreadsheet formula GVDetectorDatabasePath A1 A2 Detector 2 returns the database path for the detector named Detector 2 in the Sample Administration Configuration Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Page F7 of F21 F9 GVDetectorDatabasePathByDetectorNumber GVDetectorDatabasePathByDetectorNumber SourceDatabasePath WorkGroupPath DetectorNumber This function returns the full path to a specified detector s database Argument Notes See Notes 1 amp 2 above for a description of the SourceDatabasePath equivalent to DatabasePath and WorkGroupPath arguments The database is not detector specific DetectorNumber is the unique Detector Number that identifies each detector in the Sample Administratio
237. ly as shown on the template The template editor behaves similar to a standard Windows text editor such as Notepad allowing the use of routine Cut Copy Paste Delete commands available from the Right Click shortcut menu or using standard keyboard combinations Ctrl X C V etc The standard page width is 78 characters using the default font size of 11 cpi The ruler at the top of the template editor can be used as a guide to ensure that the maximum width is not exceeded The ruler is 80 characters wide and will scale with the template layout when changing the Viewer Font size If more characters per line are required then the font size in the rendered reports can be adjusted from the Analysis Editor or in automation Jobs with the Print_Rpt program as described in Section B 25 NOTE Do not use the TAB character when aligning text because this character is treated as a single SPACE character when report summaries are generated Several example templates are provided in the database which may be used as a starting point for creating your own reports Nuc Adj Factors PDF Properties Misc Custom Fields Report Templates Sample Types Template N ame GVSampleData Long Add Edit Delete pen ul Viewer Font 10 JACO_DONE IACTRANGE IACTUDIV JACTUDIW2 JACTUMULTA JACTUMULT21 JANALYSTI Aul BATCHI CAL1I CALTEFDATEI CALTENDATEI CAL2I CAL2EFDATE CAL2ENDATEI CHANGESUMMARYI CII COMMENTI C
238. match cannot be established then clear this registry entry This change overrides detector window settings that could result in opening multiple detector windows or an incorrect one when GammaVision opens ii If no detectors are expected to be controlled then the B command line parameter will be passed to GammaVision when it is started to ensure that GammavVision starts with a Buffer window active b Determine the available screen space available between the Quick Start program and the Windows Taskbar and set the corresponding top left width and height coordinates c Start GammaVision and pass command line parameters for the Buffer if applicable Zoom coordinates and the path to the Job file created in Step 6 Note that the GammaVision window size can be dynamically adjusted afterwards in the Job file using the Zoom command if desired At this point GammaVision is in control of the automation process by running the specified Job file Set a flag in the detector database indicating that a Job is active for either Reanalysis or non Reanalysis presumed Acquisition processing This is the flag checked in Step 2 previously Update the Active Jobs list using the Detector name and the Automation Job name that initiated the process If the automation process was for reanalysis then an exclamation point is also appended to the entry 10 To check the status of a particular Job simply select that Job in the Active J
239. max Nuclide Data Parameters Numeric Nuclide Adjustment Factors Numeric Nuclide Adjustment Tables 10 characters max and cannot contain the underscore character _ or blank spaces Custom Parameter Name 50 characters max Custom Parameter Label 30 characters max Custom Parameter Report Code 10 characters max Custom Parameter Value 50 characters max Page D2 of D2 Appendix E Network Configuration Considerations There are several different ways to setup the Gamma Spectroscopy system on a network each with its own advantages and disadvantages Three configurations are described below to help you determine which configuration is best suited for your application Unlike other systems which may require a client server model Global Value is well suited for any of these configurations because each detector is assigned a unique database that can be located anywhere on the local network Configuration Management functions can be performed on any individual database and all configuration changes easily pushed to all other databases in the network This distributed data file topography allows the convenience of managing configuration parameters as if you were working from a centralized database server with the added flexibility of storing analysis and configuration data on a local computer to minimize counting lab interruptions in the event of a single point failure network server
240. mber gt QADETNO lt DetectorNumber gt lt Analyst gt QAANALYST lt Analyst gt lt Reviewer gt QAREVIEWER lt Reviewer gt lt ReviewDate gt QAREVIEWDATE lt ReviewDate gt lt Publisher gt QAPUBLISHER lt Publisher gt lt PublishDate gt QAPUBLISHDATE lt PublishDate gt lt GVPublishSampleData gt lt GVPublishQAData gt lt QAPoint gt PUBQAPOINT lt QAPoint gt lt QAParameter gt PUBQAPARAMETER lt QAParameter gt lt QATarget gt PUBQATARGET lt QATarget gt lt QALowControl gt PUBQALOWCTRL lt QALowControl gt lt QALowTolerance gt PUBQALOWTOL lt QALowTolerance gt lt QAValue gt PUBQAVALUE lt QAValue gt lt QAHighTolerance gt PUBQAHIGHTOL lt QAHighTolerance gt lt QAHighControl gt PUBQAHIGHCTRL lt QAHighControl gt lt QAResult gt PUBQARESULT lt QAResult gt lt GVPublishQAData gt lt GVPublishDataSet gt The CSV Comma Separated Values Template requires the following configuration 1 2 The Sample Data and QA Data have two separate records In the rendered CSV file the Sample Data will be returned in a single row and the QA Data will be generated with one row per QA parameter The Sample Data record must start with the parameter CSVSAMPLEDATA This parameter is not returned in the final CSV file Sample Data parameters described for QA templates may be included within this record See Section A 2 3 5 for details regarding Report Templates The Nuclide Data row must sta
241. me Gamma Isotopic Results Print Destination Description ABC Storm Drain Printer Sample Comment DEMO RCS Liquid Isotopic MS Word Detector HPGe 1 CTS Sample Type Generic Collection Start 5 19 2011 C Text File Analysis Method DEMO Method Collection Stop 5 19 2011 ME File After Save Sample Quantity 2 5000E 02 ml Acquisition Start 5 19 2011 Sample Flow Rate 0 0000E 00 Acquisition Stop 5 19 2011 Sample Efficiency 0 0000E 00 Live Time 1000 Print Dilution Factor 1 0000E 00 Real Time 1039 Analysis Quantity 2 500E 02 Analyst i Analysis Time 1 30 2014 Editor Edit Darri arenes Darri nre Print Font Size 11 24 Figure A 2 2 1 Sample Administration Analysis Editor The Analysis Editor is used for managing sample analysis data The complete reports can be reviewed and electronic signatures applied various parameters can be edited and approved reports can be published to PDF files Additional reporting and data integration options can be automated using the Sample Publisher program described in Section A 3 Page A12 of A91 Detector Om Signature A 1 2014 01 30_002 Om As shown in Figure A 2 2 1 the Analysis Editor is comprised of a main header and several tabbed sections which are discussed in Sections A 2 1 through A 2 6 The header section contains fields for selecting the Detector Spectrum and Filter options as well as various buttons to process the data using an electronic edit review
242. mment field These fields are disabled if the current user does not have the appropriate permission Print Options This section allows the user to generate a report showing the Lab Notebook comments to either Microsoft Word or the default printer A 4 4 QA Charts The QA Charts provide instrument performance evaluation through trend plots and statistical data evaluation This interface allows easy access to the underlying QA data as well as a mechanism to generate trend reports and custom data evaluation r Global Value QA Administration QA Charts File Database Path C User GV bases GlobalValuel1QA mdb va QH Current User Admin mite Database User Group Administrator D J Data View Slide Show Print Options QA Point 04 1332 y 1332 Chart j 2 ER Print Chart _ Stat gt Printer Channel Table Stat 4 Export to Excel anne i E Auto Print Include Comments nd Ii Show Data Points J Black and White E Show Legend MM AutoScale Y Axis ORTEC 11 QA 1332 Channel QA Chart 5335 60 5332 80 5330 00 5327 20 5321 60 01 Jan 2010 18 Apr 2010 03 Aug 2010 19 Nov 2010 06 Mar 2011 21 Jun 2011 06 Oct 2011 Figure A 4 4 1 QA Charts Page A66 of A91 A 4 4 1 QA Chart Header Controls pa 5 Data View Slide Show 6 Print Options m N ed O Chart Interval sect O MS Word QA Juas 1 1332 ON t Channel ME e Sine Export to Excel Table A Include Co
243. mments L O Auto Print Date Range All Data N O Ii Show Data Points J Black and White O 5 6 fi Show 3 AutoScale Y Axis Figure A 4 2 1 1 QA Sample Manager Header Detector The detector list is populated based on all of the detectors configured in the current database When a detector is selected the QA Point list is updated and the first QA Point is selected by default The QA chart and table data is updated to reflect the current plot parameter QA Point The list of QA Points is populated based on each point established for the selected detector in the QA Limits When a QA Point is selected the Parameter list for that QA Point is updated and the first parameter is selected by default The QA chart and table data is updated to reflect the current plot parameter Parameter The list of Parameters is populated based on limits established for each parameter in the QA Limits When a Parameter is selected the QA chart and table data is updated Date Range The Date Range specifies the criteria for data displayed in the data table and chart The following options can be selected a Previous X Days This is the default selection when the QA Charts are opened A field is displayed below the list to specify the number of previous day s data to display This entry is stored on the local computer to be used as the default the next time QA Charts are accessed b Year A field is displayed below the list to specify
244. monitor readings from the previous analysis are used as the default Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty so the automation process is unaffected b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close Gamma Vision immediately GV_GetCustomData This program sets the Custom Data parameters for the sample This data may be collected using a prompt similar to Figure B 21 1 or by reading the data file passed to the program on the command line The option to display the prompt or not is specified in the data file as described below F Global Value Custom Data Input Parameter Parameter Data Sample Number Analysis Method ACS Liquid Isotopic OK Cancel Clear All Figure B 21 1 GV_GetCustomData Prompt GV_GetCustomData has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 2 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required The database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector Data Source File optional The data source file is an ASCII text file that determines if the prompt shown in Figure B 21 1 will be d
245. mplate parameters that are used for this purpose When the Cancel button is selected a helper Job is created as described in Step 7 except that the content of the file is the QUIT command to terminate GammaVision The following is an example of how this application would be run from an acquisition Job Run C User GVCR GVSampleDataSC exe C User GVCR Temp 1_SampleDataSCDaita txt Wait C User GVCR GVSampleDataSC exe Call C User GVCR Temp 1_SampleDataSC job NOTE When using this application with multiple samples that include the QA Peak and QA Background options the user must login to both the Detector Sample database and the QA Database using GVSetUser and GVQASetUser respectively prior to running this application Page B28 of B77 B 8 1 2 See Section B 1 This is required in order to set the current analyst name for all subsequent measurements that will result from running this program This is frequently unnecessary because QA measurements are typically run and verified prior to starting a batch of unattended measurements using a sample changer If only Samples or QA measurements are made then login to only the applicable database is necessary Data Entry 1 Select an Analysis Method from the dropdown list The analysis method specifies a number of parameters to use in the analysis process as well as default values for many of the sample data fields See Section B 8 2 4 for details related to the Analysis Method sett
246. n Configuration on the Detectors tab Example Spreadsheet formula GVDetectorDatabasePathByDetectorNumber A1 A2 2 returns the database path for the detector that has been assigned Detector Number 2 Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw F10 GVSpectrumList GVSpectrumList DatabasePath WorkGroupPath _ Optional GreaterThanReportDate _ Optional LessThanReportDate _ Optional GreaterThanAcquisitionStartDate _ Optional LessThanAcquisitionStartDate _ Optional GreaterThanSampleStartDate _ Optional LessThanSampleStartDate _ Optional GreaterThanSampleStopDate _ Optional LessThanSampleStopDate _ Optional IMaximumSpectrumCount This function returns a comma delimited list of spectra that meet the specified date criteria with the maximum number of spectra optionally limited by IMaximumSpectrumCount value This function is typically used in VBA code as worksheet cells may limit the string length Argument Notes See Notes 1 amp 2 above for a description of the DatabasePath and WorkGroupPath arguments The database is detector specific GreaterThan LessThan date arguments are optional and must be valid dates if supplied The SampleStopDate is equivalent to the Decay Correction Date in Global Value IMaximumSpectrumCount specifies the maximum number of records to return The most recent records are returned if the list is limited by this value
247. n Figure B 15 1is displayed to allow the analyst to enter the Batch identifier If a Batch Description is specified then the dialog is not displayed Re Analysis Flag optional f set to T true then the Batch from the previous analysis is used as the default The prompt is always displayed for reanalysis mode Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty so the automation process is unaffected b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close Gamma Vision immediately Page B58 of B77 B 16 GV_GetComment A 7 This program prompts the analyst for comments associated eee eben deo studi with the sample The display shown in Figure B 16 1 is displayed under all conditions Comments may be entered as free form text with line breaks similar to any text editor however the TAB character cannot be used GV_GetComment has the following comma delimited command line parameters B 17 1 2 3 4 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required za The database path is defined on the Detectors tab in L Sample Administration Configuration for each Fi
248. n File After Save below NOTE Printing the report to a PDF file is not the same as Publishing the report When Publishing the report is always saved to the Publish directory and the file name and protection is determined by the PDF Properties in the Configuration Manager GVPublishQA is also launched for additional processing when publishing When printing a PDF file you can change the name and location the file is not encrypted and no additional processing occurs after the file is saved Page A64 of A91 4 Text File The report is saved to a text file A standard Save As dialog is displayed indicating the path and file name The default path is the Custom Report Path established for the selected detector in the Configuration Manager and the default file name is the Spectrum name Both the path and file name can be changed in the Save As dialog Also see Open File After Save below 5 Open File After Save This option is only enabled when the PDF File or Text File option is selected If this option is checked then the saved report will be opened and displayed using the associated program similar to opening the file directly from Windows Explorer A 4 3 Lab Notebook The Lab Notebook provides a simple method for keeping track of detector specific comments or issues These comments may be anything from an explanation for anomalous QA results to routine detector maintenance z Lab Notebook Detect
249. n a particular lab To establish this configuration the Detector Job path set on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration should normally be set to a local Job path i e C User Job Det1 Note that this path must exist during the detector Page A2 of A91 configuration The workstation that should not display this detector in Quick Start must not have the associated Job folder so it should be moved to another location or deleted To simplify configuration changes in the future the folders can simply be moved to an Out of Service folder during normal operation to limit the detector list as desired and then moved back to the required location if necessary when detector configuration changes are needed The default database path is specified on the Misc tab in Sample Administration Configuration See Section A 2 3 7 If the current default database path is not valid then the user will be prompted to set the default database when the Quick Start program is started and this path will be set as the current default Normally this would be a database that is locally accessible but it could be any database on the local network Note that the default database must be a Detector database for sample data not a QA database When a detector is selected from the pick list all of the folders within the detector Job directory specified in the Sample Administration Configuration on the Detectors tab will be displayed in the Automati
250. n image ISTYPE Sample Type X X X X X ISYSUNCERT Additional Systematic Error from analysis settings X X X X X format 0 00 TEXE Total Equivalent Xe 133 Curies X X X 1 Requires an Adjustment Factor Table named EQXE and a or to be used in the Nuclide Activity row i e _EQXE_S2 2 Requires a valid GDT Volume and Pressure 3 Cannot precede the nuclide table 4 Number format is 0 00E 00 5 Calculation details TEXE EQXE Conc Tank Volume where e EQXE Conc gt Ai EQXEi EQXE column total e Tank Volume cc K P1 V1 P2 e P1 GDT pressure psig 14 7 e P2 14 7 atmospheric pressure e V1 GDT Volume ft3 e K Units Conversion 2 83E 02 1243 in3 ft3 2 5443 cm3 in3 1E 6 uCi Ci UDUN User Defined Uncertainty Name from analysis options X X X X X where is replaced by 1 through 9 UDUV User Defined Uncertainty Value from analysis options X X X X X where is replaced by 1 through 9 format 0 00 UNIDPK Simple Unidentified Peak List Energy Identification X X X 1 Peaks are taken from the first analysis report if dual analyses were performed 2 Table is left aligned based on the location of the UNIDPK parameter 3 Peak Energies within the table are right aligned 4 Number format is 0 00 Page A35 of A91 Report Code Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes Returned Data XML CSV UNIDPK_ Advanced Unident
251. n the Report Template Otherwise these fields will have a light yellow background Refer to Section A 2 3 5 for Report Template parameter codes Page A17 of A91 The shading of various fields based on whether or not that parameter will be displayed on the custom report summary is only for convenience to avoid confusion that may result with some data displayed on this tab that is not displayed on the report summary Data may still be entered in fields that are not displayed on the currently selected report to allow the data to be used with the Excel Add In functions other report templates or used for filtering or sorting criteria using the Sample Log The following parameters may be modified on this tab with changes saved to the database when the Save button in the Analysis Header is selected Refer to Appendix D for field size limitations Description Edit the Sample Description text in this field as applicable Changes to this field are applied to the Sample Description displayed on the custom report summary but not to the standard GammaVision detailed reports If the description is distinctly different than originally specified during the analysis then the description should be updated using a Reanalysis Job similar to the process followed for changing a calibration or library file Comments Add or modify comments related to the sample in this field as applicable Report Template All report templates that are saved in the database can be
252. nd time in the format YYYY MM DD_hhmm Example On June 22 2012 16 49 C User PBC 1_Date pbc translates to C User PBC 1_ 2012 06 22 _1649 pbc 3 JOB File Path optional f the full path to a JOB file is provided then the contents will be replaced with the text Load_PBC PBCFileName where PBCFileName is the PBC file path specified as the second command line argument This helper Job would normally be called in the main analysis Jobs to set the default PBC file for analysis to the current file path Example Laod_PBC C User PBC 1_2012 06 22_1649 pbc Page B68 of B77 B 31 GVTemplateMaster This program replaces user defined parameters in a Template file with the parameter values specified in a Configuration file and saves the merged data to a Result file In general the Template file defines the process and the Configuration file provides the details within that process This functionality is used by Quick Start to create dynamic Job files in the automation process as described in Section A 1 and the GVSampleDataSC program described in Section B 8 The GVTemplateMaster program allows this functionality to be implemented with other custom applications GVTemplateMaster has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Template File Path required Full path to the file that defines the process 2 Configuration File Path required Full path to the file that contains the parameter details 3 Result File P
253. nenccnnnnanccononanannccnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 23 ALTDO System BACKUP sce ister te tereictetosttags a E R E e hay A E AE 24 4 11 Validating Critical Configuration Files oooooocccnnocccnnncoccccnnnoncccnnnanoncncnnnnnn cnn nnnn cnn nan nccnnnnnnnno 24 4 12 Accessing Analysis Results for Custom Data Integration oooooocccnoccccnnnoccccccnnnoncccncnnnannncnnnos 24 4 13 Database AICHive Seccrccictees grace haecepheorsngee ea toc geneaad laws ad ontedecengcaariocededies ty dist soucensocepdenepedsauenntited 25 4 14 Changing the Analysis Engine for Measurement ococoocccccconocccnnononccnnonnnnncnnnnnnnncnnnannnnnnnnnnns 25 4 15 Configuring Automation Jobs id 26 4 16 Changing the QA Source A aera Bile bee oor ah hed weal cee es deaneee ecnaa iene 29 APPENDIX A CONFIGURATION AND DATA MANAGEMENT PROGRAMS cdcccconccccccconcoccccccnnnnciccnnno Al A 1 Global Value Quick Stark a A2 A 2 sample Administration on eA at uae sativa os Nga aes eat eae AQ A 3 Sample Publisher encerrona a ae a ea a aa Ea aE Ea ERE Taaa A51 A 4 DA AMM ia A58 A 5 OA PUDIIS HSI sac a a ar uth Cas a a cnet N AA A76 A 6 OVOASUMIM IA E E E E E ces meteent ade A82 A 7 A alysiS LO iaa ei a errr eee ey A83 A 8 EVDetector Monticello A85 A 9 Database Ulla iaa A86 ATO Ale Back ias A87 BOTA YRIG COM ANS sees caca thers cecag easter e e Eae AEE deweuG a E R E EEA EEEE A89 A 12 GN DALAEX POM ustedes A90 AS ERFCONS alado Ad alates A91 Page 3 of 30 APPE
254. nerating the report summary is based on the most recent analysis See Section B 22 for more information regarding the spectrum ID determination Page B65 of B77 B 26 GrossGamma This program gets the Total Counts Live Time and Counts Global Value Gross Gamma Ens per second from the specified Background and Sample spectra and calculates the difference in Total Counts and Count rate The data may be displayed in a prompt similar to that shown in Figure B 26 1 or stored in an Excel Worksheet as described below When using the Excel interface the Total Counts Live Time _ Counts Sec Background 102 800 129 00 1173 9 00 130 33 01 33 functionality offered by this application can also be ated accomplished using the Excel Add In which offers additional capability See Appendix F for more information regarding Figure B 26 1 GrossGamma Prompt the Excel Add In GrossGamma has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Full path to background spectrum required Spectrum format must be Integer SPC 2 Full path to sample spectrum required Spectrum format must be Integer SPC 3 Excel File path optional f a file path to an Excel file is provided then the content shown in Figure B 26 1 is stored in the Excel file The Excel Workbook must have a Worksheet named GlobalValue where the data is stored starting with the first row and column as shown in Figu
255. nformation Management System which could be any data storage system When these systems can be configured to create a CSV file in the proper format the data can be seamlessly loaded into Global Value When LIMS integration is not necessary or possible this file can be used to establish data input fields for custom data parameters or default parameters for configurations that require modification to the Analysis Method defaults Example GVSampleDataSC_LIMSInputFilePath LIMSDIR GVSampleDataSC_CustomInputData csv where LIMSDIR is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files B 8 2 24 1 LIMS Input File Format The format of the LIMS Input File is Comma Separated Values CSV with a variable number of parameters up to a maximum of twelve for the List and Field types described below The Link field types do not count against the number of parameters allowed The header consists of the first four records which define the parameters and their use as follows 1 Record 1 Parameter Name Any descriptive name is valid 2 Record 2 Parameter Type Valid entries are a List All unique data for this field will be displayed in the Custom Sample Data section of the GVSampleDataSC program in a dropdown list box List parameter types should be listed as the first set of parameters in the file and the order in the file dictates the dropdown field order as
256. nina nana F18 E28 GVRadMonitorLiS tias a di F19 E29 GVMRadMONITO R de A a Ib ed ea F19 E30 WPopulateDetectorLiSt siii F20 F31 GVPopulateSpectrumL ist i soins snes beanendeacedesdeneenancdncayenscasenesieaneeetaesenies eE ERa aR neh F20 F32 GVGenerateSpectrumLiSt cooooonccccn niciconnnonccnnnnnnnnenonnnnnnncnnnnnnn nn cnnnne nn nn nan n nro F21 Page 5 of 30 INTRODUCTION Global Value is a productivity add on for GammaVision which is designed to transform the standard gamma spectroscopy system into a state of the art production environment with automated measurement processes custom reporting quality assurance and data management GammaVision s built in Job commands enable many basic tasks to be automated but production laboratories often require additional functionality to streamline processes and generate custom reports This functionality is provided by Global Value through a set of modules that are normally run within the JOB process similar to standard JOB commands In some cases the Global Value modules replace standard JOB commands and in others new functionality is added For instance the analyst may be prompted for the sample description decay date and sample weight individually using the standard GammaVision interface or by using one of Global Value s interfaces which combines several inputs and the ability to calculate various parameters or customize the interface Global Value also provides modules to prompt for a User L
257. nly those meeting the specified criteria This filtering capability is intended to simplify the electronic review process The following filtering options are available a Unreviewed This option will limit the list to those not having a Reviewer signature applied b UnPublished This option will limit the list to those not having a Publisher signature applied c Previous X Days When this option is selected a field is displayed to specify the number of days The list is limited to those where the QA measurement Date Time is after the current date time minus the number of days specified d All This option disables the review signature and date filters 3 QA Type In combination with the List Criteria the QA Type selection filters the list of reports displayed in the grid to only those meeting the specified criteria QA Peaks QA Background or All Measurements 4 Review Button This button is only enabled if the Current User belongs to a Group that has permission to Review Data When selected the QA report is refreshed such that the Reviewer name and date will be displayed on the final report 5 Review All Button This button is only enabled if the Current User belongs to a Group that has permission to Review Data When selected the review process described for the Review Button is applied to every spectrum in the grid Page A61 of A91 6 7 9 UnReview Button This button is only enabled if the Current User belongs to a
258. nt Start Stop Times This parameter is set to either Yes or No When set to Yes the Sample Start Date Time field is displayed in the Analysis Data section When set to No only the Sample Stop Date Time is displayed and the label is changed to Decay Date Time In this condition the Sample Start Date Time is set to the same time as the Sample Stop Time Page B34 of B77 B 8 2 4 12 B 8 2 4 13 B 8 2 4 14 B 8 2 4 15 B 8 2 4 16 B 8 2 4 17 B 8 2 4 18 B 8 2 4 19 DefaultSampleDateTime The default Sample Date Time can be any valid date time format It can also be set to the current date using the word TODAY or the current date time using the word NOW Both the Sample Collection Start and Stop Time fields are populated with this setting Use Dilution This parameter is set to either Yes or No When set to Yes the Dilution field and a button to access selectable Dilution schemes are displayed See Section B 8 2 17 for details related to the Dilution Factors file format When set to No the Dilution Factor field is hidden and set to a value of one Dilution Factor A Default Dilution Factor may be set if desired The value must be greater than zero If the Use Dilution parameter is set to No then this parameter is ignored and a default value of one is used Use Flowrate This parameter is set to either Yes or No When set to Yes t
259. ntent of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file contains commands to load the efficiency calibration and library files as follows Recall_Efficiency CALFILE PATH Load_Library LIBFILE PATH Where CALFILEPATH Calibration File Directory amp File Prefix amp Geometry amp clb LIBFILEPATH Library File Directory amp Library amp lib Each of the file path parameters are specified as command line parameters b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammavVision immediately File Prefix required The Geometry list is populated with Calibration Files starting with the File Prefix in the Calibration File directory without the file prefix or extension This parameter is also used to generate the Calibration File Path as described in the first command line parameter In order for this application to work properly the calibration files should use the Detector File Prefix as configured on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration Calibration File Directory required The Geometry list is populated with Calibration Files starting with the File Prefix in the Calibration File directory without the file prefix or exten
260. ntity 1000 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityOutputShow This flag is set to either T true or F false to show or hide the Analysis Quantity QuantityCalculationOutput field When this field is hidden the Quantity Output Units field is also hidden If the Quantity Output Units field is enabled then this flag should be set to T Example GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityOutputShow T GVSampleDataPlus_LiveTimePreset The Live Time Preset is the default preset in seconds If this field is not set or set equal to nothing then the Live Time Preset field is hidden and the application does not return Preset Job commands in the helper Job See Section B 7 1 Example GVSampleDataPlus_LiveTimePreset 3600 GVSampleDataPlus_ MaxDecayHours The Max Decay Hours specifies the maximum number of hours allowed between the Sample Date Time or Sample Collection Stop Time and the current time This parameter is useful for applications that require samples to be counted within a specified time period after collection Fractional hours are acceptable Examples GVSampleDataPlus_MaxDecayHours 2 GVSampleDataPlus_MaxDecayHours 0 5 Page B18 of B77 B 7 2 11 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMethod The Quantity Calculation Method dictates how the Analysis Quantity QuantityCalculationOutput value is calculated The options are as follows 1 None The Analysis Quantity field is enabled for direct entry modification by the analy
261. nu Example Quick Start Automation Process Automation processes sample counting spectrum re analysis QA measurement etc are initiated by Single Clicking the applicable item in the Automation Jobs list The following actions are performed by Quick Start to validate configure and launch the automation process in GammaVision 1 Determine if the automation process is for Reanalysis by looking for the parameter GVQuickStartReanalysis T This code is normally a standard parameter that also sets the Reanalysis Flag for all of the Global Value programs called throughout the automation process when using CFG files to initiate the process However it can also be located within commented lines of a standard JOB file that is run directly in GammaVision without modification 2 Determine if an Acquisition or Reanalysis Job is running for the selected detector on the current computer If yes then display a message indicating that a Job is already in progress and terminate the automation process Page A5 of A91 3 Determine if an Acquisition or Reanalysis Job is running for the selected detector on a different computer If yes then display a message indicating that a Job is already in progress along with the computer name that is running it and terminate the automation process See Note at the end of Section A 1 regarding manually resetting the Job Running flags in the event of abnormal termination of GammaVision or Global Value 4 Crea
262. o are fields populated with the specified data and the last three are linked to Analysis Data fields to update the respective parameters when a unique record is selected Note that the List fields display only the unique data for that parameter list as shown below When selections are made in the List fields the Field parameters and Linked parameters are updated accordingly 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BatchNumber Project Analysis ID Matrix Sample Desc Link Sample Quant Link Sample Quant Units Link List List Field Field Link Link Link Batch ID Project ID Analysis ID Matrix SAMPLEDESCRIPTION SAMPLEQUANTITY SAMPLEQUANTITYUNITS BatchID ProjectID AnalysisID Matrix B 12345 ProjectA AN 123 Liquid ABC Storm Drain 250 ml B 12345 ProjectB AN 234 Liquid DEF Storm Drain 1000 ml B 12345 Project C AN 345 Soil ABC Drain Sludge 483 g B 56789 ProjectA AN 456 Filter Tank 123 Crud 500 ml B 56789 ProjectB AN 567 Soil Area B3YZ Ditch 3 250 g B 56789 ProjectC AN 678 Liquid Area NN4 3 Drain 1L W0 300 wn pa o Figure B 8 2 24 2 3 Complex LIMS Input File Content m Custom Sample Data Batch ID y Project ID ARES X B 56789 Analysis ID Matrix Figure B 8 2 24 2 4 Custom Data Display List Fields limited to unique data m Custom Sample Data Batch ID p 12345 Project ID Project B Y Analysis ID AN 234 Matrix Liquid Figure B 8 2 24 2 5 Custom Data fields populated based on List Field selections Page B47 of B77 B 8 2 25
263. o confirm that the selected report template should be deleted from the list If YES is selected then the template is permanently deleted Save The template name and content are saved to the database Note that neither the template name nor the template content fields can be blank and the template name must be unique Page A31 of A91 Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes Eek s 5 Report Code Returned Data Z aS 6 ACQ_DONE Acquistion Complete Time XX X X X Report Format Regional Short Date and Time format hh mm ss XML CSV Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss ACTRANGE Activity Range Factor format 0 00 XK XK ACTUDIV1 Activity Units Divisor from analysis settings for first or only and X X X X X ACTUDIV2 second analysis format 0 0000E 00 ACTUMULT1 Activity Units Multiplier from analysis settings for first or only and X X X X X ACTUMULT2 second analysis format 0 0000E 00 ANALYST Analyst Name X X X X X JAU Activity Units i e Bq ml X X X X X BATCH Batch ID X X X X X CAL1 Calibration File Name for first or only and second analysis X X X X X CAL2 CAL1EFDate Efficiency Calibration Date Time for the First or only and second X X X X X CAL2EFDate Analysis Report Format Regional Short Date and Time format hh mm XML CSV Format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss CAL1ENDate Energy Calibration Date Time for the First or only
264. o run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty so the automation process is unaffected b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammaVision immediately Page B62 of B77 B 22 GV_GetRptData This program loads the analysis data from the most recent GammaVision analysis results for the specified detector The criteria for determining the most recent analysis result is determined by the detector specific analysis report file RPT extension in the GammaVision Analysis directory The detector specific directory and file prefix is specified on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration Once the correct analysis result is identified the results are retrieved from a combination of the analysis report UFO file and spectrum file In addition to the specific analysis parameters a complete image of the analysis report without the signature lines is also stored in the detector specific database When making a new measurement data that is not directly required for the spectrum analysis is stored in the database with a temporary spectrum ID This includes the sample data collected using any of the GV_Get programs i e GV_GetSiteUnit The final spectrum ID is determined as described above based on the most recent analysis results for the specified detector When the analysis results ar
265. ob list to set the focus to the associated instance of GammaVision Note that if the GammaVision window is minimized then the icon in the Windows taskbar gets the focus but the application window will still be minimized 11 When the automation Job completes and GammaVision is closed the Active Jobs list will automatically update to reflect the currently running Jobs This is possible because Quick Start keeps track of the particular instance of GammavVision that is running each Job Note If GammaVision was terminated abnormally i e using Task Manager then Quick Start will lose track of that particular instance of GammaVision Under this condition Task Manager must be used to shut down the Quick Start program in order to reset the Active Jobs list Otherwise the program will not allow a new Job for that detector to be started as it appears that a local Job is still running Although this is rare after a system is properly setup it is still possible in unforeseen circumstances This condition would also require the use of the GVDatabaseUtility described in Section A 9 to reset the applicable Job Running flag s Page A8 of A91 A 2 Sample Administration This Sample Administration program is the main interface for reviewing Sample Analysis Results and managing System Configuration settings except for QA Limit Report settings managed in the QA Administration program It is normally started by selecting the Samples button from Global
266. od for reviewing trend charts Simply enter the number of Page A67 of A91 7 seconds to pause on each chart and select the Start button The button face color will change to teal indicating that the slide show is in progress and the text changes to Stop The slide show will automatically cycle through each parameter of every QA Point for all detectors Select the Stop button to pause the slide show at any point The lt or gt buttons may also be used to manually navigate through each QA parameter instead of selecting parameters from the list If the Auto Print option is selected when the Slide Show is run then all of the charts are printed three charts per page with the Comments page included as the cover page if the Include Comments option is checked in the Print Options Print Options This option is only displayed when in the Chart View The Print Options provide a method for generating QA charts in the form of a report The report can be printed to the default printer or displayed in Microsoft Word depending on the selection If the Include Comments option is checked then all of the comments in the Lab Notebook for the selected detector within the date range of data displayed on the chart will be included on the report Chart Options a Show Data Points Data points on the measured value data series are displayed when this option is checked b Chart Legend The legend is displayed in the upper right corn
267. of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty as no further processing is necessary b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammavVision immediately Page B2 of B77 B 2 B 3 GVClearData When automation processes are run to analyze samples for the first time i e spectrum collection the non analysis data is initially stored as temporary records Non analysis data refers to any information that is not specifically passed to GammaVision which includes most of the editable fields in the Sample Administration Analysis Editor These records are linked to the Spectrum ID when the analysis has completed and results are transferred to Global Value If the automation process is interrupted before the analysis is competed then these temporary records could be inadvertently associated a subsequent analysis if different inputs were required for that analysis The GV_ClearData program deletes all of these temporary records to ensure that only those intended will be associated with the analysis results It should normally be run in the automation Job process prior to starting sample data input Note that temporary records are not used for rean
268. ogin and additional sample information unrelated to the analysis process which can be automatically displayed on custom reports Once the automation sequences are established using JOB files or Job Configuration Files and Job Templates they are easily launched using Global Value s Quick Start program which provides a simple interface for navigating automation routines and active processes After an analysis is performed using GammaVision s analysis engines key analysis parameters are stored in the Global Value databases and custom reports are automatically generated as text or PDF files displayed in Microsoft Word or sent to the default printer These reports are based on simple text templates that are easily modified by system administrators The Sample Administration module provides the interface for performing electronic reviews and data modifications in a secure environment complete with user names displayed on the final reports Some applications require data transfer to other systems or custom calculations which are beyond the capability of the standard custom reports Global Value features an Excel Add In which provides virtually unlimited capability for handling applications for customers familiar with developing Microsoft Excel spreadsheets or Visual Basic for Applications VBA programs ORTEC also offers additional services to generate turnkey calculations and applications Global Value s Quality Assurance QA module is intended
269. om this directory The file extension is omitted from the file name when displayed in the Library list Example GVSampleDataSC_LibraryDirectory LIBDIR where LIBDIR is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files GVSampleDataSC_DETRPTDIR This parameter is used to set the ReportFileName parameter in the SDF Data file The use of this file is described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 3 The full content of the SDF Data file is described in Section B 8 3 17 Example GVSampleDataSC_DETRPTDIR DETRPTDIR where DETRPTDIR is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files GVSampleDataSC_PBCDirectory This parameter specifies the directory where PBC Peak Background Files are stored It is used to create the content of a helper Job that is called in the automation Job created for reanalysis processes as described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 5 The full content of the helper Job is Load_PBC PBCDirectory PBCFilename Where the PBCDirectory is the directory specified for this parameter and PBCFileName is the name stored in Global Value for the previous analysis If PBC was not used for the previous analysis then the content of the helper Job is blank Example GVSampleDataSC_PBCDirectory PBCDIR where PBCDIR is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file
270. omma delimited string of all unidentified peak energies associated with the specified SpectrumID along with any resolution text with the peak energy and resolution text separated by a dash character The GVParseList function can be used to extract specific items from the list Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumiD arguments The database is detector specific Example Spreadsheet formula GVUnidentifiedPeakList A1 A2 A3 returns a comma delimited list of all unidentified peaks and associated resolution comments separated by the dash character Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database F21 GVUnidentifiedPeak GVUnidentifiedPeak DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID ListID This function returns the unidentified peak associated with the specified SpectrumID and ListID along with any resolution text The GVParseList function can be used to extract the peak energy and resolution text Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumID arguments The database is detector specific ListID is a number that identifies the position of an item within the list Example Spreadsheet formula GVUnidentifiedPeak A1 A2 A3 1 returns the first unidentified peak energy
271. omments regarding specific batch scripting implemented can be found within the batch file Batch File Description The batch file requires the backup Destination path as a command line argument The shortcut provided for backups in the default configuration files uses the path C User GVNetworkFiles SystemBackups System1 User which is created when the Default Configuration Files option is selected during installation This path should be changed to a valid network location during the system configuration The source directory to be copied is specified within the batch file near the beginning of the batch script as shown below echo off Set DestDir 1 Set SourceDir C User This path can be modified directly in the batch file or converted to read another comma delimited command line parameter as follows echo off Set DestDir 1 Set SourceDir 2 After the Destination and Source directories are set a message is displayed in the command window using the script shown below Note that the message can be modified during the system configuration to meet site specific needs cls echo echo echo ENSURE THAT ALL GLOBAL VALUE APPLICATIONS ARE CLOSED echo echo THIS WINDOW WILL CLOSE AUTOMATICALLY WHEN BACKUP IS COMPLETE echo echo CLOSING THIS WINDOW MANUALLY WILL TERMINATE THE BACKUP echo echo pause Backing Up SourceDir kkk kkk Page A87 of A91 The message is displayed
272. on Dates Times Sample Quantity and Quantity Units for analysis will be written to the SDF file which is subsequently loaded into GammaVision in the helper Job See Section B 7 1 This file path should be unique for each detector so that Jobs running on other systems will not inadvertently modify this file before it is read into GammaVision during the automation process Examples GVSampleDataPlus_SDFFilePath C User GVCR Temp 1_Run sdf GVSampleDataPlus_SDFFilePath GVCopySDF_Destination The second example shows how a parameter variable from Quick Start configuration files can be used to set the file path This parameter must be defined in the configuration file passed to the program In this example this parameter is the destination path in the Run_GVCopyFile program definition Early in the main automation Job a template SDF file is normally copied from the default location to a temporary folder with the detector name specified as a prefix to ensure that it is unique for this process GVSampleDataPlus_JOBFilePath This parameter requires the full path to a helper Job that is called when the program closes See Section B 7 1 for file content Example GVSampleDataPlus_JOBFilePath GLOBALVALUEDIR TEMP DETNO _SampleData Job This example demonstrates how parameter variables from Quick Start configuration files can be used to define the file path These parameters must be defined in the configuration file passed to the program
273. on Groups list Any files with the JOB or CFG extension in the main Job directory will be displayed in the Automation Jobs list Clicking on the subfolders in the Automation Groups expands that folder to show additional subfolders and updates the Automation Jobs list with JOB and CFG files within that subfolder An expanded folder can be collapsed by double clicking on it This mini Windows Explorer style interface allows automation routines to be logically grouped in multiple subfolders such that the user can drill down to the appropriate predefined automation process to accomplish a specific task such as counting specific types of samples re analyzing spectra or running QA NOTE Files with the JOB extension are Job Files that can be run by GammaVision without modification or they may contain parameter codes that are translated at run time in the same way that Job Templates are merged with Configuration Files Files with the CFG extension are referred to as Job Configuration Files which specify a path to a Job Template and set variable parameter values to merge with the template as described in Section B 31 for GVTemplateMaster Single clicking an item in the Automation Jobs list will dynamically create and run an automation Job in GammaVision as described in Section A 1 2 Once GammaVision has been started the Active Jobs list is updated to show the Detector name and Job that is currently active When that instance of GammaVision is closed the r
274. on Job for the next sample This parameter is set equal to nothing for the last sample in the queue so that the automation Job process returns to the main automation Job where the QUIT command is normally set to close GammaVision upon completion of the counting processes Page B49 of B77 B 8 3 5 GVSampleDataSCOut_LISTINDEX Position within the Sample Queue list buffered to two places i e 01 B 8 3 6 GVSampleDataSCOut_SPECTRUMNAME This parameter provides a standard spectrum file naming convention as follows Note Other methods for defining spectrum file names can be used in lieu of this option For example in some applications it is useful to include some of the other GVSampleDataSCOut parameters including the Analysis Method or one of the parameters specified from the LIMS integration in combination with the Date parameters generated by Quick Start and the GVSampleDataSCOut_LISTINDEX parameter from Section B 8 3 5 1 When a single sample is counted the spectrum name consists of the Detector Spectrum Prefix See Section B 8 2 3 followed by the Start Date Year Start Date Month Start Date Day and Daily Spectrum counter These are the same parameters generated by Quick Start when an automation Job is initiated See Section A 1 Example GVSampleDataSCOut_SPECTRUMNAME 3_ STARTDATE_YEAR STARTDATE_MONTH STARTDATE_DAY _ DAYSPECTRUMCOUNTERBUFFERED3 2 When multiple samples are counted the same spectrum naming conven
275. on as specified in the GammaVision User Manual With the new detector window active in GammaVision configure the Acquisition Settings as specified in Section 2 2 3 Create a new folder in the root Job directory C User Job if using the Default Configuration with the name DetX where X is the detector number Copy the applicable Job Configuration files from an existing detector to the new Detector Job folder and make detector specific modifications as necessary For example the Window size and position parameters may need to be modified if used and the QA source information may be different Create calibration files in the calibration directory C User Cal if using the Default Configuration using the same naming convention as existing calibration files for other detectors Typically the naming convention is X_Geometry_Y where X is the detector number and Y is the position designator The only difference in calibration file names for different detectors is the detector number Note that temporary calibration files may be used for testing by copying existing calibration files from a different detector If this approach is used then the calibration files should be copied by opening the calibration file within GammaVision and then saving each file to the new detector file name This is required because GammaVision retains a copy of the file path internally and copying these files outside of GammaVision i e using Windows Explorer will
276. on program The following command buttons are available to manage detector settings Add Add a new detector to the list and set the field parameters Settings must be saved after all of fields have been populated Edit Change parameters for an existing detector All of the parameters are disabled when selecting a detector until the Edit button is selected to prevent inadvertent changes to these critical parameters Delete Completely remove the detector configuration from the working database Deleting the detector from the configuration does not actually delete any analysis information nor does it delete the database associated with that detector or any files that may have been created outside of the database When a detector is deleted from the configuration that detector will no longer be available in the Quick Start program Sample or QA Administration programs or Excel Add In functions after the databases are synchronized Save Save changes made by Adding or Editing a detector configuration This button is only displayed after Add or Edit button is selected Cancel Discard changes in the Add or Edit detector configuration mode This button is only displayed after Add or Edit button is selected The following Database Tools are provided for the currently selected detector These tools are disabled when in the Edit mode Archive This function allows you to save the database for the selected detector to another file name simil
277. onal Copy a Sample Default File SDF template to a detector specific file in the TEMP directory Change various default parameters within the TEMP SDF Prompt for Sample data using GVSampleData GVSampleDataPlus or GVSampleDataSC programs and load the updated TEMP SDF file into GammaVision 7 Clear temporary data associated with any previously canceled measurements from the Database so this data doesn t get associated with the current sample 8 Load the Energy FWHM and Efficiency Calibrations as well as the Library 9 Prompt for Optional Non Analysis Input data such as Radiation Work Permits Radiation Monitor Readings Comments etc 10 Load the Peak Background Correction File 11 Wait until the acquisition has completed then Save the Spectrum and Analyze 12 Update the Daily Monthly and Annual counter registers in the Global Value detector database 13 Load the spectrum analysis results from the text report spectrum and UFO file to the Global Value Database 14 Create the Custom Report Summary based on the specified Report Template 15 Optionally print the report or save to one of the supported formats 16 Open a predefined Excel workbook to automate further calculations or reports based on the current analysis results 17 Run the Sample Publisher program to generate additional reports in the supported formats and run custom programs DOV BO Ns S Page 19 of 30 The Default Configuration Files contain
278. oncnnnonnnononnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnns F17 F25 GVRWPLI St e a F17 26 A O F18 F27 GVRadMonitorListCount cccooccccoccccconcncconcncconnnccnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnonnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnononinns F18 F28 GVRadMonitorList ccoooccccccncncoonncconnncconnnccononononnncononnnnnnnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns F19 ELIO RAM da F19 Fa0 GVPopulateDet ectorList aiii A A A AAA A AAA AAA F20 F31 GVPopulateSpectrumList oooocccccnncccncoconocccccnnnncnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnns F20 F32 GVGenerateSPeCHrUMLISE ci A bas F21 Page F1 of F21 Appendix F Notes 1 TOO To enable the functionality in the Excel Add In a reference must be established to the GlobalValue xla file as follows a Open the Visual Basic Editor in Excel In Excel 2007 and later select the Visual Basic icon in the Code section of the Developer tab on the ribbon If the Developer tab is not visible then it can be enabled from the Options page FilelOptions menu Customize Ribbon tab in the Main Tabs list b In the Visual Basic Editor select the menu item ToolslReferences In the References dialog select the Browse button In the Browser dialog change the Files of Type dropdown list to Microsoft Excel Files xlsm xlam xis xla or All Files Browse to C User GVCR GlobalValue xla Select the Oper but
279. onfiguration etc but not spectrum analysis are not required to have GammaVision installed However some operations on remote computers will still attempt to locate GammaVision as part of the integrated validation process To avoid error messages displayed if GammaVision is not found a text file can be created with the name GV32 exe and stored anywhere on the local computer This file can then be selected if prompted by the Sample Administration program Prior to setting configuration parameters using Global Value a few parameters must be established in GammaVision to ensure that these programs interface properly This requires particular parameters to be set in the B30Winds ini file Global Analysis parameters SDF files sample specific analysis parameters Acquisition Settings for each detector and File Settings as described in the subsections that follow B30Winds ini File Configuration The B30Winds ini file contains analysis settings that are used for every analysis performed in GammaVision This file is located in the GammaVision installation directory C Program Files GammavVision or C Program Files x86 GammaVision and can be modified using any text editor such as Notepad The GammaVision User Manual has details related to these analysis settings but a few parameters are discussed here due to the integration requirements with Global Value Page 9 of 30 2 2 2 Item 19 Save UFO File Flag must be set to T If this p
280. onfiguration files and rarely require changes The main RUN program parameters are often included in the Job Configuration Files in order to simplify minor changes to the automation process by turning various functions off or on The following parameters for example may be included in the Job Template to generate the code Page 27 of 30 that will prompt for Radiation Monitor data and RWP entries as defined in 4 GlobalValueFunctions cfg Run_GVGetRadMonitor Run_GVGetRWP These prompts can then be optionally disabled for specific sample types by adding the equal sign after the parameter in the Job Configuration file as shown below Run_GVGetRadMonitor Run_GVGetRWP When the Job is created these parameters will be replaced with empty space instead of the code defined in the Global Configuration files such that very comprehensive Job Templates are easily configured for specific measurement processes GVSampleDataSC program interface When using the GVSampleDataSC program interface for sample measurements there are typically only a few parameters that are modified in the Job Configuration file such as the methods file path and Continue commands These parameters use the GVSampleDataSC prefix as described previously The majority of the configuration changes for the GVSampleDataSC interface are accomplished in the methods file The default methods file which is defined in the Job Configuration File is GVSampleD
281. ontent Since the configuration file passed to the program is typically a copy of the configuration file generated by Quick Start it should include all of the parameters normally expected in Job Templates when combined with those added by GVSampleDataSC The output configuration file is generated in the same directory as the application with a name of GVSampleDataSC cfg for acquisition processes or GVSampleDataSCReanalysis cfg for reanalysis processes It is overwritten for each sample prior to use in creating automation Jobs The parameters generated by GVSampleDataSC for samples are as follows B 8 3 1 GVSampleDataSCOut_COUNTPOSITION Position within the Sample Queue list B 8 3 2 GVSampleDataSCOut_SAMPLEPOSITION Position within the Sample Queue list Same as COUNTPOSITION B 8 3 3 GVSampleDataSCOut_NEXTPOSITION Next position in the Sample Queue list i e COUNTPOSITION 1 B 8 3 4 GVSampleDataSCOut_NEXTJOB This parameter is used to allow automation Jobs for each sample position to link to the next Job The parameter is set to the Call Job command followed by the Job File Path with the NEXTPOSITION value appended The following is an example of the content for the first of two samples in the queue GVSampleDataSCOut_NextJob Call C User GVCR Temp 3_SampleDataSC2 job When this parameter is used as the last step in the Job Templates the automation Job for the first sample would automatically call the automati
282. oolbar on the Window s Desktop to keep it in the forefront Workstations configured for remote data access do not use this application because they do not have a need to generate automation processes Instead they would normally utilize direct links Window s shortcuts to the applicable data management applications Figure A 1 2 Global Value Quick Start Header The Quick Start header contains customizable menus a Detector pick list an option to keep the application at the forefront and buttons to launch the Sample Administration and QA Administration programs described in sections A 2 and A 4 respectively The menus are configured as simple shortcuts to launch programs or open files as described in the Quick Start Configuration Section A 1 1 The Always On Top checkbox is checked with the default configuration In this condition the application remains at the forefront of the screen even when other applications are running Uncheck this checkbox to view other applications in full screen mode or overlap the Quick Start program The checkbox status is stored in the GVSampleAdmin INI file using the parameter GVMenuWindowState The list of Detectors is populated based on the configuration established in the default database When populating this list any detector whose Job file path is not valid will be omitted from this list This allows a limited list of detectors to be displayed in the list when certain detectors are not accessible i
283. or ID l 7 20 2012 07 20 09 8 5 2012 14 43 53 8 22 2012 14 32 37 10 6 2012 15 26 19 10 23 2012 15 18 58 Print Options int Uptions MS Word Print dies Filled dewar with LN2 and rechecked DA satisfactorily Placed new GA source in service ID 12345 123 Recalibrated Detector 11 Changed Difference calculation method to Meas T arget T arget Date Time Comments Recalculated limits for 662 kev peak due to shift in performance Figure A 4 2 1 Lab Notebook The following options are available with the Lab Notebook Detector ID The detector list is populated based on all of the detectors configured in the current database When a detector is selected all of the comments meeting the Date Range criteria are displayed in the grid Date Range The date range options are identical to those described for the QA Charts Section A 4 4 with the default settings based on the current QA Chart settings Page A65 of A91 New Comment Select this button to add a new comment record to the end of the list The current user name and the date time are automatically set and cannot be changed New comments can only be added if the current user belongs to a group with permission to ADD Data Comment Grid This grid displays the comments meeting the Date Range criteria If the current user belongs to a security group with permission to EDIT DATA then comments associated with their name can be edited by selecting the co
284. or the text specified in the ContinueCommand parameter followed by the path to a dynamically generated Job file for the first sample in the queue Example GVSampleDataSC_JobFilePath GLOBALVALUEDIR Temp DETNO _SampleDataSC TempFileSuffix job where each parameter is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files GVSampleDataSC_CalibrationDirectory This parameter specifies the directory to search for valid calibration files associated with the applicable detector This relationship between the calibration file name and the detector is based on the file name prefix matching the required detector prefix See Section B 8 2 3 The Geometry list on the application s interface is populated with all of the files with clb extension and the specified File Prefix within this directory The file prefix and extension is omitted from the file name when displayed in the Geometry list Example GVSampleDataSC_CalibrationDirectory CALDIR where CALDIR is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files Page B37 of B77 B 8 2 7 B 8 2 8 B 8 2 9 GVSampleDataSC_LibraryDirectory This parameter specifies the directory to search for valid library files The Library list on the application s interface is populated with all of the files with lib extension fr
285. ormed on the database which is currently connected to the QA Administration program path is shown on the menu bar Load Archived Database A dialog is displayed to select an archived QA database The new database path is displayed in the menu bar and a connection is established All operations performed in the QA Administration program after loading an archived database are implemented only in the database currently connected Page A75 of A91 A 5 QA Publisher Previous versions of Global Value did not include the standard publishing program as this functionality was originally intended for custom development for special applications Based on experience with many custom installations over the years Global Value now provides a default publisher program that satisfies the most common requirements without customization If additional functionality is required the publisher provides the capability to launch other applications after the published files have been rendered to common file structures that are easily processed This approach allows site personnel to develop their own custom applications without having to understand the underlying details associated with extracting information from Global Value databases When QA reports are published from the Global Value QA Administration program the publisher program is automatically run with the full path to the published PDF report passed as a command line parameter The default publisher program re
286. ors must be assigned to Adjustment Tables that define the adjustment or correction factors Several tables are defined in the database installed with the default configuration files These tables are EXAMPLES ONLY and are not intended as a technical reference for any particular application All adjustment factors employed in a production environment MUST be verified to meet the specific site needs based on procedural and regulatory requirements as well as the library configuration established for sample analysis Page A28 of A91 ADJUSTMENT TABLES are managed using the buttons from this group in Figure A 2 3 4 1 as follows Add A prompt is displayed to enter a new table name Names should generally be kept short as they will be used as special codes on the report templates See Section A 2 3 5 Only alpha numeric characters may be used in the name with no spaces The new table name will be added to the list but it is not saved to the database and cannot be edited or nuclides added until it is saved Edit A prompt is displayed to change the name of the selected table This prompt is also displayed by double clicking on a table name After changing a table name the table list must be saved before changes can be made to the nuclide list for that table Delete The selected table name will be appended with _Delete to indicate that this table will be completely removed from the database when the table list is saved Restore This option res
287. ouble clicking on an item in the list No changes are made in the database until the list is saved Delete A dialog is displayed to confirm that the selected nuclide will be deleted from the list If YES is selected then the nuclide name is set to Deleted and the adjustment factor value is set to zero No changes are made in the database until the list is saved Save The list of adjustment factors for the selected table is saved to the database Any nuclides listed as Deleted are permanently removed and all items added or changed in the list are saved Print A report is generated with all Nuclide Adjustment Factors associated with the selected Adjustment Table and Detector to the specified Destination If the Destination is set to the PDF or Text File options then a standard Windows dialog will be displayed to specify to the desired location If the Open File After Save option is checked then the PDF or Text file will be opened using the default program for opening these types of files similar to opening one of these files directly from Windows Explorer Note that Microsoft Word must be installed to use the MS Word option Page A29 of A91 A 2 3 5 Detectors Report Templates Report Templates are simple text templates that define the data and layout of the Global Value custom report summaries Special Parameter Codes are used to return analysis data from the database and all other text is displayed on the report exact
288. ount of data being updated If any errors occur during the synchronization process then a message is displayed at the bottom of the window If necessary correct the connection issue and select the Update button Selected databases updated to synchronize changes again It is important to J ensure that all databases are updated or the Figure A 2 1 2 Synchronize Password login credentials will not be the same on all systems Page A11 of A91 A 2 2 Sample Administration Data Management NOTE If a Detector Description is specified on the command line when running the Sample Administration program then the Analysis Editor is automatically displayed with the specified detector selected in the Detector list as shown in Figure A 2 2 1 The Analysis Editor can also be accessed by selecting the forth toolbar button as shown in Figure A 2 2 or the View Samples menu E o Global Value Sample Administration Analysis Editor File View Login Change Password Database Path C User GVCR Databases GlobalValuel mdb Current User Admin User Group Administrator MS HPGe tt Signature Spectrum Review All Publish ff Punisar M EOLAS Analysis Report Sample Data Nuclide Data Unidentified Peaks Custom Data Change Summary Viewer Font Size 49 lt 4 Spectrum 1 2014 01 30 001 Sample ID AB 123 Record Type Total Pages PAGES Report Content MV Summary Von Site Name Details Spectrum Department Na
289. out to the main Excel interface Page 12 of 30 3 3 1 A PROCESS OVERVIEW Global Value is an add on product to GammaVision so it is important to understand a few details about GammaVision to help clarify how these products work together to improve data management and productivity In the simplest of terms GammaVision s core purpose is to acquire and analyze high resolution spectra while Global Value manages the data and automation processes These functions are described in more detail in the remainder of this section GammaVision Process Overview GammavVision provides the functions necessary for hardware control calibration library and analysis configuration and automation to support its primary objective of spectrum analysis The main inputs and outputs of this analysis process are shown Figure 3 1 1 followed by a brief explanation of each parameter Refer to the GammaVision User Manual for additional detail regarding spectrum analysis and the functions required to establish these input parameters Figure 3 1 1 GammaVision Process Overview The Spectrum is the acquisition data received from an instrument It contains the channel by channel histogram hardware and acquisition settings and several other analysis parameters GammaVision may acquire the data directly from a detector or load a previously saved spectrum file for analysis The Analysis Settings includes all of the peak search parameters decay correction option
290. pared to the existing files to ensure that new functionality in the automation Job programs is properly configured with the correct parameters Generally the best approach is to start with the new Default Configuration Files and apply changes necessary to duplicate the site specific requirements previously implemented If desired the system can be reconfigured using one of the default data entry interfaces similar to a new installation rather than duplicate the legacy automation routines as the new interfaces offer more functionality and options than the previous versions Page 7 of 30 2 1 Open the Quick Start program and verify operation by running the automation Jobs and accessing any shortcuts established on the custom menu system Review and optionally Publish analysis results from the Sample and QA Administration programs search for results using the Analysis Log and monitor Detector and QA status by running the applicable utility programs from the Quick Start menus Installation NOTES 1 Installation normally requires a User account with Administrative rights In Windows 7 the option to Run as Administrator can be used for the installation process if necessary 2 Refer Section 2 for additional configuration steps to complete after the program installation Start the installation by running the self extracting installation program i e GlobalValuelnstallation7 0 0 exe This file is available from the installation disk
291. pectrumID arguments The database is detector specific Example Spreadsheet formula B1 GVParseList GVNuclideDataList A1 A2 A3 1 returns the comma delimited NuclideData data string described in F17 for the first nuclide in the list Spreadsheet formula B2 GVParseList B1 1 returns lt if the standard nuclide activity for the first nuclide in the NuclideDataList was reported as lt MDA Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database F19 GVUnidentifiedPeakListCount GVUnidentifiedPeakListCount DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID This function returns the total number of unidentified peaks associated with the specified SpectrumID Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumiD arguments The database is detector specific Example Spreadsheet formula GVUnidentifiedPeakListCount A1 A2 A3 returns the number of unidentified peaks associated with the specified Spectrum ID Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database Page F14 of F21 F20 GVUnidentifiedPeakList GVUnidentifiedPeakList DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID This function returns a c
292. plates tab If an invalid template name is specified then the dialog shown in Figure B 24 1 is displayed to allow the analyst to select a pre defined template name Page B64 of B77 B 25 3 This program currently allows Report Template files with the cus extension to be used for backward compatibility The file content must follow the same configuration rules as the report templates defined in the database Re Analysis Flag optional f set to T true then the spectrum ID used for generating the report summary is based on the most recent selection in the GVRecallSpectrum program If set to F false then the spectrum ID used for generating the report summary is based on the most recent analysis See Section B 22 for more information regarding the spectrum ID determination Print_Rpt This program sends the report to a text or PDF File Microsoft Word or the default printer as specified by the command line arguments All of the same options for generating reports are available from the Analysis Editor in the Sample Administration program Print_Rpt has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 2 3 4 6 7 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required The database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector Report Filename This parameter is no longer used and should be blank Report Type optional The following report types
293. ple Queue position appended 3 A text file containing analysis data is created for each sample in the queue The file name for each sample is the same as the Job File Path parameter See Section B 8 2 5 with _SDFData and the Sample Queue position appended These files must be passed to the GVSDFData program See Section B 9 in the sample specific Jobs created in Step 1 See Section B 8 3 17 for the full content and format of this file 4 A text file containing custom data is created for each sample in the queue The file name for each sample is the same as the Job File Path parameter See Section B 8 2 5 with _CustomData and the Sample Queue position appended These files must be passed to the GV_GetCustomData program See Section B 21 in the sample specific Jobs created in Step 1 See Section B 8 3 16 for the full content and format of this file 5 When reanalyzing samples a Job file is created to load the PBC file used in the previous analysis See Section B 8 2 10 for file path and content 6 If more than one sample has been added to the Sample Queue then a report showing the full list of samples is printed to the default printer 7 A helper Job is created which calls the automation Job generated in the Step 1 for the first sample in the queue If multiple samples were in the queue then the automation Job for each subsequent sample is called at the end of the current sample Job See Section B 8 3 for applicable Job Te
294. pler ID spip Default Monitor List Site Units List Add SPING 1 Add Unit 1 SPING 2 Unit 2 Remove pen Remove Figure A 2 3 7 1 Misc Tab NOTE Changes made on this tab are automatically saved to the current database The following parameters are available on this tab e Default Database Path This field requires the full path to the default Master Global Value database The path can be entered directly or use the button next to this field to browse for the specified database file This database is used read by the Quick Start and Sample Administration programs on startup to load configuration data such as the Detector list and associated properties It is normally one of the detector databases used for storing analysis data for samples not a Quality Assurance database When the default database path is changed a connection to the new database is automatically attempted so that the Sample Admin program doesn t have to be closed and reopened for the change to take effect If the path is not valid then a prompt to browse to the default database will be displayed If a valid database is not selected then the database path reverts back to the default before the change NOTE A different database can be used as the default when opening the Sample Administration program by specifying the full path on the command line as described in Section A 2 but this method is not recommended for a standard configuration NOTE This parameter
295. prompting for user response with a message GVAskConfirm Ensure that the sample is on the detector Contact RP when the acquisition is started at Ext 3456 Figure B 11 1 GVAskConfirm Prompt GVAskConfirm has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty as no further processing is necessary b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammavVision immediately Message required Prompt for user response formed as a question where the Yes No answer is expected to perform the actions described above Pipe characters may be used for force a new line in the message Page B55 of B77 B 12 GVGetConfiguration This program prompts the user for a Geometry and Library to use for analysis r Global Value Analysis Configuration Geometry 50 miPolyB ottle_0 y Library IN atural y OK Cancel Figure B 12 1 GVGetConfiguration Prompt GVGetConfiguration has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 5 Full Path to Job File required The co
296. putFileExtension4 pdf Run application to process the XML file RunAppPath1 C User GVCR XMLProcessor exe RunAppEnabled1 T RunAppCommandLineParameter1 OutputFilePath1 Run application to process the CSV file with additional command line parameters RunAppPath2 C User GVCR CSVProcessor exe RunAppEnabled2 T RunAppCommandLineParameter2 DETNO RunAppCommandLineParameter2 SpectrumID RunAppCommandLineParameter2 OutputFileName2 RunAppCommandLineParameter2 OutputFileDirectory2 RunAppCommandLineParameter2 OutputFilePath2 RunAppCommandLineParameter2 TRUE The last parameter is a static flag for some condition or status required by the application Page A57 of A91 A 4 QA Administration The QA Administration program is the main interface for reviewing QA data and managing QA settings It is normally started by selecting the QA button from Global Value Quick Start on lab computers used for sample measurements or from a Windows Shortcut on remote access computers used for data review When started from a Windows shortcut the default view is normally as shown in Figure A 4 1 When started from Quick Start the program opens with the QA Chart view displayed and the current Quick Start detector selected by default The program can accept two optional comma delimited command line arguments listed in any order 1 Full Path to a target QA database This path is required to identify a production QA database for
297. quantity calculations include adjustment by a multiplier and divisor to correct for collection efficiency sample plateout dry wet ratio etc Various flags in the application s configuration file determine which Global Value Sample Data fields are displayed on the user interface and how sample volume Description HP Air Sample 123 zl calculations will be implemented Collection Start Time 1 1 2011 08 00 Collection Stop Time 1472011 0810 When the application is started the Analysis Quantity interface shown in Figure B 7 1 is Calculation Method Fiowate displayed Several fields may be hidden depending on flags set in the application s configuration file described in section B 7 1 These flags allow the user interface to be a 1000 fae customized for specific sample types and determine how the analysis OK a quantity will be calculated when ESA ME applicable Sample Flowrate 2 Sampler Efficiency 0 9 Media Corr Factor 995 Figure B 7 1 GVSampleDataPlus Interface GVSampleDataPlus has the following command line parameter 1 Full Path to Configuration File required The configuration file must contain the parameters described in section B 7 2 This file should be unique to ensure that it is not overwritten by other processes prior to use GVSampleDataPlus Operation GVSampleDataPlus is run from within GammaVision automation Jobs and displays the interface shown in Figure B 7 1 When the program is close
298. quires this PDF report path to use only the Spectrum ID as the file name This file naming convention is used by default but it is possible to change the published PDF file name in the QA Administration Configuration If the file name is changed to anything other than only the Spectrum ID then the publisher program will not behave as expected Additionally the Spectrum ID must start with the detector number followed by an underscore i e 1_ for Detector 1 This is normally accomplished by configuring the File Prefix as X_ where X is the detector number on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration and then using the DETSPECTRUMPREFIX parameter generated by Quick Start as the first parameter in generating the Spectrum ID The publisher program GVPublishQA resides in the installation directory with all of the other Global Value programs and has an INI file by the same name The settings in the INI file determine which files are generated when the publisher runs and which applications will be launched File types that can be generated include PDF Text XML and CSV After the publisher has generated the required reports and launched the specified programs the original PDF file created by the QA Administration program is deleted to avoid a large number of unnecessary files accumulating on the local workstation GVPublishSampleQA has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Full Path to PDF Repor
299. quisition and analysis automation processes perform the following a Ensure that GammaVision and CONNECTIONS are installed and operational b Configure GammaVision in accordance with Section 2 2 to ensure proper handshaking with Global Value Install Global Value per Section 2 1 Installation IMPORTANT NOTE If upgrading from a previous version of Global Value or restoring databases from a previous version the following MUST be performed A After ensuring that no counting operations are in progress open the Sample Administration program and synchronize all databases This process will automatically update the database structure for compatibility with the features available in this version of Global Value Note that this process can take several minutes with large databases and the process must be allowed to complete once it started to ensure that the structure is fully updated B Open the QA Administration program with a connection to each QA database The database structure for this version of Global Value will automatically be updated when the program opens Modify the default configuration as described in Section 3 3 and Section 4 to establish the appropriate automation processes as well as security custom reporting data integration Quality Control and System Maintenance requirements When installing Global Value as an upgrade the Global Configuration Files and Job Templates provided with the new installation should be com
300. re SDFDIR must be defined in the Quick Start Configuration file If this parameter is omitted then the default SDF file path See B 8 2 12 is used to set the GVSampleDataSCOut_SDFDATAFILEPATH parameter Geometry The Geometry is the default Calibration File name excluding the directory path File Prefix as defined for each detector in Global Value Configuration and the file extension If omitted or a valid geometry is not specified then no default selection is made in the Geometry dropdown list Library The Library is the default Library File name excluding the directory path and file extension If omitted or a valid library is not specified then no default selection is made in the Library dropdown list Page B33 of B77 B 8 2 4 5 B 8 2 4 6 B 8 2 4 7 B 8 2 4 8 B 8 2 4 9 B 8 2 4 10 B 8 2 4 11 Quantity The default quantity must be numeric if set If omitted the Analysis Quantity field is blank When using Flowrate calculations this field is ignored Quantity Units This parameter sets the default units for the Sample Quantity and Analysis Quantity The dropdown list for the Analysis Quantity Units is populated from the Flow Units File See Section B 8 2 16 when the Flowrate calculation is implemented The dropdown list for the Sample Quantity Units is populated from the Sample Size Units File See Section B 8 2 15 when the Flowrate calculation is not implemented Activity Units The default activity uni
301. re A 4 7 1 QA Limits Page A71 of A91 A 4 7 1 QA Points When Background QA is run the overall spectrum count rate is determined by summing all of the channel counts and dividing by the Live Time This count rate or a percent difference from a target count rate can then be monitored for the Background QA using the Bkgd QA Point QAPeak measurements store data for all QA Points that match a nuclide name in the GammaVision analysis results Since these QA Points are intended to represent a specific spectrum peak it is important that each nuclide in the GammaVision library used for the QA measurement has only that peak of interest and no others With this configuration the nuclide in the library is also typically named for the peak energy rather than the actual nuclide name For example the Y 88 1836 kev peak would be configured with a nuclide name of QA 1836 with only the 1836 kev peak defined Multiple peak nuclides like Eu 152 would require several nuclide names such as QA 122 QA 778 QA 1408 etc with each having only the associated peak energy listed If more than one peak is listed for the QA analysis library then the data will not be accurately transferred to the database After establishing the necessary libraries for each Detector QA in GammaVision the QA Points can be established by selecting the Detector ID and editing the QA Point list by selecting the Edit List button The Detector Nuclide Editor shown in Detector Nuclid
302. re B 26 2 If a path is not provided then a prompt A B Cc D similar to that shown in Figure B 26 1 is Moon EE EEE AS displayed The parameters in the grid are 3 Sample 1173 9 130 33 automatically copied to the clipboard when 4 _N Lt Ls selected to allow pasting the data into Figure B 26 2 GrossGamma Excel another program B 27 GVQAPeaks This program collects the applicable QA information for spectrum peaks and generates the QA report Similar to the GV_GetRptData program See Section B 22 the applicable data is read from the most recent analysis results in the specified location The QA report content is determined by the configuration established in the QA Administration program See Section A 4 5 which specifies the report header QA Points Limits and other reporting options such as whether the detailed GammavVision report is included with the QA report GVQAPeaks has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Detector ID required This is the Detector number specified in the MCB Configuration which is also the Detector ID specified in Sample Administration Configuration on the Detectors tab 2 Full Path to the QA Database required The QA database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector 3 Report Destination optional Any of the following parameters are acceptable e WORD Displays report in MSWord e NONE No report will be displayed or prin
303. records are affected Similar to the Groups editor described above the buttons on the Users tab change to Save Cancel as shown in Figure A 2 3 1 2 Any changes must be synchronized to the other databases as described in Section A 2 3 9 Note that this synchronization can be performed after all changes have been saved not after each individual change is saved When new users are established a default password can be set with the expectation that the user will change and synchronize their own password as described in Section A 2 1 A report summarizing the Users and associated Groups can be printed or displayed in Microsoft Word if installed by selecting the appropriate sort order destination and then the Print button Page A23 of A91 A 2 3 2 Detector Parameters Each detector that will use Global Value to store analysis results must be configured on the Detectors tab All fields are required except for the File Prefix which is highly recommended and some must be unique for each detector as identified by the blue fields shown in Figure A 2 3 2 1 Detectors Sample Types Nuc Adj Factors Report Templates PDF Properties Custom Fields Detector Description TIRE y Add Edit Delete Detector Number Archi File Prefix 7 Active Compact Purge lt 112122014 y Database Tools Database C User GVCR Databases GlobalValue1 mdb Analysis Report Path ser SPC Dett Custom R
304. rid is color coded depending on the QA Status as follows Red Any parameter is Out of Control OOC Yellow Any parameter is Out of Tolerance OOT and none are OOC Magenta QA Peak or QA Background is Overdue but neither is OOT or OOC White All parameters passed and are within the required due date A 6 1 1 Configuration File Content The Configuration file consists of the following parameters which are enclosed in pipe characters similar to those used in other Global Value configuration files SampleDatabasePath is the full path to one of the Global Value detector databases that store sample data This parameter is for backward compatibility only The current version of this program uses the default database specified in the Sample Administration Configuration Manager on the Misc tab QAPeakMaxHours and QABackgroundMaxHours are the maximum number of hours allowed between QA Peak and Background evaluations measurements respectively DetectorNumberList is a comma delimited list of detector numbers to include in the QA Summary to restrict the list to a subset of the full detector list If no detector numbers are provided then all detectors will be shown in the QA Summary Example Configuration SampleDatabasePath C User GVCR Databases GlobalValue1 mdb QAPeakMaxHours 30 QABackgroundMaxHours 30 DetectorNumberList Page A82 of A91 A 7 Analysis Log Global Value s Analysis Log is an Excel workbook t
305. rmines which QA Type Peak or Background reporting options are being displayed edited Report Header Lines 1 3 These are the first three lines of the QA report which are horizontally centered Custom Text Field 1 4 These fields provide four lines of custom text that immediately precede the QA data table All lines are horizontally aligned to the left Typically these fields are used as operator aids to specify corrective actions in the event of a failed QA measurement Document Code Text in this field is aligned to the right of the Spectrum file name This field is intended to display a Record Type or Document Control code as determined by the site record keeping system but may be used for other purposes Perform Signature This text is displayed below the QA data table on the left side If an electronic signature is applied to the report i e if a login is required by the QA Automation Job then the User Name is displayed immediately to the right of this text If electronic signatures are not used then a signature field may be included using the underscore _ after the label or the field may be left blank Review Signature This text is displayed below the QA data table on the right side If QA reports are reviewed in the QA Sample Manager then the User Name is displayed immediately after this text If electronic signatures are not used then a signature field may be included using the underscore _ after the label or the fie
306. road flexibility for remote data access while also ensuring continued operation during network outages See Appendix E Network Configuration Considerations This architecture requires each detector database to store the Security and Configuration settings managed by the Sample Administration program so that all of the information necessary for system operation is always available to the application if a database connection can be established Page AQ of A91 This Sample Administration program must connect to a Global Value database structured to store analysis data for samples not a QA database The default database path is set on the Misc tab of the Configuration Manager Section A 2 3 7 and typically points to one of the production detector databases If the default database path is not valid then the user will be prompted to select a valid database Once a connection is established to a production database the Sample Administration program can determine the location of all other databases in the Global Value network from tables that are managed on the Detectors tab of the Configuration Manager Section A 2 3 2 When the Analysis Editor is activated and detectors are selected from that interface a dynamic connection is established to the applicable detector database in order to display and update analysis records Changes applied to Security or Configuration parameters from the Sample Administration program are initially only applied to
307. rocess Overview Page 15 of 30 Global Value stores analysis results and QA data in protected databases that are intended for access only through the program interfaces Global Value keeps track of any changes applied to data in the databases for audit trail capability but it also provides the ability to export data to a non secure environment for additional processing Global Value uses the Job process in GammaVision to automate sample measurements This process is initiated from the Quick Start program which dynamically creates Job from Job Templates and Configuration Files as described in Section A 1 Global Value provides several programs that are run within Jobs to collect and store sample information load analysis results into databases generate reports etc These programs are described in Appendix B and are shown in the Figure 3 2 1 process as AX where X is a numeric value A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Analysis Data programs are used to modify or set the analysis parameters used for analysis such as the decay time sample size calibration library and many other parameters Non Analysis Data programs are used to modify or set parameters that are not used in the analysis process such as the current user name sample comments and other information related to the sample These programs are also used to set or update database flags and generate print analysis reports The GVGetRptData program retrieves analysis
308. rosoft Excel spreadsheets for custom calculations and data entry or a basic data entry form for routine samples The following parameters are available Sample Description Decay Correction Date Time Sample Collection Start and Stop Date Time when using Excel interface only Sample Quantity and Quantity Units Live Time Preset The Interface method is dictated by command line parameters as described below Implementation for each method is further detailed in sections B 6 1 and B 6 2 GVSampleData has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Full Path to SDF file required The Decay date time and Collection Dates Times when using the Excel interface and Sample Quantity and Units will be written to the SDF file specified on the command line This parameter is required and should be unique to the detector so that Jobs running on other systems will not inadvertently modify this file prior to being loaded into GammaVision Full Path to JOB file required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a Ifthe Excel interface is used or OK is selected on the basic data interface then the following commands are written to the Job File Describe_Sample Description Specified Recall_Options S
309. rt with the parameter CSVQADATA This parameter is not returned in the rendered CSV file Parameters described in Section A 2 3 5 for Report Templates with the QAPUB prefix are valid parameters within the QA Data record All parameters in the Sample or QA Data rows are returned exactly as listed in each row If quotes around parameters are desired to ensure that data with commas dates etc are interpreted correctly then the quotes must be included around the applicable parameters in the template The comma or other character delimiter must also be included to separate each parameter Additional text may be included outside of the Sample Data and Nuclide Data record For example a header row or other information may be desired for readability or to satisfy custom application processing requirements Page A79 of A91 A 5 1 4 A 5 1 5 A 5 1 6 A 5 1 7 A 5 1 8 A 5 1 9 A 5 1 10 The following is an example of a valid CSV Template The piped parameters are those specified in Section A 2 3 5 for Report Templates Note that this example does not include all possible parameters SpectrumlD Acquisition Time QA Type QA Description CSVSampleData QASPC QASMP_ACQU QATYPE QADESC QA Point QA Parameter QA Value QA Result CSVQAData PUBQAPOINT PUBQAPARAMETER PUBQAVALUE PUBQARESULT OutputincludeSummary This parameter is used only for the PDF and TXT output types It is ignored
310. s reporting options nuclide corrections and other analysis parameters These parameters are managed in the B30Winds ini file for global parameters used by all analyses and the Sample Definition Files SDF files which contain parameter settings for specific analysis types The parameters set in the SDF file can also be overridden by menu or Job commands as applicable Page 13 of 30 The Calibration establishes the channel energy relationship energy calibration expected peak shapes at different energies FWHM calibration and the detector efficiency at specified energies efficiency calibration The calibration process is has been simplified using the automation wizard built into GammaVision Simply load a calibration spectrum library with appropriate energies and an efficiency table containing the source assay information to generate all three calibrations The Library associates specific energy peaks with appropriate nuclides such that each nuclide has a signature for identification The library also contains information such as nuclide half life peak abundance and various peak and nuclide flags used for activity calculations and reporting options The Peak Background Correction PBC file is structured similar to a nuclide library Instead of peak abundances it contains peak count rates which can be subtracted from a sample count to eliminate the contribution to peaks from background or a blank Various other corrections such as Att
311. s 12 Call the Job File for the Next sample in the queue Refer to Section B 31 and the example Job Templates for more detail related to the file content Example GVSampleDataSC_JobTemplateFilePath JOBTemplateDIR SCCountSamples jtp where JOBTemplateDIR is defined in the Quick Start Configuration file See Section A 1 for more details regarding the Quick Start configuration files Page B39 of B77 B 8 2 12 B 8 2 13 B 8 2 14 GVSampleDataSC_DefaultSDFFilePath This parameter specifies the full path to the SDF file to be used if an SDF File name is not specified in the Analysis Methods file for the selected method Typically this parameter is not used Example GVSampleDataSC_DefaultSDFFilePath GVCopySDF_Destination where GVCopySDF_Destination defines the SDF File path where the template SDF File is saved using the GVCopyFile program as described in Section B 8 2 GVSampleDataSC_DefaultReportTemplate This parameter specifies the Report Template to be used if a Report Template name was not specified in the Analysis Methods file for the selected method See Section B 8 2 4 9 for template name requirements Typically this parameter is not used Example GVSampleDataSC_DefaultReportTemplate Generic Template GVSampleDataSC_ActivityUnitsFilePath This parameter specifies the full path to a text file that defines the valid units that are used to populate the Activity Units dropdown list The file also includ
312. s described in Formula F31 Argument Notes See Notes 1 amp 2 above for a description of the DatabasePath and WorkGroupPath arguments The database is detector specific cbo is the name of a valid combobox Example The following code populates the combobox Detectors when the workbook opens The Database and WorkGroup paths are stored in cells A2 and A3 respectively Sub AutoOpen GVPopulateDetectorList Sheets Reference Cells 1 2 Text _ Sheets Reference Cells 1 3 Text _ Sheets NuclideList Detectors End Sub F31 GVPopulateSpectrumList GVPopulateSpectrumList DatabasePath WorkGroupPath ComboBoxName This procedure adds each SpectrumID listed in the database to the specified combobox control It is only available in VBA Argument Notes See Notes 1 amp 2 above for a description of the DatabasePath and WorkGroupPath arguments The database is detector specific ComboBoxName is the name of a valid combobox Example The following code is used in a worksheet combobox control Click event The combobox Detector1 is linked to cell A1 to set the database path When a detector is selected in this combobox the database path is updated in cell A1 and the combobox Spectrums gets populated with a list of SpectrumIDs for that detector The WorkGroupPath is specified in cell A2 Private Sub Detector1_Click GVPopulateSpectrumList Me Cells 1 1 Me Cells 2 1 Spectrum1 End Sub
313. s in the output spectrum file can be different from the input files This option may be useful when there are few spectrum counts in order to make spectrum peaks more obvious by converting 16 384 channel spectra to 8 192 or 4 096 channels This option should be used in conjunction with the Energy Count Rate Multiplex Method and an appropriate Energy calibration to ensure that the full spectrum is converted Also note that changes to the ADC Conversion Gain should only go from a higher number channels in the Input spectra to fewer channels in the Output spectrum to avoid spectrum distortion a Use Template This option uses the spectrum template file as described above to determine the ADC Conversion Gain b Static Settings 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 These options set the ADC Conversion Gain to the value specified 4 Sum Acquisition Time a Enabled This option emulates an extension of the acquisition time for a single detector by summing the Real and Live time in addition to the spectrum data The Dead Time is calculated by the new Real and Live time values b Disabled This option emulates the concurrent acquisition from multiple detectors at the same time such that the Live and Real time is normalized for the measurement time based on the Multiplex Method and Spectrum Template selected when the spectrum data is summed 5 Energy Calibration a Use Template The Energy Calibration in the Spectrum Templa
314. s a number that identifies the position of an item within the list ParseCharacter is the character that separates each item within the list Global Value functions generally return a comma delimited list however strings delimited by other characters may be parsed using this function Example Spreadsheet formula GVParseList A1 1 returns the first item of a comma delimited list stored in cell A1 F14 GVNuclideName GVNuclideName DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID ListID This function returns a nuclide name for the specified SpectrumID based on the order number of the nuclide in the database Argument Notes See Appendix F Notes for a description of the DatabasePath WorkGroupPath and SpectrumiD arguments The database is detector specific ListID is the order number of the nuclide for the associated SpectrumID Example Spreadsheet formula GVNuclideName A1 A2 A3 1 returns the first nuclide associated with the specified SpectrumID Where Cell A1 contains the full path to the database Cell A2 contains the full path to GVCustomReport mdw Cell A3 contains a valid SpectrumID in the Detector database Page F10 of F21 F15 GVNuclideActivity GVNuclideActivity DatabasePath WorkGroupPath SpectrumID Nuclide Optional IncludeMDA This function returns the activity value associated with the specified Nuclide and SpectrumID If IncludeMDA is set to TRUE then t
315. s are displayed when the workbook opens This effect is due to the connection method employed by GVSampleData and is easily addressed with a simple validation process shown in the VBA code snippet below This process checks a worksheet cell to see if a date time has been set in the previous five seconds If it hasn t then the date time gets set in that cell This part of the code will execute when the GVSampleData program connects to the workbook If the date time has been set within the previous five seconds then the connection phase must have been executed so the form is displayed The position settings effectively hide Excel so it is not readily apparent to the end user that Excel is being used for the data entry process The affect is similar to interfacing with a stand alone Windows application Page B9 of B77 Private Sub Workbook Activate On Error Resume Next If Worksheets Calc Range A20 Value gt Now 5 24 60 60 Then With Application WindowState xlNormal sLeftPos Left sTopPos Top sHeight Height sWidth Width Left 100 Top 100 Height 10 Width 10 End With frmDataEntry Show Else Worksheets Calc Range A20 Now End If End Sub Typically a second macro as shown below is run when the workbook is closed to reset the Excel window size so that it displays properly when opened using any method other than the GVSampleData program Note that the position and
316. s can be automated as part of the GVPublishSample configuration by using the RUN commands described in Section A 3 1 launched from custom site applications or used in the manual interactive mode Database Archive Database archiving is normally performed based on the size of the database which is dependent on the number of measurements made When a database exceeds approximately one hundred megabytes then consideration should be given to Archiving the database Purging older data and then Compacting the production database This process results in having a copy of the current database as an Archived backup that can be loaded into the Sample or QA Administration programs to review older data while the current production databases remain fairly small to improve performance and reduce the time required for system backups 1 Prior to archiving purging or compacting a database it is important to ensure that no other database connections are active i e no measurements in progress and no remote connections to the database 2 Perform Archive Purge and Compact functions as follows a For detector databases use the Sample Administration Configuration Editor on the Detectors tab as described in Section A 2 3 2 b For QA Databases use the QA Administration program as described in Section A 4 8 Changing the Analysis Engine for Measurements The analysis engine is specified in the GammaVision SDF files which are loaded by various processes
317. s without the lt flag are reported first Nuclide name is left aligned to the parameter position XCVR TXT lt PDF UNCT_S Standard Nuclide Uncertainty Reported 1 Data is based on the standard GammaVision report uncertainty as set in the Analysis Options i e or Activity units for Total or Counting Uncertainty This value is set to the Total Uncertainty if the Total option is selected Must be on the same row as the _NUC_ code Value is right aligned SH See ACT_S format code UNCTAC_ S Standard Nuclide Counting Uncertainty in Activity Units Must be on the same row as the _NUC_ code Value is right aligned SH See ACT_S format code If Decay Correction is enabled then this value is decay corrected unless the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded If the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded then this value is set to the Time of Count value UNCTAT_S Standard Nuclide Total Uncertainty Activity Units Must be on the same row as the _NUC_ code Value is right aligned SH See ACT_S format code If Decay Correction is enabled then this value is decay corrected unless the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded If the Half Life Cutoff is exceeded then this value is set to the Time of Count value If Standard Nuclide Activity is reported as lt MDA then this value is set to the Standard Nuclide Counting Uncertainty Page A41 of A91 Report Cod
318. sample descriptions Continue Command This parameter sets the automation Job instructions that will be created in the helper Job described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 7 when the Continue button is selected The instructions in this helper Job are performed prior to calling the automation Job for the first sample If nothing is specified then the default Continue Command for the program will be used This is typically the desired configuration when using the multiple samples mode because the command set in this condition is not specified to the last sample loaded in the sample queue When using the Single Sample mode each Analysis Method can specify different instructions to run when the program closes For example a method may be configured for samples that require Radiation Monitor Readings See Section B 21 The commands that must be generated to prompt for this information can be set in the Continue Command as follows The Continue Command requires one parameter that is defined in the configuration file passed to this program followed by the equals sign Example Run_GVGetRadMonitor When using the process described in Section B 8 2 with the default Global Value installation the content of the helper Job when counting a sample on Detector 3 would be Run C GV_GetRadMon exe C GlobalValue3 mdb F C 3_ Abort Job Wait C GV_GetRadMon exe Call C 3_ Abort Job Call C 3_S
319. se GammavVision immediately 4 Dead Time Check Duration optional This value is the number of seconds required for monitoring the count time before the program can determine that the dead time is below the limit If the dead time exceeds the specified limit during the evaluation period the dead time field will be set to a red background and the warning message will be displayed when the evaluation period has expired If the dead time does not exceed the limit then the application will terminate without any messages after the specified duration has elapsed The minimum and default value for this parameter is 10 5 Full Path to Geometry List optional The specified file must be a text file that contains a list of valid geometries for the specified sample type on each line The first geometry is the default and will determine the efficiency calibration file recalled in the subsequent Job file if the dead time limit is not exceeded If the dead time limit is exceeded then the user will be prompted to move the sample to the next geometry position in the list after which the dead time will be checked again If the dead time limit is not exceeded then the specified geometry will determine the efficiency calibration file loaded in the subsequent Job file If the dead time limit is exceeded after all geometries in the list have been used then the message will simply indicate that the dead time limit has been exceeded Under this condition no efficiency
320. selected from the list For older systems that stored report templates as text files cus extension the search button next to this field may be selected to browse to the specified template file This older method affords no protection against unauthorized changes to the report templates so it is generally preferable to convert older template files to the newer format stored in the database and select the appropriate template from the list Site Unit The Site Unit may be selected from the list which is populated based on the list established on the Misc tab in the Configuration Manager Alternatively ad hoc text may be entered in this field as the data entry is not limited to those items in the list Sample Type The Sample Type may be selected from the list which is populated based on the list established on the Sample Types tab in the Configuration Manager If an item from the list is selected then the R Type field is automatically set to the corresponding parameter Alternatively ad hoc text may be entered in this field as the data entry is not limited to those items in the list If text is entered that does not match any of the Sample Types in the list then the R Type field will be cleared automatically R Type This field is automatically set when a Sample Type is selected from the list established on the Sample Type tab in the Configuration Manager The default R Type Record Type or Document Control code can be changed if desired Sampler ID
321. shortcut or Menu Item in the Quick Start program s INI file to the GVQAAdmin program with the full path to the database on the command line For example a directory on a local computer may be shared with the such that the fully qualified network name can be used on the command line as follows C User GVCR GVQAAdmin exe ComputerName GVCR Databases GlobalValueQA mdb 2 Users with CONFIGURATION permissions as established in the Security settings may connect to a different database using the Load Archived Database option under Database Management Section Section A 4 8 QA Administration Toolbar Control Current User None User Group None Figure A 4 2 QA Administration Header User Login to change the current user QA Sample Manager Reports for data review and approval Section A 4 2 Lab Notebook for entering comments related to QA failures changes to QA Limits and Instrument Maintenance History Section A 4 3 QA Charts for reviewing data trends Section A 4 4 5 QA Options to establish reporting options Section A 4 5 6 Detector Parameters for removing detectors that were inadvertantly synchronized from the Sample Administration program Section A 4 6 QA Limits to establish QA Points Parameters and associated Limits Section A 4 7 Database Management for archive purge and compact functions Section A 4 8 Database Path for the currently connected database 0 1 on o User Nam
322. sion This parameter is also used to generate the Calibration File Path as described in the first command line parameter The directory must terminate with the character Library File Directory required The Library list is populated with Library Files in the Library File directory without the file extension This parameter is also used to generate the Library File Path as described in the first command line parameter The directory must terminate with the character Default Geometry optional The Geometry is a calibration file name without the File Prefix and extension If the specified geometry matches an item in the geometry list then that item is selected by default If no match is available then no items are selected This parameter is also used to generate the Calibration File Path as described in the first command line parameter Page B56 of B77 B 13 6 7 8 Default Library optional The Library is a file name without the file extension If the specified library matches an item in the library list then that item is selected by default If no match is available then no items are selected This parameter is also used to generate the Library File Path as described in the first command line parameter Re Analysis Flag optional f set to T true then the Geometry and Library list items are set to those used in the previous analysis stored in the Global Value database If the files are no longer av
323. st The Quantity Calculation Input field is hidden and no calculations are implemented The Analysis Quantity Units dropdown list is populated with the default Output Quantity Units and those specified in the Quantity Calculation Conversion Table See B 7 2 32 If the Method specified is not set to either Flowrate or UnitConversion as described below then it is automatically set to None 2 Flowrate This method calculates the analysis quantity in the required units based on flowrate in the units specified The flowrate and analysis quantity units are configured in the Quantity Calculation Conversion Table See B 7 2 32 The Analysis Quantity is calculated as follows AQ QI Dur CF M D Where AQ Analysis Quantity QI Quantity Input value flow rate in this case Dur Duration Collection Stop Time Collection Start Time in minutes CF Conversion Factor See B 7 2 32 M Multiplier value D Divisor value 3 UnitConversion This method allows the sample quantity to be entered in different units than the analysis quantity For example the analyst may enter 100 g and have 0 1 Kg used for the analysis The Analysis Quantity is calculated as follows AQ QI CF M D Where AQ Analysis Quantity QI Quantity Input value CF Conversion Factor See B 7 2 32 M Multiplier value D Divisor value Examples GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMethod None GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMethod Flowrat
324. stom Fields tab can be listed along with default values When using a Data Source file the list of Custom Parameter displayed in the prompt will be limited to those specified in this list This allows the analyst to be prompted for only the specific custom parameters necessary for a particular type of sample The following example shows the file content required to prompt for the parameters shown in Figure B 21 1 with default data DisplayForm Yes ShowSavedData No SampleNumber 12345 AnalysisMethod RCS Liquid Isotopic The following example shows the file content required to store data generated by another application directly in the database DisplayForm No ShowSavedData No SampleFlowRate 2 SampleFlowUnits scfm Append Custom Data Flag required When this flag is set to T true the custom data is appended to any existing custom data parameters for the specified sample When set to F false then all custom data associated with the specified sample is deleted prior to saving the current parameters This flag is normally set to T true Re Analysis Flag optional f set to T true and the ShowSavedData parameter is set to Yes the custom data from the previous analysis is used as the default Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured t
325. stom data This file has the following content e Full content of the Custom Data Input File as described in B 7 2 30 e QuantityCalculationType Calculation Method Type i e Flowrate UnitConversion or N A if no quantity calculation is applied e QuantityCalculationValue Calculation Input value i e Flowrate or Unit Conversion Input value or N A if no quantity calculation is applied e QuantityCalculationUnits Calculation Input Units or N A if no quantity calculation is applied e QuantityCalculationMultiplier Multiplier field value formatted as O 000E 00 or N A if the multiplier is not used e QuantityCalculationDivisor Divisor field value formatted as O 000E 00 or N A if the multiplier is not used e If the Reanalysis Flag is set to T then the parameter names and values of any previously stored custom data are also included in this file The following Quantity Calculation Custom fields must be defined in the Sample Administration Configuration in order for these parameters to be stored in the Global Value database QuantityCalculationType QuantityCalculationValue QuantityCalculationUnits QuantityCalculationMultiplier QuantityCalculationDivisor Page B25 of B77 B 7 2 32 Example GVSampleDataPlus_CustomDataOutputFilePath GLOBALVALUEDIR TEMP DETNO _ CustomData txt Example Custom Data Output File Content DisplayForm No ShowSavedData No QuantityCalculationType Flowrate QuantityCalcul
326. t required The PDF file name must match the spectrum ID and the file prefix must be in the format DETNO_ where DETNO is the detector number This is the default configuration for new installations 2 Full Path to Configuration File optional This optional configuration file may be specified when using the publisher program outside of the routine publishing process This may be useful for generating CSV or XML reports and or processing the data dynamically within automation Jobs When this file is omitted such as when publishing results from the Analysis Editor the default configuration file GVPublishSample ini in the Global Value installation directory is used Page A76 of A91 A 5 1 Configuration File Content The Configuration file consists of a series of parameters that are used for generating various file types and running applications These parameters are enclosed in pipe characters similar to those used with the Quick Start and GVSampleDataSC programs Each configuration file can be configured to generate multiple output files and process them with different applications automatically if desired Two types of parameters are used to generate files and run applications The file generation parameters use the prefix Output and those used for running applications use the prefix RunApp All of the Output parameters must be listed before the associated RunApp parameters In addition to the pre
327. t will be passed to the GV_GetCustomData program in Step 8 of the Job process described previously Refer to GV_GetCustomData for more detail related to the content of this file Note that the DisplayForm and ShowSavedData parameters are set to No so that this data transfer process is invisible to the user b After the custom data file is created the file is saved and Excel is closed At this point the GVSampleData program opens the Excel file reads the data from the GlobalValue worksheet updates the SDF file specified on the command line and creates the helper Job file content as described in Section B 6 2 If analysis setting changes beyond those specified on the GlobalValue worksheet are desired then additional VBA code may be used to create a Helper Job that is called before Step 9 of the Job process described previously The content of this Job will be a series of Set_Setting Job commands for each applicable parameter and the file can be created using a function similar to GenerateCustomDataFile shown in the previous example Refer to the Set_Setting Job command in the GammaVision User Manual for additional detail with this command Page B12 of B77 B 7 B 7 1 GVSampleDataPlus GVSampleDataPlus is a sample data entry program that extends the basic form interface of the original GVSampleData to include sample collection start and stop time and sample quantity calculations based on flowrate or unit conversion The
328. tSamplePump Prompt Sample Administration Configuration for each detector 2 Re Analysis Flag optional If set to T true then the Sample Pump ID from the previous analysis is used as the default 3 Full Path to Job File required The content of a helper Job is created by the application to provide additional functionality within the GammaVision environment The main Job is normally configured to run this helper Job immediately after the application closes The file content is as follows a If OK is selected the file is empty so the automation process is unaffected b If Cancel is selected the file contains the QUIT command to terminate the Job and close GammaVision immediately GV_GetRWP This program sets the Radiation Work Permits for the Global Value RWP Entry sample The default prefix can be specified in Sample Administration Configuration on the Misc tab Several RWPs may be entered using the Add button and HAWES 2012 Janis existing RWPs may be removed using the Remove Add button __ Add GV_GetRWP has the following comma delimited Remove command line parameters 1 Full Path to Detector Samples Database required OK The database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each Figure B 19 1 GV_GetRWP Prompt detector ES 2 Re Analysis Flag optional If set to T true then the RWPs from the previous analysis are used as
329. tartTime B 7 2 4 GVSampleDataPlus_ShowCollectionStartField B 7 2 5 GVSampleDataPlus_CollectionStopTime B 7 2 6 GVSampleDataPlus_ShowCollectionStopField B 7 2 7 GVSampleDataPlus_Quantity B 7 2 8 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityOutputShow B 7 2 9 GVSampleDataPlus_LiveTimePreset B 7 2 10 GVSampleDataPlus_MaxDecayHours B 7 2 11 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMethod B 7 2 12 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMethodShow B 7 2 13 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputValue B 7 2 14 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputUnits B 7 2 15 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputUnitsAllowChange B 7 2 16 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputUnitsLabel B 7 2 17 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationOutputUnits B 7 2 18 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationOutputUnitsAllowChange B 7 2 19 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationOutputUnitsLabel B 7 2 20 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMultiplierValue B 7 2 21 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMultiplierLabel B 7 2 22 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationMultiplierShow B 7 2 23 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationDivisorValue B 7 2 24 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationDivisorLabel B 7 2 25 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationDivisorShow B 7 2 26 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationlgnorePrevious B 7 2 27 GVSampleDataPlus_SDFFilePath B 7 2 28 GVSampleDataPlus_JOBFilePath B 7 2 29 GVSampleDataPlus_ReanalysisDataFilePath B 7 2 30 GVSampleDataPlus_CustomDatalnputFilePath
330. te function fires again This time the cell content is already set to TRUE so the rest of the code is bypassed This requires that the value of the cell in the source file copied in Step 4 of the Job process described previously is something other than TRUE b If the Excel file name contains the word reanalysis then populate the applicable fields with data from the original analysis as follows i Read the text file created by the GVRecallSpectrum program in Step 2 of the Job process described previously The path to this file is determined by a root file name stored in the Main worksheet along with the file prefix which is determined by the name of the Excel file This requires the Excel file to be named using the same Detector Prefix as the RecallData text file The path is assumed to be in the same directory as the Excel file since both files are dynamically created in the C User GVCR Temp directory for each automation process ii When reading the RecallData text file several variables are set to the values stored within this file to use for populating fields in various worksheets The target database path and Spectrum ID are also read from the RecallData file and this data allows the use of the GVAnalysisParameter Excel Add In function See Appendix F to get any other analysis or custom data for this sample to repopulate fields in the worksheet c If the Excel file name does not contain the work reanalysis
331. te a Configuration file in the same directory as Quick Start C User GVCR as follows a Determine the file name based on the reanalysis flag described in Step 1 i For reanalysis the file name will be GVQuickStartReanalysis cfg ii If not reanalysis the file name will be GVQuickStart cfg b Create the file content consisting of the Job Configuration file content Dynamically generated parameters and Global Configuration file content as follows i If the item selected from the Automation Jobs list is a CFG file then add the Job Configuration file content to the configuration file If the item selected was a JOB file then nothing is added to the configuration file at this step ii Add dynamically generated data parameters shown in the table below to the configuration file as follows e All Detector data is read from the selected detector database See Section A 2 3 2 Sample Administration Configuration Detectors tab e Day Month and Year Spectrum Counter values are read from the detector database These values are updated during the automation process using the GVIncrementCounter program See Section B 23 Buffered values X digits are padded on the left with zeros but will expand in length if the counter exceeds the maximum X digit value e Date and Time parameters are based on the date and time that the automation process is initiated e The Job Counter is stored in a text file named DetX dat where X is the detector number The co
332. te is used for the Output Spectrum b User Defined The values specified for the Energy Calibration Intercept Slope and Quadratic are used for the Output Spectrum energy calibration B 35 2GVSpectrumMux Automation with Configuration Files The GVSpectrumMux program can be run in a more automated mode by setting the specified parameters in a configuration file and passing this file to the program as a command line parameter This is a convenient way to operate a multiple detector array with software multiplexing in the standard GammaVision automation Job process The individual detector spectra and the summed output spectrum can also be analyzed independently The configuration file must be configured as shown below The same format is used for the GVSpectrumMux INI file which is updated each time the Process Spectra button is selected in the User Interface mode This INI file can be used as a template if desired but a different file name should be used for automation routines to avoid inadvertent changes when the User Interface mode is used The following is an example configuration file followed by an explanation of each parameter GVSpectrumMux_SumMethod 3 GVSpectrumMux SpectrumTemplateOption 0 GVSpectrumMux_ADCConvGainOption 0 GVSpectrumMux OutputADCConvGain GVSpectrumMux EnergyCalibrationOption 0 GVSpectrumMux OutputEnergyIntercept Page B75 of B77 B 36
333. ted however the report is available for review and printing using the QA Administration program e Omit this parameter to print the report on the default printer Page B66 of B77 B 28 GVQABackground B 29 This program collects the applicable QA information for spectrum background and generates the QA report Similar to the GV_GetRptData program See Section B 22 the applicable data is read from the most recent analysis results in the specified location The QA report content is determined by the configuration established in the QA Administration program See Section A 4 5 which specifies the report header QA Points Limits and other reporting options such as whether the detailed GammaVision report is included with the QA report GVQABackground has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Detector ID required This is the Detector number specified in the MCB Configuration which is also the Detector ID specified in Sample Administration Configuration on the Detectors tab 2 Full Path to the QA Database required The QA database path is defined on the Detectors tab in Sample Administration Configuration for each detector 3 Report Destination optional Any of the following parameters are acceptable e WORD Displays report in MSWord e NONE No report will be displayed or printed however the report is available for review and printing using the QA Administration program e Omit this parameter to print the r
334. ted menu This editor has two tabs as shown in Figures A 2 3 1 1 and A 2 3 1 2 for establishing Groups with applicable permissions and then assigning Users to those groups r r Global Value Security Editor Global Value Security Editor Users Groups Users Groups User Name Admin Security Group Analyst x Password User Name Admin Security Group Administrator Administrator Ee Eril Add Edit Delete Password Security Group Permissions Security Group Analyst Add Edit Delete Save Cancel Permissions Print Options Print Options CONFIGURATION Sort by Destination PUBLISH DATA SECURITY Destination User Name Printer Print Printer Security Group C MS Word DELETE DATA C MS Word ea vS PUBLISH DATA Close K d Figure A 2 3 1 2 Security Users Figure A 2 3 1 1 Security Groups To simplify the setup and maintenance process permissions are assigned to Groups rather than individuals This makes it easy to change permissions for an entire group in one step instead of having to change the same setting for every affected user There are a few Security Groups configured by default but they can be modified as necessary to meet specific installation needs Page A22 of A91 When Adding or Editing Security Groups the PERMISSIONS field is enabled to allow selection of appropriate options as follo
335. ted using command line parameters described below or using the interface shown in Figure A 12 1 When using the interactive mode the analysis results from samples may be transferred individually by selecting the Sample ID and then the Export Sample button or all of the samples in the selected detector database can be exported by selecting the Batch Export menu item When using the Batch mode all results are deleted from the receiving database before exporting the new data so this process may take considerable time when there a large number of samples The target database to accept the exported analysis results is specified in the file GVDataExport INI which has one parameter for the database path as shown in this example ExportDatabasePath C User GVCR Databases GlobalValue_Export mdb J Global Yalue Data Export 4 10 x Batch Export Detector ID Detector 1 y Spectrum ID fioon y Sample Description UnitVent SCS Sample Date Time 10 24 2000 23 07 Analysis Date Time 04707 2007 15 53 Figure A 12 1 GVDataExport This program has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Detector Number 2 SpectrumID If a valid Detector Number and SpectrumID is supplied then the sample data associated with the SpectrumID is automatically exported to the unsecured database If either parameter is omitted or invalid then the form shown in Figure A 12 1 is displayed for interactive operation Page A90 o
336. terface in a more streamlined manner See Section B 7 for additional information e GVSampleDataSC This interface can be used with Sample Changers or individual sample measurements It uses the concept of Analysis Methods which define the default parameters for various types of sample measurements and allows setting all of the required analysis parameters including sample volume calculations similar to GVSampleDataPlus and custom data fields in one interface The custom data fields can be used to capture manual input data or sample information that was previously loaded into an information management systems to minimize data entry errors For typical measurement processes this interface is typically chosen as the default See Section B 8 for additional information Analysis Data Review Analysis data for samples measurements is reviewed from the Sample Administration program which is accessed from the Samples button on the Quick Start program or directly from Window s shortcuts for remote access computers This program provides the ability to review and modify analysis reports with tracking capability if authorized based on the user security settings Reports can also be published for automated integration with document control and other data storage systems See Section A 2 2 for additional information related to data review and Section A 3 for information related to the publishing options Page 21 of 30 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7
337. the GVSpectrumMux interface has two functional sections The upper section establishes the multiplexer processing options and the lower section defines the paths to the input spectra to process and the path to the output spectrum that will be generated After the Spectrum paths and Processing options are set select the Process Spectra button to create the Output Spectrum Spectra are added and removed from the Input Spectra list using the buttons to the left of this field At least one Input spectrum is required With a single spectrum input configuration the multiplexer simply offers a simple way to convert an existing spectrum to a different number of channels or normalize the peak to channel positions based on user defined energy calibration coefficients This can be useful when evaluating spectra by Regions of Interest in applications that define Regions of Interest by start and stop channel vs start stop energy when gain shifts are routinely corrected by energy recalibration in the software rather than actual gain adjustments in the hardware If the energy calibration is accurate then the manual energy calibration parameters will effectively perform a software gain adjustment in the resulting spectrum that should match the pre defined Regions of Interest based on channel position Page B72 of B77 The processing options are as follows 1 Multiplex Method The Multiplex Method determines how the spectrum channel data will be summ
338. the applicable detectors 2 Detector ID Number This is the Detector number specified in the MCB Configuration which is also the Detector Number specified in the Sample Administration Configuration Manager If the Detector ID is provided then the trend chart window will be displayed with the specified detector selected in the dropdown list when the program opens fr 2 Global Value QA Administration ales Database Path usavo a Las GE Current User None t ul A DA Charts DA Options ve Na Uzor Group How Fiaure A 4 1 QA Administration Default View Page A58 of A91 Unlike databases that store analysis results for samples the QA databases can store data for multiple detectors The QA Reporting options are also set in the QA database and may be set different in each database as these parameters are not synchronized across all databases This allows setting different report header options for each location in a multi lab site The security and database configuration parameters however are managed from the Sample Administration program and synchronized to the QA databases to ensure that these settings are consistent throughout the Global Value system See Section A 2 3 1 When using separate databases for different detectors or groups of detectors or when accessing QA data from a remote computer there are two options are available to establish a connection to the appropriate database as outlined below 1 Establish a Windows
339. the calendar year of data to display This entry is stored on the local computer to be used as the default the next time this Date Range is selected c Quarter A field is displayed below the list to specify the calendar quarter of data to display The quarter entry can be any valid Month Year combination i e 1 2005 Feb 2005 or March 2005 may all be valid entries for 1 Quarter 2005 depending on the Regional computer settings This entry is stored on the local computer to be used as the default the next time this Date Range is selected d All Data All data removes any date filters and loads up to a maximum of 4000 data points If more than 4000 data points exist in the database for the selected Parameter then only the most recent 4000 points will be displayed e Use Defined Start and Stop date fields are displayed to set the specific data range Data View QA Data can be viewed in the form of a Chart or a Table The Slide Show and Print Options are only displayed when the Chart option is selected The Table option provides easy access to the data behind the charts This data can be used in other applications by selecting the range of fields in the table right clicking in the selected region and selecting Copy from the shortcut menu The table data can then be pasted into another application such as Notepad Excel etc Slide Show This option is only displayed when in the Chart View The Slide Show feature provides a very simple meth
340. the default database that was connected on startup They are not applied to the detector databases that are dynamically connected when reviewing data in the Analysis Editor After all Security and Configuration changes are applied they must be pushed to all of the other production databases using the Synchronization function Section A 2 3 9 so that all databases in the Global Value system contain the current configuration settings In order to avoid discrepancies between the databases configuration changes including security changes should only be made when all of the databases in the Global Value network are accessible If an error is indicated in the Synchronization process then corrective action should be taken to avoid Synchronizing FROM any databases that are not currently up to date Otherwise the changes would be rolled back to settings stored in the out of date database NOTE It should also be clear with this process that concurrent Security and Configuration changes from different locations may result in unexpected results because one user may be pushing updates to the other s database while changes are in progress Additionally if analysis measurements are in progress when configuration changes are made then changes may or may not be reflected in the final results based on the timing of the database updates For this reason changes to Security and Configuration parameters which must be synchronized to the other databases should be m
341. tion is used with the sample queue position appended Example GVSampleDataSCOut_SPECTRUMNAME 3_ STARTDATE_YEAR STARTDATE_MONTH STARTDATE_DAY _ DAYSPECTRUMCOUNTERBUFFERED3 01 3 When a spectrum is reanalyzed this parameter is set to the original spectrum file name B 8 3 7 GVSampleDataSCOut DETECTORFILEPREFIX Detector Spectrum File Prefix See Section B 8 2 3 B 8 3 8 GVSampleDataSCOut_DESCRIPTION Sample Description as entered for the sample B 8 3 9 GVSampleDataSCOut_ANALYSISQUANTITY Analysis Quantity specified for the sample formatted as 0 00000E 00 B 8 3 10 GVSampleDataSCOut_QUANTITYUNITS Analysis Quantity units specified for the sample Page B50 of B77 B 8 3 11 B 8 3 12 B 8 3 13 B 8 3 14 B 8 3 15 GVSampleDataSCOut_COLLSTARTDATETIME Sample Collection Start Date and Time GVSampleDataSCOut_COLLSTOPTDATETIME Sample Collection Stop Date and Time GVSampleDataSCOut_DECAYDATETIME Same as Sample Collection Stop Date and Time GVSampleDataSCOut_EFFICIENCYFILEPATH Full path to the Efficiency Calibration file This parameter consists of the Calibration Directory See Section B 8 2 6 Detector Spectrum Prefix See Section B 8 2 3 Geometry name selected for the sample and the clb file extension Example GVSampleDataSCOut_EFFICIENCYFILEPATH C User Cal 3_250mIVial clb GVSampleDataSCOut_LIBRARYFILEPATH Full path to the Library file This parameter consis
342. tity Calculation Method is set to either Flowrate or UnitConversion See B 7 2 11 The input and output unit combination must be defined in the Quantity Calculation Conversion Table See B 7 2 32 Example GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputUnits cfm GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputUnitsAllowChange This flag is set to either T true or F false to enable or disable the Quantity Calculation Input Units field If enabled the analyst can select predefined units from the dropdown list or manually type in their own units Example GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputUnitsAllowChange T Page B20 of B77 B 7 2 16 B 7 2 17 B 7 2 18 B 7 2 19 GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputUnitsLabel This parameter sets the label for the Quantity Calculation Input field This label is normally set to describe the expected units for this field such as flow rate weight volume etc When the Quantity Calculation Method dropdown list is displayed this label should be generic enough for all calculation methods so that it is meaningful regardless of the method selected See B 7 2 11 Examples GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputUnitsLabel Sample Flow Rate GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationInputUnitsLabel Sample Dry Weight GVSampleDataPlus_QuantityCalculationOutputUnits This parameter sets the default units for the Quantity Calculation output analysis quantity fie
343. ton to close the browser dialog and set the reference GlobalValue should now be displayed in the Available References list Select the Ok button to close the Reference List dialog Close the Visual Basic Editor The Excel Add In functions are now available for this workbook The DatabasePath parameter used in most functions is the full path to a Global Value database used for storing Sample data The Add In functions are not compatible with QA databases The WorkGroupPath parameter used in most functions is the full path to the file GVCustomReport mdw which is located in the installation directory usually C User GVCR The SpectrumiID is a unique string that identifies each analysis in the database It is the same as the Spectrum and Analysis report name without the file extension The arguments required for each function may be a static numeric value or character string a formula that evaluates to a numeric value or character string or a reference to a worksheet cell containing a numeric value or character string as applicable Global Value functions are described in the table below Examples are also provided to demonstrate how these functions can be combined with calculations common Excel functions and conditional formatting to demonstrate the power and flexibility of custom calculations in the Excel environment Example files may be found in the directory C User GVCR Excel if the Default
344. toolbar and the associated permissions will be enabled The current user can log out and a different user login while the program is open by selecting the User Login button as shown in Figure A 2 2 If the login prompt is canceled then User Name and Group are set to None and no permissions are enabled This configuration enables a read only mode for users that are not registered in the system with specific permissions enabled Users can also login and simultaneously change their password using the Password Editor shown Global Value User Login in Figure A 2 1 1 This window is accessed by selecting the first toolbar button shown in Figure A 2 2 or the Change Password menu After entering the current and new passwords select Cancel the Save Password button If the inputs are validated then a prompt is displayed indicating that the changes were saved Note that this change has only been applied in the current default database User Name Admin y Password ress New Password fe Verify Password f l Figure A 2 1 1 Password Change After acknowledging the changed password prompt the window shown in Figure A 2 1 2 is displayed and the process of synchronizing the Syrcrronize passworas change to all of the other databases is automatically initiated This synchronization is normally much faster than the synchronization function initiated from the toolbar due to the am
345. tor value from table named TBL PUBNUC_ M2TBL Calculated as Standard Nuclide MDA2 times or divided by X X PUBNUC_ M2TBL Adjustment Factor value from table named TBL PUBNUC_ IBTBL Calculated as ISO NORM Best Activity times or divided by X X PUBNUC_ IBTBL Adjustment Factor value from table named TBL PUBNUC_ IMNTBL Calculated as ISO NORM Minimum Activity times or divided X X PUBNUC_ IMNTBL by Adjustment Factor value from table named TBL PUBNUC_ IMXTBL Calculated as ISO NORM Maximum Activity times or divided X X PUBNUC_ IMXTBL by Adjustment Factor value from table named TBL PUBNUC_ IMDTBL Calculated as ISO NORM MDA Detection Limit times or X X PUBNUC_ IMDTBL divided by Adjustment Factor value from table named TBL PUBNUC_ ICLTBL Calculated as ISO NORM Critical Level Decision Threshold X X PUBNUC_ ICLTBL times or divided by Adjustment Factor value from table named TBL QA Header Parameters for All File Types IQAANALYST Analyst Name XXXIX QADESC Sample Description X X X X QADETNO Detector Number X X X X QAPAGES Total number of pages in report document XX Page A44 of A91 Table A 2 3 5 1 Report Template Parameter Codes eck E Report Code Returned Data 3 Q A QAPUBLISHDATE Publish Date Time XX X X Format YYY
346. tores the table name after the Edit or Delete options are used if the changes have not been saved ReList The list of table names is refreshed from the database Any changes to the table list such as adding new names or flagging tables to delete that have not been saved are discarded Save The list of tables is saved to the database Any tables with the _Delete flag appended are permanently removed and table names that have been edited are updated at this time NUCLIDE ADJUSTMENT FACTORS are managed using the buttons from this group in Figure A 2 3 4 1 as follows Note that the list of Nuclide Adjustment Factors is associated with the currently selected Adjustment Factor Table Add A prompt is displayed to enter a new nuclide and associated adjustment factor All existing nuclide names are listed in the drop down list for selection with auto search enabled while typing or a new nuclide name can be entered to add it to the list Nuclide names must match those specified in the sample analysis in order for the correction factors to be applied correctly The adjustment factor for the selected nuclide can be entered in any format but all adjustment factors are displayed in scientific notation with five significant digits in the list No changes are stored in the database until the list is saved Edit A prompt is displayed to change the name of the selected nuclide and value of the adjustment factor The edit mode is also enabled by d
347. trum analysis GVSDFData has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Full Path to SDF file required This file should be unique to the detector so that Jobs running on other systems will not inadvertently modify this file prior to being loaded into GammaVision 2 Full Path to SDF Data file required This text file contains the parameters and associated data to write to the SDF file The file content is as follows Each line of the SDF Data file should contain the Parameter a Colon and the Parameter Value The following list includes all parameters that can be modified by this program CollectionStart ReportFileName CollectionEnd LibFileName DecayDateTime CalFileName LiveTime PBCFileName RealTime SystematicError Weight RandomError Multiplier ABSConfigID Divisor ABSLength ActivityUnits ABSTypelD QuantityUnits ABSFileName RandomSummingFactor Notes 1 The parameters may be in any order and only those to update are required 2 Parameters not matching those listed above exactly are ignored 3 Date Time parameters may be any standard date time format 4 ActivityUnits and QuantityUnits are limited to 6 characters 5 ReportFileName is limited to 255 characters 6 LiveTime and RealTime are Long Integers 7 Changes to ActivityUnits and QuantityUnits will require appropriate adjustments in the Multiplier and Divisor since the standard activity units in GammaVision are uCi or Bq as set in the Sample Defaults
348. trum if no ROI X X X X X exists GRCR Gross Counts divided by Live Time Format 0 00 X X X X X IIRI 131 133 Ratio Format 0 000 X X X Must be located on the report after the nuclide table LIB1 Library File Name for first or only and second analysis X X X X X LIB2 LIBMW Library Match Width from analysis settings format 0 00 X X X X X LIVE Live Time Format 0 X X X X X MAXHL Half Lives Cutoff Limit format 0 00 X X X X X INUCRAT_NUM_DIV_F Nuclide Ratio Calculation X X X NUCRAT The parameter indicating that the nuclide ratio calculation will be returned NUM The Nuclide Name whose activity will be used as the Numerator in the calculation DIV The Nuclide Name whose activity will be used as the Divisor in the ratio calculation F Number format used in the display of the calculated value as follows e S indicates scientific notation followed by the number of digits to follow the decimal place e Anumber without the S specifies the number of digits to follow the decimal place in a fixed number format Must be located on the report after the nuclide table The value returned is left aligned PAGEBREAK Forces a new page at the current location X X X PAGES Total number of pages in report document X X X A placeholder PAGES is displayed in the Analysis Editor report viewer and this parameter is replaced by the number of pages in the report when printing to the Printer
349. ts and a record for each nuclide is generated with the tags and data specified Page A53 of A91 The following is an example of a valid XML Template The piped parameters are those specified in Table A 2 3 5 1 for Report Templates but this example does not include all possible parameters The tag names are only for example except for the record tags discussed above which must be named accordingly Indentation and spacing is for readability only lt GVPublishDataSet gt lt GVPublishSampleData gt lt SpectrumID gt SPC lt Spectrum ID gt lt SpectrumPath gt SPCPATH lt SpectrumPath gt lt Detector gt DET lt Detector gt lt AcquisitionStartTime gt SMP_ACQU lt AcquisitionStartTime gt lt AcquisitionStopTime gt ACQ_DONE lt AcquisitionStopTime gt lt SampleCollectionStartTime gt SMP_STRT lt SampleCollectionStartTime gt lt SampleCollectionStopTime gt SMP_STOP lt SampleCollectionStop Time gt lt Analyst gt ANALYST lt Analyst gt lt SampleSize gt VOL lt SampleSize gt lt SampleSizeUnits gt VU lt SampleSizeUnits gt lt ActivityUnits gt VU lt ActivityUnits gt lt Geometry gt EFF1 lt Geometry gt lt GVPublishSampleData gt lt GVPublishNuclideData gt lt Nuclide gt PUBNUCNAME lt Nuclide gt lt Activity gt PUBNUCACT lt Activity gt lt TOCActivity gt PUBNUCTOCACT lt TOCActivity gt lt ActivityUnits gt PUBNUCAU lt ActivityUnits gt lt MDA gt PUBNUCMDA lt MDA gt lt MDA2 gt PUBNUCM
350. ts must match one of those defined in the Activity Units file See Section B 8 2 14 If omitted then no default selection is made in the Activity Units dropdown list NOTE The SDF file activity units must be set to Bq for the activity conversion to be valid The Activity Units file has conversion factors to convert the reported activity from Bq to the activity units selected in GVSampleDataSC This conversion factor is written to the SDF file Activity Units Divisor field as part of the automation Job process as described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 3 Live Time The default Live Time preset value must be numeric If omitted the user must enter a Live Time for the sample count This field is ignored in the Reanalysis Mode since presets are not applicable Report Template The Report Template must match the name of a Report Template defined in the Global Value Configuration on the Report Templates tab This parameter is not editable on the program interface If an invalid template name is specified then the user will be prompted to select a valid name when the report is generated for the measurement See Section B 25 for a detailed description of the GV_Custom_Rpt program Sample Type The Sample Type must match one of the Sample Types defined within the Global Value Configuration on the Sample Types tab If it doesn t match a predefined Sample Type then none of the items in the dropdown list will be selected by default Differe
351. ts of the Library Directory See Section B 8 2 7 Library name selected for the sample and the lib file extension Example GVSampleDataSCOut_LIBRARYFILEPATH C User Lib Environmental lib Page B51 of B77 B 8 3 16 GVSampleDataSCOut CUSTOMDATAFILEPATH Full path to the Custom Data File path described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 4 The file name for each sample is the same as the Job File Path parameter See Section B 8 2 5 with CustomData and the Sample Queue position appended Example GVSampleDataSCOut_CUSTOMDATAFILEPATH C User GVCR Temp 3_SampleDataSC_CustomData1 txt B 8 3 17 This file contains the custom data parameters and associated data for each sample Each of these parameters must be defined in the Sample Administration Configuration Custom Fields The following shows the content of this file Data for each sample would be specified for each parameter All of the fields in the Custom data section LIMS Input would follow these fixed parameters DisplayForm No ShowSavedData No AnalysisMethod DilutionFactor SampleQuantity SampleComment SampleFlowrate FlowrateUnits CollectionEfficiency GVSampleDataSCOut_SDFDATAFILEPATH Full path to the SDF Data File described in Section B 8 1 1 Step 3 The file name for each sample is the same as the Job File Path parameter See Section B 8 2 5 with _SDF Data and the Sample Queue position appended Example GVSampleDataSCOut_SDFDATA
352. typically follow the process described in Section 3 3 using GVSampleData GVSampleDataPlus or GVSampleDataSC as well as other programs to collect sample and analysis information Spectrum reanalysis follows the same process except that a spectrum is chosen for reanalysis at the start of the automation process rather than acquiring data from an instrument Example measurement processes using each of the main data entry interfaces are provided in the Default Configuration Files which can be optionally installed or accessed from the installation disk The choice of interface for most applications can be summarized as follows e GVSampleData This interface is useful for very basic sample data inputs or custom interfaces developed in Excel These processes typically require multiple user prompts to capture all of the necessary parameters for a measurement but also can be configured such that the analyst enters as little data as possible and cannot change key analysis parameters defined for the process chosen See Section B 6 for additional information e GVSampleDataPlus This interface extends the data input capabilities to include calculations for sample volume based on flow rate and collection time or conversion of measured sample units to different analysis units based on correction factors i e Wet vs Dry weight ratios This program can perform many of the basic calculations that in early versions of Global Value would have required the Excel in
353. ue s Sample Data modules GVSampleData GVSampleDataPlus and GVSampleDataSC the default dates in the data entry prompts can be set to the current date time the current date only or a specified date time The default date time in the SDF files are not important because these fields are automatically updated but the option to apply the decay corrections must be specified in advance Note that the decay correction options can be modified using Page 11 of 30 2 2 3 2 2 4 2 3 the SET_SETTING GammaVision Job command but this method may not be suitable for all of the automation process available with Global Value None of the options on the Isotopes tab are necessary when using Global Value These parameters are easily calculated with the Global Value custom report summaries using Adjustment Factor tables with more formatting flexibility than offered on the standard GammaVision report Acquisition Settings Configuration 1 2 3 Spectrum names are usually created dynamically from configuration parameters generated by the Quick Start program so the options in the Start Save Report section are not used with Global Value The Group Acquisitions section should normally be set to Current MCB All items in the Ask on Start Options section should be unchecked to avoid conflicts with data entry prompts specified in the Global Value automation processes File Settings On the GENERAL tab accessed from the menu File Settings
354. ueSateu Stand tenes tawccea test cided ert ctanastue estunuailt dest etennmadeacatslene F8 Filed GV NUCIOSLISt cers ci EEE EEE EAEE EES EET NE NAE ETTE EEE ENEE ETEA F9 F12 GVConsolidateNuclideList o ooooooncccccnnnccnnnnnncnnnnnonccnnnnonanonononcnnnnnonanonononanonononanonononancnnnnancnnns F9 ELA GOUP SOS iii Nest o a dt F10 Fl 4 GNVNUGCIIGGNAMEG ida F10 F15 Gr NUCA CU A dad caco F11 Fi6 GVNUCIIDGF eroa E E E E T EA EEEE T EA E E ETE F11 ATACANT O EDE i EAEE EE EN Hie A N N A EEA E EEEN EEEE F13 F18 GVNuclideDataList ooooncccccncncnncnnnnccncnnnacancnnnnccnnnnoncnncnnoncnnnononannnnnonannnononannnn nana rra EEEE nanne nnna F14 F19 GVUnidentifiedPeakListCount oooncccccnnnccncnnnnccnnnnoncnnnnnoncnononononononononnnnnonanncn nono rrnn nana ncnn nana F14 F20 GVUnidentifiedPeakList o oocccccnnnnnnccnnnccnnnnonccnnnnnncnnnnnoncnnnononanonononannnononancno nena nent no nancna noni F15 E21 GNU a ETES eTe e EA e A E EE A di ad F15 F22 GVUnidentifiedPeakData ooooocccccnoncnccnnnncnnnnnonccnnnnoncnnnononcnncononannnononcnnnononannno nena nnan knnen naene nna F16 F23 GVUnidentifiedPeakDataList oooncccccnoncncccnnnccnnnnoncnnnnnoncncnononcnnnononcnnnononannno nono ncnononancna nana F16 E24 GVAWPLISICO ocio A a aaa F17 E25 GV RATAA d E S A A E EE ii nt okie F17 AAEN AW A EEEE a F18 F27 GVRadMonitorListCOUNt ccononccccnncncnncnnnocincnnnnccnnnnoncnncnnoncnnnononannnononannnononannno nena rnnn non
355. uick Starts sc ii ias A2 AZ Sample Administration ios iia A9 A 3 Sample PUDII SNE si o case A51 A QA AdministatloN isisi aa ee tasted ete es A58 BS O A GE cisco aces se ds deecee tepescerc eepes os ced acs suse ove Insane arriero Neo orar A76 AG gt GYOASUNMA Y nilo sia dd liado cet A82 A T Analysis LO aa atelier eae A EKANA Na era A83 A 8 GVDElecioO MONITOR ia A85 A gt Database Ulla A86 AO Fille B ckUD caia A ld A AAA A A TA AA Ed A87 AT FIG COMBANG ids E dd ad tee seat Aslan ate aaa dean ieees A89 A12 GN Data x Pont uscar reere a nceedvee A90 Aria ERT GOI GER act seo tae cts SES A AN A A91 Page A1 of A91 A 1 Global Value Quick Start r Global Value Quick Start Global Value Apps QA A DA E GVSampleData Examples E GVSampleDataPlus Examples GVSampleDataSC Examples Detector a Be Alves On Top Automation G Automation Job Active Job utomation Groups utomation Jobs ctive Jobs Show als debe El Detl Figure A 1 1 Global Value Quick Start Interface The primary purpose of Global Value Quick Start is to dynamically generate automation processes and run them in GammaVision These Jobs as referred in GammaVision are used to collect sample information acquire and analyze spectra generate reports and perform other functions associated with sample measurements The Quick Start application also provides the central interface to launch other programs and runs as a fixed t
356. unter in this file is reset each day and gets incremented when the automation process starts This counter value may not be the same as the Daily Counter stored in the database because the database counter does not get updated if the automation process is canceled in GammaVision before the GVIncrementCounter program is called which is immediately before the analysis data is loaded into the Global Value database See Section B 23 Parameter Example Definition GLOBALVALUEDIR C User GVCR Quick Start application directory DETNO 1 Detector Number DETDESC Detector 1 Detector Description DETDBPATH C User GlobalValue1 mdb Sample Database Path DETQADBPATH C User GlobalValueQA mdb QA Database Path DETJOBNAME Sample Count Automation Job name DETJOBDIR C User Job Det1 Automation Job Directory DETRPTDIR C User SPC Det1 Detector Analysis Report Directory DETCRPTDIR C User Detector Custom Report Directory DETNETDIR c User Detector Network Directory DETPUBDIR C User Publish Detector Publish Directory DETSPECTRUMPREFIX 1_ Detector File Prefix JSTARTDATE 2013 May 23 Date formatted as YYYY MMM DD Page A6 of A91 Parameter Example Definition STARTDATE_YEAR 2013 4 digit year STARTDATE_MONTH 05 2 digit month STARTDATE_MONTHSP May 3 character month abbreviation STARTDATE_DAY 23 2 digit day STARTDAYOFYEAR 143 Day of year no buffer STARTDAYOFYEARBUFFERED 143 3 digit Day of year ST
357. uration to override the default definition See Section B 31 GVTemplateMaster for additional detail 5 Determine the Job Template content as follows a If the Automation Job that was selected was a Job File JOB extension then use the file content for the Job Template b If the Automation Job that was selected was a Job Configuration File CFG extension then the Job Template path is determined by the parameter TEMPLATE in the configuration file created in Step 4 which must be set equal to a valid Job Template file path Page A7 of A91 9 Create a Job File to run in GammaVision as follows a Determine the file name based on the reanalysis flag described in Step 1 where X below is the detector number i For reanalysis the file name will be X_RunReanalysis job ii If not reanalysis the file name will be X_Run job b Merge the Job Template and Configuration File content using the process described for GVTemplateMaster in Section B 31 to create the final Job file Start a new instance of GammaVision and run the Job file as follows a Determine if a detector will be controlled in the automation process by searching the Job file content for the keywords SET_DETECTOR and SETDETECTOR neither of which are case sensitive i If a detector will be controlled then set the GammaVision LastIndex registry parameter to the appropriate list ID if a match can be established in the MCB Configuration file If a
358. urned in the Results file will be One MyParameter One MyParameter Two This process allows standard parameters that may run external process to be overridden or turned off by setting the parameter equal to nothing earlier in the configuration file This methodology is frequently employed in the automation Jobs initiated by Quick Start where functions defined in the Global Configuration files are overridden in the Job Configuration file See Section A 1 for more detail related to the Quick Start program Parameter definitions are nearly limitless in terms of the number of parameters and naming convention however care should be taken to avoid using the same parameter within its own data definition For example MyValue My value is MyValue is a circular reference that cannot be resolved This condition will cause the program to fail without generating the Results file GVCopyFile This program makes a copy of any valid file If the specified file to copy or the destination directory does not exist or the destination file name is not specified then the program fails without displaying any errors This program is typically used for copying a generic system file to a detector specific file name For example Decay sdf may be copied to 1_ Decay sdf during an automation process so that changes can be made to the target file without affecting the source file or any automation routines running on other detectors GVCopyFil
359. us settings to be adjusted and spectra generated interactively GVSpectrumMux has the following comma delimited command line parameters 1 Configuration File Path Full path to Configuration file formatted as described in Section B 35 2 If a valid path is provided then the output spectrum will be created automatically based on the configuration file settings If a valid file path is not specified then the User Interface described in Section B 35 1 is displayed for interactive spectrum multiplexing Page B71 of B77 B 35 1 GVSpectrumMux User Interface The User Interface mode of operation is typically used to perform manual spectrum summing or conversion operations as needed for special circumstances and generate configuration files that can be used as a template in automation processes K Q Global Value Spectrum Multiplexer Process Options Multiplex Method Energy Count Rate Energy Calibration Use Template v Spectrum Template First Spectrum in List y Intercept Template ADC Conversion Gain Ise Template Slope Template Sum Acquisition Time Quadratic Template Spectrum Template Path First 5 pectrum in list is the Ouput Template EL Output Spectrum Path User SPC CombinedSpectrum spe Input Spectra C User SPC Spectrum spe C User SPC Spectrum2 spe Add Spectrum Delete Spectrum Process Spectra Close Figure B 35 1 GVSpectrumMux User Interface As shown in Figure B 35 1
360. ust be enclosed in valid tags The recommended tags are lt GVPublishSampleData gt and lt GVPublishSampleData gt but other names could be used if desired Sample Data parameters described for QA report templates may be included within this record See Section A 2 3 5 for details regarding Report Templates Each parameter should be enclosed in appropriate tags Attributes may also be included in tags if desired 3 The nuclide data QA Point record must be enclosed in the tags lt GVPublishQAData gt and lt GVPublishQAData gt Parameters described in Section A 2 3 5 for Report Templates with the QAPUB prefix are valid parameters within the QA Data record 4 When the XML Template is rendered the Sample Data parameters are replaced with the applicable results and a record for each QA parameter is generated with the tags and data specified The following is an example of a valid XML Template The piped parameters are those specified in Section A 2 3 5 for Report Templates The field tag names are only for example except for the record tags discussed above which must be named accordingly Indentation and spacing is for readability only Page A78 of A91 lt GVPublishDataSet gt lt GVPublishSampleData gt lt SpectrumID gt QASPC lt Spectrum ID gt lt AcquisitionStartTime gt QASMP_ACQU lt AcquisitionStartTime gt lt QAType gt QATYPE lt QAType gt lt Description gt QADESC lt Description gt lt DetectorNu
361. ustment factor to calculate Dose Equivalent lodine or divided by the adjustment factor to determine a fraction of a limit such as Derived Air Concentration fraction for air samples The adjustment factors can also be used to group nuclide activities by various types such as Natural vs Reactor Products or Fission vs Activation products or Noble Gas vs Non Gas activity These groups can be accomplished by including the applicable nuclides in a table named for the applicable category with an adjustment factor of 4 which can be multiplied by the nuclide activity See example Report Templates Detectors Sample Types Nuc Adj Factors Report Templates PDF Properties Custom Fields Adjustment T ables Nuclide Factors Print Ag 110m Am 241 Ar 41 Ba 133 Ba 139 Ba 140 Br 76 O00000E 08 00000E 12 00000E 06 00000E 07 O0000E 05 00000E 07 00000E 06 Br 82 Br 84 Cd 109 4 3 3 3 6 2 2 Q0000E 06 Destination 2 00000E 05 1 00000E 08 Printer Ce 139 3 00000E 07 C MS Word Ce 141 2 00000E 07 a Ce 143 7 00000E 07 C PDF File Ce 144 6 00000E 09 Text File Co 56 8 00000E 08 Co 57 3 00000E 07 Co 58 3 00000E 07 Co 60 1 Cr 51 8 Cs 134 4 Cs 136 3 Cs 137 6 Cs 138 2 Cu 64 3 Eu 152 1 Fe 59 1 H 3 2 00000E 08 00000E 06 Print O0000E 08 00000E 07 00000E 08 00000E 05 00000E 06 O0000E 08 00000E 07 00000E 05 Figure A 2 3 4 1 Nuclide Adjustment Factors Tab Nuclide Adjustment Fact
362. utomation Job Programs for Quality Assurance Measurements Program Section Command Line Parameters GVQASetUser B 1 DETQADBPATH Detector Number Require Login Flag JOBPATH GVQAPeaks B 27 Detector Number DETQADBPATH GVQABackground B 28 Detector Number DETQADBPATH Report Destination WORD NONE or omit UfoToPbc also be used for Blank Samples B 30 UFO File Path PBC File Path 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 Report Destination WORD NONE or omit 1 2 3 1 2 3 Job File Path Page C2 of C4 Automation Job Programs for Sample Measurements Program Section Command Line Parameters GVSetUser B 1 DETDBPATH Require Login Flag JOBPATH Reanalysis Flag GV_ResetInputs B 34 DETDBPATH Spectrum ID GVDeadTimeCheck B 4 Detector Number Dead Time Limit Value JOBPATH Check Duration Geometry List File Path Calibration Directory Calibration File Prefix GVQACheckStatus B 29 Detector Number DETQADBPATH JOBPATH Allow Continue Flag GVClearData B 2 DETDBPATH GVRecallSpectrum B 3 DETDBPATH JOBPATH Reanalysis Data File Path GVSampleData B 6 SDF File Path JOBPATH Default Sample Description Default Decay Date Time Default Quantity Default Quantity Units Default Live Time Reanalysis Flag Reanalysis Data File Path Editable Quantity Units Flag GVSampleDataPlus B 7 Confi
363. utputEnabled This parameter is set to T true to enable the specified report output Anything other than T will disable the report output This parameter allows output configurations to be established for testing or other temporary conditions without removing the complete set of parameters Page A77 of A91 A 5 1 3 OutputCoverTemplate The OutputCoverTemplate is a report template appropriate for the output type specified This parameter can be the full path to a text file or the name of a Report Template established in the Sample Administration Configuration Normally the latter option would be used as it provides security for the template content For PDF and TXT output types this parameter is optional If a template is specified then the rendered content is used as the first section of the report For PDF and TXT output types this template is processed by replacing the QA Header parameters with the applicable QA data See Section A 2 3 5 Report Templates For XML and CSV output types this parameter is required since the template defines the layout and content of these file types These templates are processed significantly different than those used for generating summary reports and must comply with the formatting rules described below The XML Template requires the following configuration 1 The data set record must be enclosed in the tags lt GVPublishDataSet gt and lt GVPublishDataSet gt 2 The Sample Data record m
364. ux_SpectrumTemplatePath File path for the spectrum template Blank to use the first Input spectrum in the list GVSpectrumMux_NumberOfSpectra Number of Input Spectra Specifies the number of Input spectrum paths to read using the SpectrumPathX parameter GVSpectrumMux_SpectrumPathX Input Spectrum File Path Repeat for each input spectrum with X replaced by the spectrum list index GVSpectrumMux_SumAcquisitionTime Sum Acquisition Time Option T Sum Acquisition Times F Do not Sum Acquisition Times GVGammaProductsChangeSample This program communicates with the Gamma Products sample changer using computer to computer serial communication with a Null Modem cable The Gamma Products Sample Changer computer must be running the sample changer software and configured to accept input commands over the serial port for this communication to occur The COMM port settings on the Global Value computer are set by the program to 9600 bits sec 8 data bits no parity and flow control Off as required by the sample changer communication protocol when this program was developed Page B76 of B77 Multiple sample changers can be controlled from one Global Value computer using multiple COMM ports The target port for the application can then be specified as one of the command line arguments as described below For each COMM port connection the program stores the most recent sample changer position in an INI file with the syntax COMMX_POSITION Y
365. value reported for parameters ending in Diff are calculated as a Percent Difference from the Target based on the methodology specified with the QA Limits My Nuclear Power Station Chemistry Department Daily Quality Control Check Spectrum 1 000130 Record Type 06 444 Acquired 17 Feb 2005 07 46 49 Detector DSpecJr Place Instrument Out of Service if any of the following conditions occur 1 Any parameter is Out of Control 2 The same parameter is Out of Tolerance twice consecutively 3 Any OA Peak is not found Channel Energy FWHM Activity ActivityDiff QA 1332 Channel 2665 00 x 2664 51 Energy 1332 50 E 1332 67 FWHM 2 00 e E 1 92 Activity E 2 x E A E 9 77E 2 ActivityDiff Analyst Admin Approval Admin The Results of each parameter are reported as follows Pass Measured value is between the Low and High Tolerance values Low OOC Measured value is lower than the Low Control value Low OOT Measured value is between the Low Tolerance and Low Control values High OOT Measured value is between the High Tolerance and High Control values High OOC Measured value is higher than the High Control value NO DATA The QA parameter was not identified i e no peak identified Page A70 of A91 A 4 6 QA Detectors Detector settings are established in the Sample Administration program and transferred to the QA databases when synchronizing databases The
366. viewer to accommodate different monitor resolution and report content Report Content The report viewer displays any combination of the QA Report and Detailed GammaVision Report Note that the report viewer only displays standard text similar to Notepad If the Print Spectrum on QA Report option is selected in the QA Reporting Opions then the code SpectrumPlaceholder will be displayed in this view This code is set in the report when the GVQAPeaks program Section B 27 or GVQABackground program Section B 28 is run in the automation Job It cannot be added after the report has been stored in the database When reports are printed to any format other than text i e Printer PDF or MS Word an image of the full spectrum in Log scale will replace the text placeholder When printing to a text file the placeholder is simply removed 1 QA Report Option The QA report is displayed in the report viewer 2 Analysis Option The standard GammaVision report is displayed in the report viewer If the QA Report option is also checked then the GammaVision report is appended to the QA Report Page A63 of A91 r Spectrum Viewer Style Bar ne Axis Zoom In Axis Zoom Out Y Axis Zoom In Y Axis Zoom Out Y Axis Properties Scale flog v 1_2014 02 06_001_QA AsLeft Calibration Check Y Auto Range Max Ma FO0E 05 1 00E 05 1 00E 05 Min 1008 01 1 00E 03 1 00E 03 Save Spectrum Bitmap Extract Spectrum 1 00E 01
367. w example formatting codes and example number formats A message is displayed if an invalid format code is entered and changes will not be saved until all format codes are valid Select the Save button to save changes to the number formats Percent Different Methodology QA Parameter Reporting Formats Parameter N umber Format 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00E 0 0 000 0 00 0 00 Figure A 4 7 3 1 Parameter Format Editor The formula for calculating the Percent Difference from the target value for the parameters that have the DIFF suffix can be set to one of four methods as shown in Figure A 4 7 4 1 The Target value is the value entered in the QA Parameter grid and the Measured value is the value associated with the analysis data Each of these formulas is multiplied by 100 to convert to percent i e 100 x Target Measured Target Percent Difference Calc Method C Target Measured Target C Target Measured Measured C Measured Target Measured Save Cancel Figure A 4 7 4 1 Percent Difference Method Page A74 of A91 A 4 8 Database Management The Database Manager provides the tools that may be necessary to manage QA databases as described below o Global Value QA Administration Database Management File Database Path C User GVCR Databases GlobalValueQA mdb gt Login Current User Admin
368. well The content of subsequent fields is limited to those records containing all of the previous dropdown list selections It is critical to ensure that the full combination of all List fields results in a unique records within this file b Field The associated data will be displayed in standard text fields When List parameters are implemented the content of the Field parameters is based on the unique record defined by the selection of all List items c Link The data will be updated in the respective field in the Analysis Data section of GVSampleDataSC Similar to the Field parameters the Linked parameters are determined by the unique combination of parameters in the List fields When no data is specified for a linked field the associated field will be cleared and require manual entry by the analyst An appropriate Analysis Method must be selected before selecting the LIMS data or some parameters may be ignored For example data specified for FLOWRATE will be ignored if the Analysis Method does not implement the flow rate calculation The following Link field codes are available to update the respective fields in the Analysis Data section i SAMPLEDESCRIPTION ii SAMPLECOMMENT iii COLLECTIONSTART iv COLLECTIONSTOP Page B45 of B77 v SAMPLETYPE vi GEOMETRY vii LIBRARY viii SAMPLEQUANTITY ix SAMPLEQUANTITYUNITS x DILUTIONFACTOR xi COLLECTIONEFFICIENCY xii ACTIVITYUNITS xiii COUNTTIME xiv FLOWRATE xv FLO
369. ws e Configuration Allows access to all Configuration parameters described in Sections A 2 3 2 through A 2 3 9 e Security Allows access to User Accounts and Group Permissions described in Section A 2 3 1 e Add Data Allows users to login for sample counting or QA and set the analyst name for display on reports when the Login prompt is configured in Job files Users who do not have this permission set will not be able to add data to the database so they will not be allowed to progress past the Login prompt Ifthe Login prompt is not employed in Job files this permission has no effect on operation with Jobs This permission also allows users to Add comments in the QA Administration Lab Notebook e Edit Data Allows analysis data to be modified in the Analysis Editor and if the sample has not been locked i e Review or Publish signature applied If data is modified in the Analysis Editor then the current user s name will be added to the Editor field and the Edit Date set to the current date time The Change Summary is also updated to reflect any changes along with the Editor name and date time This permission also allows users to edit their own comments in the QA Administration Lab Notebook e Delete Data Allows complete analysis records all reports and data associated with a spectrum to be removed from the applicable Sample or QA database The spectrum and any other files saved outside of the Global Value database are not

Global Value

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents